JP6505631B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A so-called pachinko gaming machine is known as a gaming machine for playing a game using gaming balls. Among pachinko gaming machines, there is known a pachinko gaming machine having a movable part movable between a liquid crystal display area and an area outside the liquid crystal display area in a display area for displaying an image (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

JP, 2010-214010, A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 described above, the movable part only moves between the liquid crystal display area and the outside of the liquid crystal display area, and the movable part does not move at the standby position. This makes it impossible to further enhance the rendering effect of the movable combination.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of further enhancing the rendering effect by the movable part.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is movable to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving between the standby position and the movable position (lower movable effect member 101B) And the movable part is a first movable body (movable body 106) movable in one direction and the other direction by rotation of a driving member (motor 110A), and a pressing portion (107C). A second movable body (movable body 107), which is movably provided to the first movable body and is movable with the first movable body in the one direction and the other direction; A third movable body (movable body 108) movable in the other direction together with the two movable bodies and a guide hole (112A) are provided swingably in the first movable body, and the pressing portion Interlocking unit (arm member 112) And a rotary member (rotary body 114) rotatably provided on the third movable body and having a first fitting portion (fitting projection 114A) and a plurality of slits (114B) fitted to the interlocking portion. A movable portion (slider member 115) movable in at least a radial direction of the rotating member by rotation of the rotating member. And the outer ring member 117), the first movable body and the first movable body by positively rotating the drive member from the initial position in a state where the movable part is located at the standby position. wherein the second movable member moves in the one direction to convert the swinging of the interlocking portion in the rotation in a predetermined direction of said rotary member, at least emits the movable portion while allowing only the rotation of said rotary member And movable in direction, the conversion by the reverse rotation of the drive member from an initial position, the swinging of the said interlocking portion by moving the first movable body in the other direction to the rotation of said predetermined direction of said rotary member The third movable body is moved in the other direction to move the movable part to the movable position while moving the movable portion at least in the radial direction.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, two different effects such as an effect of moving the movable role at the standby position and an effect of moving the standby position from the standby position to the movable position are divided into one rotation direction of the single drive member. It can be easily performed only by switching, and can further enhance the effect of the movable combination.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of further enhancing the effect of the movable role.

It is an appearance perspective view of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board in a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a partially expanded perspective view of the game board in the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from right back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable body and movable member of the lower side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable body and movable member of the lower side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from right rear. It is a general rear elevation view of a movable object in case a lower side movable effect member in a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention is in a waiting position. FIG. 17 is a schematic rear view of the movable body when the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is enlarged at the standby position. It is a general rear elevation view of a movable body in case a lower side movable effect member in a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention is in a movable position. It is a general rear elevation view of a movable member in case a lower side movable effect member in a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention is in a movable position. FIG. 21 is a schematic rear view of the movable member when the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is enlarged at the standby position. It is a general rear elevation view of a movable member when a lower movable presentation member in a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention expands a movable part in a movable position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the lower side movable effect member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention expands in a standby position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the lower side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention expands in a movable position. It is a front view of a winning opening unit and a lower movable effect member in a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is a top view of the winning opening unit in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the prize-winning mouth unit in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the perspective view which looked at the periphery of the back cover and lower side movable effect member in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the right front. It is a front view of the lower side movable effect member which expanded the winning opening unit and the standby position in the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the lower side movable effect member in which the composition of the winning opening unit and movable part in the game machine concerning one embodiment (modification) of the present invention differs. It is a front view of a state where a lower movable effect member having a different configuration of the winning opening unit and the movable portion in the gaming machine according to one embodiment (modification) of the present invention is enlarged at the standby position. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from right back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the case of the upper side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, a fixed base, and a back side movable base from right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the case of the upper side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, a fixed base, and a back side movable base from right back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front side movable base of the upper side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, a blade | wing movable rack, and a decoration member from right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front side movable base of the upper side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, a blade | wing movable rack, and a decoration member from right back. FIG. 16 is a schematic front view of the rear movable base and the front movable base when the upper movable effect member is in the standby position in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 18 is a schematic front view of the rear movable base and the front movable base when the upper movable effect member is in the movable position in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic front view of the front side movable base and the blade | wing movable rack in case the upper side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention exists in a standby position. It is a schematic front view of the front side movable base in case the upper side movable presentation member in a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention is in a movable position, and a blade movable rack. It is a schematic front view of the electric decoration board | substrate in case the upper side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention exists in a standby position. It is a schematic front view of the electric decoration substrate in case the upper side movable presentation member in a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention is in a movable position. It is XL-XL direction arrow sectional drawing of FIG. It is XLI-XLI direction arrow sectional drawing of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the back side movable base in the state which the upper side movable presentation member moved to the movable position from the state of FIG. 41, a front side movable base, and the blade | wing movable rack. It is XLIII-XLIII direction arrow sectional drawing of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the back side movable base of the state which the upper side movable presentation member moved to the movable position from the state of FIG. 43, a front side movable base, and the blade | wing movable rack. It is a figure which shows the state of the flexible cable accommodated in the back side movable base, the front side movable base, and the blade | wing movable rack in case the upper side movable presentation member in a game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention exists in a standby position. It is a figure which shows the state of the flexible cable accommodated in the back side movable base in case the upper side movable presentation member in a game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention exists in a movable position, a front side movable base, and a blade movable rack. It is explanatory drawing which showed the state which the upper side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention moves to a movable position from a standby position in order of (a)-(c). It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the upper side movable presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention moved to the movable position. FIG. 7 is a transition diagram showing a gaming state and an effect mode of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a one round opening and closing pattern of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the displacement member operation pattern of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows a part of sub rendering content determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows a part of sub rendering content determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd starting opening switch check processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big winning a prize mouth switch check processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big winning a prize mouth switch check processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol control processing of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol memory check processing of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol determination processing of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. 7 is a flowchart showing waiting time pre-reopening waiting time management processing of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing under big winning opening opening of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval management processing of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the sub control circuit of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation pattern determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process in ST mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the story production pattern change process in ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the item prefetch effect process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the item use presentation process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the plate A use presentation process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the plate B use presentation process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the plate C use presentation process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the item acquisition presentation process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit production pattern determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start presentation process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end production process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the live bonus of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the live bonus of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display at the time of the normal time of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the music pattern A of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the music pattern A of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story area of ST mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story area of ST mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the presentation pattern per related story for SP bonus of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the item pre-reading effect of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the item pre-reading effect of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the item pre-reading effect of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit rendering pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment (modification) of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the story presentation table group of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment (modification) of this invention. It is a figure which shows the main fluctuation time determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment (modification) of this invention. It is a perspective view showing a big winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member action pattern of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol control processing of the game machine concerning other embodiments of the present invention. It is a block diagram of the left side movable effect member and the right side movable effect member of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the left side movable effect member and the right side movable effect member moved to the movable position in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of a game board in a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl passage unit in the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention from right front. It is a front view of the ball | bowl passage unit in the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. FIG. 126 is a cross-sectional view taken along the direction of arrows CXXVI-CXXVI in FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a cross-sectional view taken along the direction of arrows CXXVII-CXXVII in FIG. 125. It is a front view of a game board in a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
[Structure of gaming machine]
First, an overview of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described using FIGS. 1 to 5.

  1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of this embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area where a game ball as a game medium can roll and flow is detachably provided. A main frame 2 provided with a main frame base plate 2a (also referred to as a main frame base), and a front frame base plate 3a (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) capable of visually recognizing the game board 1 A front frame 3 provided with a front frame base and supported rotatably by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (player's side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing predetermined effect display ( 3) is provided with a rear frame base plate (not shown) detachably provided, and a rear frame (shown in FIG. 3) rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (the counter player side) ).

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via the outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via a main body frame hinge 2b. In addition, while the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 in FIG. 1, the state which the main body frame 2 was closed with respect to the outer frame 6 is shown, and in this state, a back frame is Because it is housed in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

  The front frame 3 has a front frame base plate 3a and various front frame constituent members provided on the front frame base plate 3a. The front frame component members include the protective glass 7, the dish unit 8, the operation unit 9, the speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (the top decoration 14, the right decorative member 15, the left decorative member 16) and the like. In addition, a front frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the front frame 3 are contained. Further, in the pan unit 8, respective cover members (upper pan top cover 8a, lower pan cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

  In the front frame 3, the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h is provided with a protective glass 7 having transparency. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3 h (window portion) provided on the front frame base plate 3 a provided on the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3 a When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 2, the front frame 3 faces the front (front) side of the game board 1 and covers the front (front) side. At the upper part of the front frame 3, speakers 10a and 10b are provided on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h for producing effects by sound.

  Moreover, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a decorative member for improving the appearance is provided so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decoration member, a top decoration 14 incorporating a playing card later described is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and light emitting display modes are provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. A right decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c and the like) which can be changed, and a left decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a and the like) are provided.

  Inside the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp, LED 27 etc.) controlled by a sub control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later are provided (see FIG. 6) . The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16 and is sensed from the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16 as an aesthetically superior light such as diffused light. Thereby, since it is possible to change the display mode by the light, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, a dish unit 8 is provided on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3 h of the front frame base plate 3 a. The tray unit 8 is provided with an upper tray 17 for storing lending balls and prize balls, and a lower tray 18 provided on the lower side of the upper tray 17, for example, capable of storing gaming balls overflowed when the upper tray 17 is full. Is provided.

  The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing gaming balls, and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper tray 17 includes an upper tray main body 17p capable of storing gaming balls, and an upper tray upper cover 8a removably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper portion of the upper tray main body 17p. An upper plate decoration member is provided to improve the appearance of the upper plate 17. As an example of the upper dish decoration member, the upper dish main body 17p is provided with an upper dish left decoration 17a, an upper dish front decoration 17c, etc. so as to surround the upper dish upper cover 8a, and the upper dish front decoration 17c. In the upper plate upper cover 8a, it is bent from the left side to the lower side through the front side and from the middle toward the right side to the lower plate 18.

  A payout opening 20 for paying out gaming balls to the upper plate 17 and a discharge opening for discharging gaming balls stored in the upper tray 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a (not shown) And a supply port 21 for supplying the lower plate 18 with gaming balls discharged from the discharge port. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball passage cover (shown in FIG. 6) is configured to communicate the ball passage of the game ball dispensed from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6) and the discharge port and the supply port 21. ) Is provided. When the gaming ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the gaming ball is sent to the upper tray 17 through the payout opening 20, but the upper portion of the gaming sphere is retained near the payout opening 20 although the gaming ball is paid out. Is full, or when the ball release button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 17 are discharged through the ball passage and the lower plate via the supply port 21. Sent to 18

  In the present embodiment, a plating member is used to decorate the front of the gaming machine, and the plating member 17b is also used to decorate the front portion 17c of the upper tray 17. By using the plating member 17b, the decorative effect of the appearance design of the game machine is enhanced to improve the player's interest.

  In addition to a return button 24 for returning a card from the card lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a card unit 84 for lending a gaming ball (not shown), etc. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player operating (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game of. Although the arrangement configuration (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, the pressing operation button 9A is vertically projected from the upper plate upper cover 8a in the drawing as an example, and the outer periphery of the pressing operation button 9A An operation unit 9 is shown in which the jog dial 9B is arranged.

  As for the front frame 3, among the front surface (front surface), the portion on the left side (i.e., the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) facing the player, for example, an incorrect piano wire or the like It is possible to assume that a fraudulent action by the fraudulent member is performed on various components built on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the portion by infiltrating the member.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an illegal act, a cover member (not shown) with a wire holding function is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at the portion where the intruding act by the illegal member is performed. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion for holding a wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion for covering a substrate (not shown) formed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an illegal member such as a piano wire. It is configured to be integrated with a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function that has the three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and fraud prevention, so it is necessary to separately prepare members for each of these functions. Can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The main body frame 2 includes a main body frame base plate 2 a and various main body frame components provided to the main body frame base plate 2 a. The main body frame constituent members include the launcher 26, the speaker 10c, various control boards, relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

  In the main frame 2, a main frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3 h is provided at a predetermined position of the main frame base plate 2 a facing the above front frame opening 3 h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, on the lower right side of the main body frame opening portion, a launch device 26 for launching game balls is provided.

  The launcher 26 includes a panel 26a for disposing the launcher 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the body frame base plate 2a, a launch handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel 26a, and a panel 26a. It is disposed on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a opposite to the rear surface side of the main frame 2 and comprises a launch drive device (not shown) for launching game balls.

  In the lower right side of the front frame 3, a notch 3p for exposing the launcher 26 (panel body 26a, launch handle 26b) to the player side is provided. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launcher 26 (panel body 26 a, the launch handle 26 b) is exposed through the notch 3 p of the front frame 3 and adjacent to the above-described tray unit 8. Be positioned. Such a launcher 26 (panel body 26a, launch handle 26b) and the tray unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they were integrated with one another in series.

  The launch handle 26b is rotatably mounted on a support portion (not shown) and the support portion, and is provided in a handle gop 26d rotatable clockwise and counterclockwise, and provided in the support portion. It is disposed so as to cover the opening of the handle grip 26d and a launch stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the ball, a launch stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning the launch stop switch ON / OFF. And a handle cap 26h.

  When the handle grip 26d of the discharge handle 26b is rotated clockwise, the drive force of the discharge drive is increased or decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotational angle), and the drive force at that time stores in the upper tray 17. The game ball being shot is launched toward the game area 1 p (see FIG. 3) of the game board 1. At this time, when the launch stop button 26e is operated, the launch drive device is controlled to stop, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by the payout / firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6). Inside the launcher 26, a spring member (not shown) is provided for resiliently urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction at all times, and the player can adjust the spring member to the elasticity. By rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction, the game ball is fired.

  Also, when the player interrupts the game and releases his hand from the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start time point position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the firing stop button 26e is pressed by the protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d, whereby the firing of the gaming ball is stopped.

Here, as a method to increase or decrease the launch strength of the game ball, the resistance value of the launch volume (not shown) is changed according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b. Although it is known to increase or decrease the launch strength of the game ball by changing the power supplied to the a), the launch device 26 of this embodiment is operated to turn the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b. A firing spring (not shown) (not shown) and a gear mechanism (not shown) for rolling up (tightening) the firing spring are provided. In the launcher 26, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b, thereby strengthening or weakening the degree of winding (tightening) of the launch spring. The launch strength of the is to be increased or decreased.

  The speaker 10 c is provided at the lower center of the main body frame 2 so as to perform effects by sound. A sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through a speaker cover 10k provided at a portion of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, a portion between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). It has become.

  The game board 1 is disposed in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and a rear cover 1A (see FIG. 23) is provided behind the game board 1 There is. The game board 1 has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game ball can roll and flow. In addition, although the game board 1 is formed by the material (for example, polycarbonate etc.) which has translucency, you may be formed by the material which does not have translucency like a plywood etc., for example.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first start opening 32, a second start opening 33, and a blade member 34 for opening and closing the second start opening 33. The first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37, the first large winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second large winning opening 37, the second A specific area 38A and a nonspecific area 38B located below the big winning opening 37, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A, a plurality of general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, an out opening 41, an upper movable effect member The lower movable effect member 101B, the cover member 43, the liquid crystal display device 4, and the LED unit 5 are provided. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the passing gate 35, the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37, the specific area 38A, and the general winning opening 40A. , 40B, 40C, and 40D form a winning area. FIG. 4 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed.

  Guide rail 30, stage 31, first starting opening 32, second starting opening 33, second starting opening 33, passing gate 35, general winning opening 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, out opening 41 on the surface of game board 1 Is provided. In addition to the out slot 41 provided below the game board 1, an out slot is provided in the game area 1p near the first large winning port shutter 36A, the second large winning port shutter 37A or the first start port 32. May be

  The lower movable effect member 101B is provided at the rear of the game board 1, and can be viewed by the player from the front. In the game board 1, an opening 1B (see FIG. 22) is formed. The upper movable effect member 101A is disposed between the game board 1 and the rear cover 1A (see FIG. 23) in the upper part of the game board 1, and the front of the upper movable effect member 101A is covered by the decorative member 99. There is.

  That is, the upper movable effect member 101A is disposed behind the decorative member 99. The decorative member 99 is made of a member capable of transmitting light, and letters such as alphabets, numbers, kanji, hiragana, katakana, symbols, etc. may be formed on the decorative member 99, and the picture constituting the character is It may be formed. The decorative member 99 of the present embodiment constitutes the decorative member of the present invention.

  An opening (not shown) is formed at the lower right of the game board 1. At the opening, a first large winning opening shutter 36A, a second large winning opening 37, a second large winning opening shutter 37A, a specific area 38A There is mounted a winning opening unit in which the non-specific area 38B and the displacement member 39 are unitized.

  The guide rail 30 is composed of an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is disposed so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the gaming ball to the upper portion of the game board 1 together with the outer rail 30A, and is disposed on the left side of the game board 1 inside the outer rail 30A. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side.

  The stage 31 is to distribute the flow-down area of the game balls in the game area 1 p, and is arranged along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The game ball fired by the launch device 26 heads downward of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) or the stage 31 or the like driven into the game area 1 p of the game board 1 Flow down. In this process, the gaming ball wins any one of the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37, and the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D. In addition, it is collected by being discharged from the out port 41 when not winning or passing through the passing gate 35 and then not winning.

  The term "winning" means that the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area to give an advantageous situation (for example, opening of the second starting opening 33, symbol lottery, winning ball, etc. described later) to the player. It means to do. In this case, passage of the winning area by the gaming ball means simple passing, and entering of the winning area by the gaming ball means collecting the gaming ball separately from the out port 41, but in any case, it will be described later. Since winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, passage and entering are substantially equivalent. Therefore, the passage of the game ball to the winning area and the entering of the ball lead to the winning, so in the following description, it is unified by "winning" unless otherwise noted. In addition, the game ball may pass through the specific area 38A in some cases as "V prize winning".

  When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26 b is relatively small, the gaming balls flow down mainly on the left side of the stage 31 because the striking power given to the gaming balls is generally small. In addition, when the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively large, the game balls mainly flow down the right side of the stage 31 because the launch forces given to the game balls are generally large. In general, how to strike the game ball on the left side of the stage 31 is called "left-handed", and how to strike the game ball on the right side of the stage 31 is referred to as "right-handed".

  The first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 trigger a lottery under the condition that the game ball wins, and cause the display result of the lottery to be displayed on the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4 It is something to give. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 realize a first starting area and a second starting area.

  The first starting opening 32 is provided generally at the lower position at the center of the game board 1. When the game ball is won in the first starting opening 32, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 17 or the lower tray 18 through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21. The winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 32 is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

  The second start port 33 is provided immediately below the pass gate 35. When a game ball is won in the second starting opening 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21. In the second starting opening 33, the difficulty of winning is determined by the blade member 34 as a normal motorized part. The winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 33 is detected by the second starting opening switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

  The wing members 34 open and close in such a manner that they project and retreat in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and an open state enabling the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 33, and the second start It is a so-called ordinary electric winning combination that switches between the closed state which makes it impossible or difficult to win the game ball in the mouth 33. The wing member 34 is driven by a wing member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

  It should be noted that the ordinary motor winning combination is not limited to one operating the wing member 34 so as to open and close in the front and rear direction, for example, a so-called electric tulip type in which the starting opening is expanded by rotating in the left and right direction of the game board 1 It may be a tongue-like member that opens and closes the starting opening by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  The passage gate 35 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33. The winning of the game ball on the passing gate 35 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball is won on the passing gate 35, no winning ball is generated.

  The first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are opened in a hit gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. The first large winning opening 36 is generally on the right side of the first starting opening 32 and is provided immediately below the passage gate 35. The second large winning opening 37 is generally on the right side of the first starting opening 32 and is provided immediately below the first large winning opening 36. In addition, about the position where the 1st big winning opening 36 and the 2nd big winning opening 37 are arranged, it can change suitably according to the specification etc. of a game machine not only the position mentioned above.

  The first large winning opening 36 is formed in the gaming board 1 as an opening having a relatively large horizontal dimension so that a plurality of gaming balls can be simultaneously prized. In the vicinity of the first big winning opening 36, a first big winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the same is provided. The winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36 is detected by the first large winning opening count switch 360 (see FIG. 6).

  The second large winning opening 37 is formed on a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having a relatively small vertical and horizontal dimension so that one game ball can win one by one. In the vicinity of the second large winning opening 37, a second large winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second large winning opening 37 is provided. The winning of the game ball to the second large winning opening 37 is detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370 (see FIG. 6).

  The first large winning opening shutter 36A switches the first large winning opening 36 to the open state or the closed state by opening and closing so as to be in the forward and backward posture in the front and rear direction of the gaming board 1, It is arranged to cover the first large winning opening 36 in the closed state. That is, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is changed to an open state in which the game ball can be won in the first large winning hole 36 and a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. It is driven by the special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A (see FIG. 6).

  The second large winning opening shutter 37A switches the second large winning opening 37 to the open state or the closed state by moving horizontally in the longitudinal direction of the gaming board 1, and the second large winning opening 37 is closed in the closed state. It is arranged to cover. That is, the second large winning opening shutter 37A is changed to an open state in which the game ball can be won in the second large winning hole 37 and a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. It is driven by the special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

  The specific area 38A and the nonspecific area 38B are areas through which gaming balls that have won the second large winning opening 37 can pass thereafter, and are covered with the cover member 43. A ball passage of the gaming ball from the second big winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the cover member 43. The game balls that have won the second large winning opening 37 are guided to the back surface of the game board 1 and collected after passing through one of the specific area 38A and the nonspecific area 38B. A second large winning opening count switch 370 is disposed at an intermediate position of the ball passage from the second large winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the nonspecific area 38B. The specific area switch 380A is disposed in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the gaming ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is disposed in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of gaming balls to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. Further, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A is provided in the vicinity of the specific area 38A.

  The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A to the open state or the closed state by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacing member 39 changes to an open state (first state) in which the V winning of the gaming ball to the specific area 38A is easy (V1) and a closed state (V2) in which V winning is impossible or difficult. It is driven by a displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 6). When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the gaming ball for which the V winning is impossible will pass through the non-specific area 38B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first large winning opening 36, the first large winning opening shutter 36A, the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, and the first large winning opening count switch 360 are the first variable winning device. It has been realized. The second large winning opening 37, the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the second large winning opening count switch 370 realize a second variable winning device.

  The general winning openings 40A, 40B and 40C are provided on the left with respect to the first large winning opening 36, and the general winning opening 40D is provided on the upper right of the second large winning opening 37. When the game balls are won in the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, although a lottery is not performed, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6). The winning of the game ball on the general winning opening 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B.

<Configuration and operation of lower movable effect member 101B>
FIGS. 7 to 19 are diagrams showing the game board 1 showing a state in which the lower side movable effect member 101B and the lower side movable effect member 101B are moved. In FIGS. 7 to 19, the vertical and horizontal directions from the player are from the player. It is the up, down, left, and right directions of the lower side movable effect member 101B as viewed. The lower side movable effect member 101B of the present embodiment constitutes the movable part of the present invention.

  In FIGS. 7, 8, and 9, the lower movable effect member 101 </ b> B includes the fixed members 104 and 105, the movable members 106, 107 and 108, and the movable member 109.

  The fixed body 104 is fixed to the rear cover 1A (see FIG. 23) at the rear of the game board 1. In FIG. 8, shaft portions 104A to 104D are provided on the fixed body 104, and gears 113A to 113D are rotatably supported by the shaft portions 104A to 104D, respectively.

  In FIGS. 8 and 9, a motor mounting plate 110 is mounted on the front surface of the fixed body 104, and the gears 113A to 113D are accommodated between the motor mounting plate 110 and the fixed body 104.

  A motor 110A is fixed to the motor mounting plate 110. A gear 113A is attached to a rotating shaft (not shown) of the motor 110A. The gear 113D is formed larger in diameter than the gears 113A to 113C, and the rotation of the motor 110A is decelerated by being transmitted from the gear 113A to the large-diameter gear 113D via the gears 113B and 113C.

  The fixed body 105 is fixed to the fixed body 104, and the movable bodies 106 and 107 are accommodated between the fixed body 104 and the fixed body 105, and provided movably in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105. It is done.

  Rack teeth 106A extending in the vertical direction are formed on the side surfaces of the movable body 106, and the rack teeth 106A mesh with the gear 113D. Thus, when the motor 110A is driven, the movable body 106 is vertically moved with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105 by the gear 113D.

  The movable body 106 is formed with a pair of guide holes 106B and 106C extending in the vertical direction, and guide protrusions 104E and 104F provided on the fixed body 104 are slidably fitted in the guide holes 106B and 106C, respectively. It is correct.

  A long guide hole 104G extending in the vertical direction is formed in the fixed body 104, and a guide protrusion 106E provided on the back surface of the movable body 106 is slidably fitted in the guide hole 104G. .

  Thereby, when moving the movable body 106 in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed body 104, the movable body 106 moves along the guide protrusions 104E and 104F and the guide hole 104G and does not swing in the left and right direction with respect to the fixed body 104. .

  A guide hole 107A extending in the vertical direction is formed in the movable body 107, and a guide protrusion 106F provided on the movable body 106 is slidably fitted in the guide hole 107A. As a result, the movable body 107 is supported by the guide projection 106F, moves in the vertical direction with respect to the movable body 106, and does not swing in the lateral direction with respect to the movable body 106.

  A rack tooth 107B having an uneven portion extending in the vertical direction is formed on the side surface of the movable body 107, and the rack tooth 107B meshes with the gear 111.

  On the fixed body 105, rack teeth 105A are formed facing each other in the left-right direction of the game board 1 and having an uneven portion extending in the vertical direction, and the rack teeth 105A mesh with the gear 111. The gear 111 is rotatably attached to a shaft portion 106 </ b> G provided on the movable body 106. Thus, when the movable body 106 moves in the vertical direction, the movable body 107 moves up and down together with the movable body 106 by rotating the gear 111 that moves up and down integrally with the movable body 106.

  The movable body 106 is provided with a shaft portion 106H, and an arm member 112 is pivotally attached to the shaft portion 106H. A pressing portion 107C extending in a direction (left and right direction) orthogonal to the extending direction (vertical direction) of the movable body 107 is provided at the upper portion of the movable body 107. The pressing portion 107C is provided above the arm member 112. positioned.

  When the movable body 107 moves downward, the arm member 112 is swung downward by the pressing portion 107C with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum.

  A pair of guide holes 108A and 108B extending in the vertical direction are formed at both ends of the movable body 108, and guide protrusions 105B and 105C provided at both ends of the fixed body 105 slide on the guide holes 108A and 108B. It fits freely. As a result, the movable body 108 is supported by the guide protrusions 105B and 105C, moves relative to the fixed body 105 in the vertical direction, and does not swing in the horizontal direction with respect to the fixed body 105.

  A guide groove 108C extending in the vertical direction is formed on the back surface of the movable body 108. A guide protrusion 107D is formed on the upper end of the movable body 107, and the guide protrusion 107D is slidably fitted in the guide groove 108C.

  Thus, when the movable body 107 moves upward, the guide projection 107D of the movable body 107 moves upward along the guide groove 108C and abuts on the inner peripheral upper end of the guide groove 108C, whereby the movable body 108 moves upward. Do.

  The movable body 108 is formed with a curved hole 108D. The curved hole 108D extends in the circumferential direction of the movable body 108 by a predetermined length. The movable member 109 is attached to the movable body 108, and is movable in the vertical direction together with the movable body 108.

  10 and 11, the movable member 109 includes a rotating body 114, a plurality of slider members 115, a circular member 116, and a plurality of outer ring members 117.

  The rotating body 114 is rotatably supported by a shaft 116 i provided on the circular member 116, and the shaft 116 i is fixed to the movable body 108. A fitting protrusion 114A is provided on the back surface of the rotating body 114. The fitting protrusion 114A is slidably fitted in the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108 and the guide hole 112A (see FIG. 8) of the arm member 112.

  In the rotary body 114, when the arm member 112 swings with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum, the fitting projection 114A slides along the curved hole 108D, whereby the movable body 108 with respect to the movable body 108 with the shaft portion 116i as a fulcrum. It is possible to rotate.

  The rotating body 114 is formed with a plurality of slits 114B. In FIG. 15, the slit 114B is a linear portion bent from the first linear portion 114n radially outwardly of the rotary member 114 and a first linear portion 114n linearly extending radially inward of the rotary member 114. And a second straight portion 114w extending in the shape of a letter "".

  In FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, a fitting protrusion 115 </ b> A is formed on the back surface of the slider member 115. The fitting protrusion 115A is slidably fitted in the slit 114B of the rotating body 114.

  The circular member 116 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 116A that project toward the movable body 108. The protrusion 116A is engaged with an engagement hole 108F formed at a distance in the circumferential direction of the movable body 108 by a screw or the like (not shown). Thus, the circular member 116 is fixed to the movable body 108 and does not rotate relative to the movable body 108. The engagement in the present embodiment may include engagement or fixation of an object by a screw, a screw or the like (a component, a fixing portion, an engaging portion, etc.), and such a state is fastened. It is also possible to express Moreover, the slit of this embodiment includes a notch, a groove, an elongated hole, and the like.

  The circular member 116 is formed with a plurality of fitting grooves 116B. In FIG. 15, the fitting groove 116B is bent from the first straight portion 116n linearly extending in the radial direction of the circular member 116 and the first straight portion 116n in the radial direction of the circular member 116. And a second straight portion 116w extending in a straight line.

  10 and 11, a plurality of fitting projections 115B are formed on the surface of the slider member 115, and the fitting projections 115B are slidably fitted in the fitting grooves 116B.

  The outer ring member 117 is divided in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116 and provided. The outer ring members 117 are respectively attached to the radially outer peripheral portion of the slider member 115, and provided around the outer peripheral portion of the circular member 116 so as to abut on the radially outer peripheral surface of the circular member 116.

  In the slider member 115, the fitting protrusion 115A is fitted in the slit 114B of the rotating body 114, and the fitting protrusion 115B is fitted in the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. Thereby, when the rotary body 114 rotates in one direction, the slider member 115 moves in the radial direction of the rotary body 114 along the slit 114B and the fitting groove 116B, and then swings in the circumferential direction of the rotary body 114. Move. Therefore, the outer ring member 117 moves in the radial direction of the rotary body 114 and then moves in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116 so as to form a gap in the circumferential direction of the rotary body 114.

  A torsion spring 118 is wound around the shaft portion 116i of the circular member 116. The torsion spring 118 has one end attached to the movable body 108 and the other end attached to the rotary body 114, and biases the rotary body 114 to the standby position.

  In FIGS. 8 and 9, the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are connected by a coil spring 119. Specifically, in FIG. 9, an engaging portion 105D is provided on the back surface of the fixed body 105, and one end of a coil spring 119 is attached to the engaging portion 105D. An engaging portion 106I is provided at a lower portion of the side surface of the movable body 106, and the other end of the coil spring 119 is attached to the engaging portion 106I.

  The coil spring 119 allows the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 to be relatively contracted, that is, the distance between the engaging portion 105D and the engaging portion 106I to be shortened. I am energized. In other words, the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are biased by the coil spring 119 so that the distance between the engaging portion 105D and the engaging portion 106I in the vertical direction becomes short.

  The movable body 106 and the fixed body 104 are connected by a coil spring 120. Specifically, an engaging portion 106J is provided at the lower part of the movable body 106, and one end of a coil spring 120 is attached to the engaging portion 106J. An engaging portion 104H is provided on the upper portion of the fixed body 104, and the other end of the coil spring 120 is attached to the engaging portion 104H.

  The coil spring 120 is configured such that the fixed body 104 and the movable body 106 are relatively contracted, that is, the distance between the engaging portion 104H and the engaging portion 106J in the vertical direction is shortened. I am energized. In other words, the fixed body 104 and the movable body 106 are biased by the coil spring 120 so that the distance in the vertical direction between the engaging portion 104H and the engaging portion 106J becomes short. Relatively extending means that when one part and the other part move relative to each other, the specific part of one part and the specific part of the other part (for example, the lower end of one part and the other part) It means that the distance between the lower part and the lower part is relatively long. When the relative movement between one part and the other part is relative movement, the specific part of one part and the specific part of the other part ( For example, it means that the distance between the lower end of one part and the lower end of the other part becomes short. 8 and 9 show a state in which the coil springs 119 and 120 are maximally contracted.

  In FIG. 8, the lower movable effect member 101 </ b> B includes a flexible cable 130. The other end of the flexible cable 130 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78 (see FIG. 6).

  The flexible cable 130 extends from the other end to the movable member 109 through a slit 108E (see FIG. 9) formed in the movable body 108. The movable member 109 incorporates an unshown electric decoration substrate having an LED (not shown), and the flexible cable 130 turns on the LED by transmitting a control signal from the lamp control circuit 78 to the electric decoration substrate.

  Flexible cable 130 is installed by bending between fixed body 104, movable body 106, fixed body 105, and movable body 108, and when movable body 106 and movable body 108 move relative to fixed body 105. It is made to expand and contract. As a result, the flexible cable 130 can expand and contract smoothly while allowing the movable body 106 and the movable body 108 to move relative to the fixed body 105.

  Here, the motor 110A of the present embodiment constitutes a drive member of the present invention, and the movable body 106 constitutes a first movable body of the present invention. The movable body 107 constitutes a second movable body of the present invention, and the movable body 108 constitutes a third movable body of the present invention. The rotating body 114 constitutes a rotating member of the present invention. The fitting protrusion 114A constitutes a first fitting portion of the present invention, and the slit 114B constitutes a slit of the present invention. The fitting protrusion 115A constitutes a second fitting portion of the present invention. The movable member 109 constitutes the movable member of the present invention, and the slider member 115 and the outer ring member 117 constitute the movable portion of the present invention. The arm member 112 constitutes an interlocking portion of the present invention.

Next, the operation of the lower movable effect member 101B will be described.
The lower movable effect member 101 </ b> B is installed at the rear of the game board 1. A state in which the movable bodies 106 to 108 are not moved upward (in front of the central portion of the display area 4A) with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105 is the standby position. That is, the position shown in FIG. 3 is the standby position of the lower movable effect member 101B. Further, in the position shown in FIG. 3, the movable members 106 and 107 move downward with respect to the fixed members 104 and 105 (see FIG. 13), and the lower movable effect member 101B is expanded in the radial direction (FIG. 18). Is also included in the standby position.

  When the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position, as shown in FIG. 12, the movable members 106 to 108 are in a relatively contracted state, and the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotary member 114 has a curved hole 108D. It is fitted to the upper end of the inner circumference in the extending direction. Further, the gear 113D is meshed below the upper portion of the rack teeth 106A of the movable body 106.

  When the motor 110A is driven in one direction (forward rotation) from the initial position with the lower movable effect member 101B positioned at the standby position, as shown in FIG. 13, the rotation of the gear 113A rotates the gears 113B and 113C. The movable body 106 is moved downward by the rotation of the gear 113D, which is transmitted to the gear 113D via the gear 113D and meshes with the rack teeth 106A.

  When the movable body 106 moves downward, the gear 111 integrally provided on the movable body 106 moves downward while rotating. The fixed body 105 is fixed to the fixed body 104 fixed to the rear cover 1A and does not move with the fixed body 104. Therefore, when the gear 111 rotates, the rotation of the gear 111 is transmitted to the rack teeth 107B, and the movable body 107 moves downward. Move to That is, the movable bodies 106 and 107 move downward relative to the game board 1 in one direction.

  When the movable body 107 moves downward, the pressing portion 107C pushes the arm member 112 downward, so that the arm member 112 swings downward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum. At this time, the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotary body 114 fitted in the guide hole 112A of the arm member 112 and the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108 moves downward along the curved hole 108D.

  Thus, the rotating body 114 rotates in the counterclockwise direction (clockwise direction as viewed from the game board 1) in FIG.

  When the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position, the rotary body 114 is biased by the torsion spring 118 and biased to the standby position. In the state where the rotary body 114 is biased to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 15, the fitting protrusion 115A of the slider member 115 is the radially inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 114n of the slit 114B of the rotary body 114. Of the two fitting projections 115B, which are positioned radially inward, are engaged with the radially inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 116n of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. It is correct.

  When the rotating body 114 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 15, as shown in FIG. 16, the fitting protrusion 115A moves radially outward from the radially inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 114n and is fitted. The joint protrusion 115B moves radially outward from the radially inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 116n.

  Thereby, the slider member 115 moves radially inward from the radial direction of the circular member 116 to the radial direction outward, and the outer ring member 117 moves radially outward from the radial direction of the circular member 116 at the standby position. Expand in the radial direction (see FIG. 18).

  When the motor 110A is reversely driven to the initial position from this state, the rotation of the gear 113A is transmitted to the gear 113D through the gears 113B and 113C, and the movable body 106 moves upward along the rack teeth 106A (see FIG. 12) .

  When the movable body 106 moves upward, the gear 111 integrally provided on the movable body 106 moves upward while rotating. Along with this, the gear 111 moves upward while rotating along the rack teeth 105A of the fixed body 105, so the movable body 107 in which the rack teeth 107B mesh with the gear 111 moves upward as the gear 111 rotates. (See Figure 14).

  When the movable body 107 moves upward, the pressing portion 107C does not press the arm member 112 downward. At this time, the urging force of the torsion spring 118 causes the rotary member 114 to rotate clockwise relative to the movable member 108 in FIG. 16 (counterclockwise as viewed from the game board 1 side), and the arm member 112 is rotated. It pivots upward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum.

  At this time, the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotary body 114 fitted in the guide hole 112A of the arm member 112 and the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108 moves upward along the curved hole 108D. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 16 to 15, the fitting protrusion 115A moves from the radially outward side of the first straight portion 114n to the radially inner peripheral end, and the fitting protrusion 115B becomes the first straight portion It moves from the radially outward side of 116 n to the radially inner circumferential end. Therefore, the slider member 115 moves inward in the radial direction of the circular member 116, and the outer ring member 117 moves so as to contract inward in the radial direction of the circular member 116.

  Thus, the lower movable effect member is driven by driving the motor 110A forward from the initial position to move the movable body 107 downward, and then reversely driving the movable body 107 from the driven position so as to return the movable body 107 to the initial position. An effect in which the outer ring member 117 is movable in the radially inward direction of the rotating body 114 (see FIG. 3) and in the radially outward direction (see FIG. 18) with the 101B in the standby position. I do. Thereby, the lower movable effect member 101B can be enlarged and reduced at the standby position.

  On the other hand, when performing effects such that the lower movable effect member 101B moves upward from the standby position, as shown in FIG. 12, the motor 110A is reversed from the initial position with the movable bodies 106 to 108 relatively contracted. Drive to rotation.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 14, the rotation of the gear 113A is transmitted to the gear 113D through the gears 113B and 113C, and the movable body 106 in which the rack teeth 106A mesh with the gear 113D moves upward.

  When the movable body 106 moves upward, the gear 111 integrally provided on the movable body 106 moves upward along the rack teeth 105A of the fixed body 105 while rotating. Along with this, the movable body 107 having the rack teeth 107 B meshing with the gear 111 moves upward by a movement amount larger than the movement amount of the movable body 106. That is, the movable bodies 106 and 107 move upward with respect to the game board 1.

  The motor 110A drives forward rotation (one direction) and reverse rotation (other direction), and the lower movable effect member 101B and the movable bodies 106 and 107 move downward (one direction) and upward (the other direction). It can be expressed as moving, and such expression can be expressed in one of the directions of rotation such as forward rotation or reverse rotation, or in the direction of movement such as downward, upward, leftward or rightward. It is possible to use an expression with the other direction.

  When the movable body 107 moves upward, the guide projection 107D of the movable body 107 moves upward along the guide groove 108C of the movable body 108, and abuts on the inner peripheral upper end of the guide groove 108C. Thereby, the movable body 108 is pressed by the movable body 107 and moves upward. .

  When the movable body 108 moves upward, the fitting projection 114A of the rotary body 114 moves downward along the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108, and the arm member 112 pivots upward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum. Thus, the rotating body 114 rotates in the counterclockwise direction (clockwise direction as viewed from the game board 1) in FIG.

  When the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position, the rotor 114 is biased by the torsion spring 118 and biased to the standby position. In the state where the rotary body 114 is biased to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 15, the fitting protrusion 115A of the slider member 115 is the radially inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 114n of the slit 114B of the rotary body 114. Of the plurality of fitting projections 115B are engaged with the radially inner peripheral end of the first linear portion 116n of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. It is correct.

  When the rotary member 114 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 15 by the arm member 112, the fitting protrusion 115A moves radially outward from the radially inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 114n and is engaged. The protrusion 115B moves radially outward from the radially inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 116n.

  As a result, the slider member 115 moves radially inward from the radially inward direction of the rotary body 114, and the outer ring member 117 moves radially outward from the radially inward direction of the rotary body 114.

  When the rotating body 114 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 16 as the movable body 107 further rises, as shown in FIGS. 16 to 17, the fitting protrusion 115A is moved from the first straight portion 114n to After moving to the second straight portion 114 w, the second straight portion 114 w moves radially outward. At the same time, the fitting protrusion 115B moves from the first straight portion 116n to the second straight portion 116w, and then moves outward in the radial direction of the second straight portion 116w.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 17, the slider member 115 swings in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116 in a state where the slider member 115 is movable outward in the radial direction of the circular member 116, and the outer ring member 117 radiates the radiation of the rotating body 114. It moves in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 114 from the state of moving outward in the direction. That is, after moving the outer ring member 117 outward in the radial direction of the rotary body 114 before the movable bodies 106 to 108 move to the state of relatively extending from the standby position, the circumferential direction of the rotary body 114 Make a moving effect. In addition, the state (state shown in FIG. 14) which the movable bodies 106-108 relatively extended most is equivalent to the movable position of this invention.

  When the motor 110A is reversely driven to return to the initial position from this state, the rotation of the gear 113A is transmitted to the gear 113D via the gears 113B and 113C, and the movable body 106 in which the rack teeth 106A mesh with the gear 113D moves downward. Do.

  When the movable body 106 moves downward, the gear 111 integrally provided on the movable body 106 rotates downward while the gear 111 rotates downward along the rack teeth 105A of the fixed body 105. Move to Along with this, as shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 12, the movable body 107 having the rack teeth 107B meshing with the gear 111 is moved downward.

  The fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 of the present embodiment are connected by a coil spring 119, and the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are biased in a relatively shrinking direction by the coil spring 119. Further, the movable body 106 and the fixed body 104 are connected by a coil spring 120, and the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are biased in the direction of relative compression by the coil spring 120.

  Therefore, in addition to the rotation of the motor 110A, the biasing force of the coil springs 119 and 120 moves the movable body 106 downward at a higher speed than when moving upward from the standby position.

  When the movable body 106 moves downward, the movable body 107 moves downward with the movable body 106 by a movement amount larger than the movement amount of the movable body 106. When the movable body 107 moves downward, the guide projection 107D of the movable body 107 moves downward along the guide groove 108C of the movable body 108, and abuts on the radially inner lower end of the guide groove 108C. Thereby, the movable body 108 is pressed by the movable body 107 and moves downward.

  When the movable body 108 moves downward, the curved hole 108D moves downward along the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotating body 114, and the fitting protrusion 114A abuts on the radial inner upper end of the curved hole 108D, The arm member 112 swings downward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 17 to 16, the rotating body 114 rotates in the clockwise direction (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the game board 1 side).

  When the rotary body 114 rotates clockwise as shown in FIGS. 17 to 16, the rotary body 114 is urged by the torsion spring 118, and the fitting projection 115A of the slider member 115 is the slit 114B of the rotary body 114. The fitting protrusion 115B moves from the second straight part 114w to the first straight part 114n, and the fitting protrusion 115B moves from the second straight part 116w to the first straight part 116n of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. Thereby, the slider member 115 moves in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116.

  When the rotating body 114 further rotates in the clockwise direction in FIG. 16 from this state, the fitting projection 115A of the slider member 115 moves to the radially inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 114n of the slit 114B of the rotating body 114. The fitting protrusion 115 B moves to the lower end of the radially inner periphery of the first straight portion 116 n of the fitting groove 116 B of the circular member 116. As a result, the outer ring member 117 moves radially outward from radially outward of the circular member 116.

  By driving the motor 110A in the other direction (reverse rotation) from the initial position in this manner, the lower movable effect member 101B is moved upward, and the outer ring member 117 is movable radially outward and circumferentially of the rotating body 114 It is possible to perform an effect such that the lower movable effect member 101B is expanded when the lower movable effect member 101B moves to the movable position (see FIG. 19).

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lower movable effect member 101B can move the movable body 106 which can move upward and downward with respect to the game board 1 by the rotation of the motor 110A, and the pressing portion 107C. The movable body 107 is provided movably on the movable body 106 and can move upward and downward with respect to the game board 1 with the movable body 106, and upward and downward with respect to the game board 1 with the movable body 107 A movable movable body 108 is provided.

  Furthermore, the lower movable effect member 101B has a guide hole 112A and is provided swingably in the movable body 106, and the arm member 112 which can be pressed by the pressing portion 107C, and the fitting protrusion 114A fitted to the arm member 112. And a plurality of slits 114B, and has a rotary body 114 rotatably provided on the movable body 108, and a fitting projection 115A fitted to the slit 114B, the rotation direction of the rotary body 114 by rotation of the rotary body 114 A movable member 109 having a slider member 115 and an outer ring member 117 movable in the circumferential direction is provided.

  Furthermore, in the state where the lower movable effect member 101B is positioned at the standby position, the movable member 106, 107 is moved downward by rotating the motor 110A forward from the initial position to rotate the arm member 112 as a rotating member. By converting it into rotation in one direction of 114, the outer ring member 117 is moved in the radial direction while permitting only rotation of the rotary body 114, and the movable body 106 is moved upward by reversely rotating the motor 110A from the initial position. The movable member 108 is moved upward to move the lower movable effect member 101B to the movable position while rotating the outer ring member 117 while moving the movable member 108 upward to convert the swing of the arm member 112 into rotation in one direction of the rotary member 114. It moves in the radial and circumferential directions of the body 114.

  Thereby, two different effects such as an effect of moving the lower movable effect member 101B at the standby position and an effect of moving the lower movable effect member 101B from the standby position to the movable position are easy by switching the rotation direction of the single motor 110A. It is possible to further enhance the effect of the lower movable effect member 101B.

<Configuration of winning opening>
The configuration of the winning opening will be described based on FIGS. The game board 1 includes a winning opening unit 201 shown in FIGS. 20 to 22. The winning opening unit 201 has a first starting opening member 202. The first starting opening member 202 is attached to the game board 1 (see FIG. 3), and an opening constituting the first starting opening 32 is formed at the upper end of the first starting opening member 202.

  Inside the first starting opening member 202 is formed a ball passage 203 for discharging the gaming ball that has won the first starting opening 32 downstream. A cylindrical portion 202A (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is formed at a lower portion of the first starting opening member 202, and the cylindrical portion 202A extends rearward from the first starting opening member 202.

  In FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, a ball passage 204 is formed inside the cylindrical portion 202A, and the ball passage 204 is in communication with the ball passage 203.

  In FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, a ball passage unit 205 is provided at the rear of the first starting opening member 202. In FIG. 21, the ball passage unit 205 is formed with a ball passage 206 communicating with the ball passage 204, and the ball passage 206 is opposed to the ball passage 204 in the front-rear direction.

  A discharge port 206A opening downward is formed on the bottom of the ball passage 206, and the discharge port 206A communicates with the ball passage 206. As a result, the gaming ball that has won the first starting opening 32 passes the ball passage 204 from the ball passage 203, is discharged to the ball passage 206, and falls downward through the discharge opening 206A.

  As shown in FIG. 24, when the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position, a state in which the outer ring member 117 abuts on the outer peripheral portion of the circular member 116 is expanded in the radial direction (lower movable effect member In a state in which 101B is movable), ball passages 203, 204, 206 (ball passage 206 is not shown) are passed from the front of lower movable effect member 101B to the lower portion of lower movable effect member 101B. It is provided.

  Thereby, the ball passages 203, 204, and 206 of the present embodiment are the outer rings installed on the lower movable effect member 101B from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B from the game ball that has won the first starting opening 32 It is discharged to the back side (or the back side, the lower side, etc.) of the game board 1 through the lower side of the member 117.

  In FIGS. 20 to 22, the winning opening unit 201 includes a general winning opening member 207. The general winning opening member 207 is attached to the game board 1, and an opening constituting the general winning openings 40A to 40C is formed at the upper end of the general winning opening member 207.

  Inside the general winning opening member 207, ball passages 208 to 210 are provided. The ball passage 208 is in communication with the general winning opening 40A, extends from the lower side (downstream) of the general winning opening 40A to the right, and discharges the gaming ball won in the general winning opening 40A downstream.

  The ball passage 209 communicates with the general winning hole 40B and the ball passage 208 at the downstream of the general winning hole 40B and the ball passage 208. The ball passage 209 extends from the lower side (downstream) of the general winning opening 40B to the right, and discharges the gaming ball that has won the general winning opening 40B and the gaming ball passing through the ball passage 208 downstream.

  The ball passage 210 communicates with the general winning hole 40C and the ball passage 209 downstream of the general winning hole 40C and the ball passage 209. The ball passage 210 extends downward from the general winning opening 40C, and discharges downstream the gaming ball that has won the general winning opening 40C and the gaming ball passing through the ball passage 209.

  The ball passage 209 joins the ball passage 208 at the general winning opening 40B, and the passage area, which is the area of the cross section in the vertical direction orthogonal to the passing direction (horizontal direction) of the game ball, is the passage area of the ball passage 208 It is formed larger than. That is, the width of the ball passage 209 in the vertical direction is larger than the width of the ball passage 208 in the vertical direction. For example, when the width of the ball passage 208 in the vertical direction is such a size that a game ball passes one ball, the width in the vertical direction of the ball passage 209 is a size such that at least two game balls pass It is desirable to have.

  In the present embodiment, the passage area in the vertical direction of the ball passage 209 is described as being formed larger than the passage area of the ball passage 208. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be formed. Furthermore, even in the case where the passage area is formed large in both the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, the effect of facilitating the discharge is desired.

  In FIGS. 20 and 21, a discharge port 211 is formed below the ball passage 210. As a result, the gaming balls having won the general winning opening 40A are discharged to the discharge opening 211 through the ball passages 208 to 210. The gaming balls having won the general winning opening 40B are discharged to the discharge opening 211 through the ball passages 209 and 210, and the gaming balls having won the general winning opening 40C are discharged to the discharge opening 211 through the ball passage 210.

  A ball passage 212 communicating with the discharge port 211 is formed in the ball passage unit 205, and the ball passage 212 extends rearward from the discharge port 211 and then extends to the right. A discharge port 212A is formed at the downstream end of the ball passage 212, and the gaming balls introduced into the ball passage 212 from the discharge port 211 are discharged downward from the discharge port 212A. The ball passages 208 to 210 and 212 of the present embodiment discharge the gaming balls having won the general winning openings 40A to 40C to the back surface of the gaming board 1 through the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B.

  In FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 communicate with the merging portion 213 through the discharge port 206A and the discharge port 212A, and the gaming ball and the general winning hole 40A ~ winning the first start hole 32. The game balls that have won a prize of 40 C merge at the merging section 213 (the combined basin) and are discharged to the back of the game board 1.

  In FIGS. 20 and 21, the ball passage 212 is provided with a general winning opening left switch 400A, and the general winning opening left switch 400A has a detection surface 400a in the vertical direction. Thus, the general winning opening left switch 400A detects a game ball flowing in the right direction (first direction) in the horizontal direction in the ball passage 212.

  The ball passage 206 is provided with a first starting opening switch 320, and the first starting opening switch 320 has a detection surface 320a in the left-right direction different from the detection surface 400a of the general winning opening left switch 400A. Thereby, the first starting opening switch 320 detects the gaming ball flowing in the vertical direction (the second direction different from the first direction) in the ball passage 206.

  In FIG. 21, the first starting opening switch 320 is disposed in front of the general winning opening left switch 400A. In FIGS. 20 and 21, below the lower movable effect member 101B, the ball passage unit 205 is provided with the magnetic sensor 214, and the magnetic sensor 214 is provided between the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212, and , Located below the first start port 32.

  The magnetic sensor 214 is connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6), detects that the magnet intentionally comes close to the first start opening 32 by the player, and transmits a magnetic signal to the main control circuit 60. Output. The main control circuit 60 transmits an abnormality signal to the hall computer 100 when a magnetic signal is input. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an illegal act such as illegally acquiring a game ball on the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment.

  Here, the first starting opening switch 320 constitutes a first sensor and a game medium detection member of the present invention. The general winning opening left switch 400A constitutes a second sensor of the present invention, and the magnetic sensor 214 constitutes a magnetic detection sensor of the present invention.

  In FIG. 20, the electric decoration board 215 is provided on the first starting opening member 202, and the electric decoration board 215 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 215a. The light emission of the LED 215 a is controlled by the electric decoration substrate 215. Here, the first starting opening 32 of the present embodiment constitutes the winning opening of the present invention, and the ball passages 203 and 204 constitute the upstream game medium passage of the present invention. Moreover, the electric decoration board | substrate 215 comprises the electric decoration board | substrate of this invention.

  In addition, the first starting opening member 202 of the present embodiment includes the first starting opening 32 where the game ball can win, ball passages 203 and 204 for discharging the gaming ball that has won the first starting opening 32 downstream, and the light emitting The winning opening unit of the present invention having the electric decoration substrate 215 is configured.

  Further, the ball passage 206 of the present embodiment constitutes the downstream side game medium passage of the present invention, and the ball passage unit 205 is a lower portion of the game ball discharged to the ball passage 203 and 204 of the first starting opening member 202. A game medium passage portion of the present invention is formed in which a ball passage 206 is formed to discharge on the back surface of the game board 1 through the lower side of the side movable effect member 101B.

  In FIG. 22, one end portion of a cable 216 is connected to the electric decoration substrate 215. The other end of the cable 216 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78 (see FIG. 6). The electric decoration board 215 controls lighting of the LED 215 a based on the control signal transmitted from the lamp control circuit 78. The cable 216 of the present embodiment constitutes the wiring of the present invention. Here, the LED 215a is included in the LED group 28 (see FIG. 6) controlled by the lamp control circuit 78.

  The LED 215a may be capable of emitting light when, for example, the passage of the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 320, or emitting light in response to an effect. At this time, as a light emission mode of the LED 215a, after the one LED 215a is made to emit light, the other LED 215a may be made to emit light, or any of the LEDs 215a may be made to emit light.

  In the present embodiment, the other end of the cable 216 is described as being connected to the lamp control circuit 78. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a relay board relaying the lamp control circuit 78 and the electric decoration board 215 It may be connected to The relay board in this case may be provided with an LED driver for controlling the LED 215a. In this case, it is also possible to recognize the relay substrate as an LED drive circuit.

  In FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, a U-shaped protrusion 217 is provided on the upper surface of the ball passage unit 205, and the protrusion 217 is located above the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 21). It projects upward from the upper surface of the unit 205.

  In FIG. 22, the cable 216 extends downward from the illumination substrate 215 and extends along the ball passage unit 205 to the rear of the ball passage unit 205. A cable 216 extending to the rear of the ball passage unit 205 is fastened to the projection 217 by a binding member such as a band (not shown), and is wired below the gaming board 1 from the projection 217 through a slit 218 of the back cover 1A.

  A cable (not shown) is connected to the first start opening switch 320, the general winning opening left switch 400A, and the magnetic sensor 214, and these cables are also bundled and fastened to the protrusion 217 by a band or the like.

In FIGS. 22 and 23, a semi-cylindrical member 219 is provided in the upper portion of the ball passage unit 205, and the semi-cylindrical member 219 is provided with the lower movable effect member 101B and the ball passage so as to cover the upper part of the protrusion 217. It is provided between the unit 205 (see FIG. 23). The protrusion 217 of the present embodiment constitutes a support for supporting the wiring of the present invention, and the semi-cylindrical member 219 constitutes a covering member of the present invention.
Here, supporting (guiding or guiding) the wire includes the case where the wire is fixed to the protrusion 217 with a band or the like, and may include insertion of the wire into the opening formed by the protrusion 217.

  Further, the first starting opening 32 of the present embodiment constitutes a first winning opening of the present invention, and the general winning openings 40A to 40C constitute a second winning opening of the present invention. The ball passages 204, 206 constitute the first passage of the present invention, and the ball passage 212 constitutes the second passage of the present invention.

  The ball passages 203, 204, 206 constitute the game medium passage of the present invention. The ball passage 208 constitutes a first game medium passage of the present invention, and the ball passages 209 and 210 constitute a second game medium passage of the present invention. The general winning opening 40A constitutes a first gaming medium winning opening of the present invention, and the general winning openings 40B and 40C constitute a second gaming medium winning opening of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game board 1 having the game area 1 p where the game balls roll and the game board 1 provided on the game board 1 are movable downward so as to execute a predetermined movable effect. It is provided in game board 1 so that it may be located ahead of side movable effect member 101B and lower side movable effect member 101B, and the game ball which passed the 1st starting opening 32 which can win a game ball, and the 1st starting opening 32 And ball passages 203, 204, and 206 for discharging the lower movable effect member 101B from the front to the back of the game board 1 through the lower part of the lower movable effect member 101B, and the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position It is possible to execute movable effects movable in the direction of the ball passages 203, 204 and 206 below the lower movable effect member 101B, and in the state where the lower movable effect member 101B is moved at the standby position, 03,204,206 is provided from the front of the lower movable directing member 101B so as to pass below the lower movable directing member 101B.

  Thus, it is possible to secure a space in which the lower movable effect member 101B is movable at the standby position. As a result, it is possible to enhance the rendering performance of the lower movable effect member 101B while sufficiently securing the installation space of the lower movable effect member 101B.

  Further, since a large installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B can be secured, enlargement of the lower movable effect member 101B and expansion of the movable range of the outer ring member 117 of the lower movable effect member 101B at the standby position can be achieved. The effect by the lower movable effect member 101B can be more effectively enhanced.

Furthermore, by installing the first start opening 32 in front of the lower movable effect member 101B, the lower side existing behind the first start opening 32 with respect to the player who has visually recognized the first start opening 32 during the game. It becomes possible to visually recognize the movable effect member 101B. For this reason, it is possible to more effectively improve the effect of the lower movable effect member 101B on the player.
In particular, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the lower movable effect member 101B performs movable effect that moves in the radial direction at the standby position, the movable range of the lower movable effect member 101B is expanded. It is possible to improve the effect of the lower movable effect member 101B more effectively.
Further, in a state where the lower movable effect member 101B is movable at the standby position, the ball passages 203, 204, and 206 are provided to pass from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to below the lower movable effect member 101B. Thus, since a wide space in which the movable part can move can be secured at the standby position, the lower movable effect member 101B can be moved so as to expand in a wider range in the radial direction. As a result, the lower movable effect member 101B can be dynamically moved, and the effect of the lower movable effect member 101B can be more effectively enhanced.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game board 1 passes the bottom of the lower movable effect member 101B through the game balls passing through the general winning openings 40A to 40C where the game ball can win and the first start port 32. The ball passages 204 and 206 discharged to the back of the ball, the ball passages 212 discharged to the back of the game board 1 through the lower part of the lower movable effect member 101B, and the ball passage 206 Provided with a detection surface 320a for detecting gaming balls discharged to the ball passage 206, and provided with a first starting opening switch 320 for detecting gaming balls rolling in a first direction, and the ball passage 212 , And a general winning opening left switch 400A having a detection surface 400a in a direction different from the detection surface 320a and detecting a game ball rolling in a second direction different from the first direction; There has been installed in front of the general prize hole left switch 400A.

  Further, a magnetic sensor 214 is provided below the lower movable effect member 101B so as to be located between the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212. Further, in the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212, the downstream of the game ball in the discharge direction is merged by the merging portion 213 (merged basin).

  Thereby, the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 can be installed in different directions in the horizontal direction and in the vertical direction, and the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 can be joined by the merging portion 213.

  In addition to this, the first starting opening switch 320 is disposed forward of the general winning opening left switch 400A, and the magnetic sensor 214 is provided between the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 below the lower movable effect member 101B. Therefore, three sensors consisting of the first starting opening switch 320, the general winning opening left switch 400A and the magnetic sensor 214 can be installed in a small space below the lower movable effect member 101B.

  For this reason, it is possible to enhance the rendering performance of the lower movable effect member 101B while sufficiently securing the installation space of the lower movable effect member 101B.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a general winning opening 40A provided on the gaming board 1 and capable of winning game balls, and a general winning opening 40B provided on the gaming board 1 and capable of winning game balls, A ball passage 208 provided on the game board 1 for discharging the gaming balls obtained in the general winning opening 40A downstream and provided on the game board 1 in the downstream for the game balls provided for the general winning openings 40B and 40C. The ball passage 209 is provided with the ball passages 209 and 210 to be discharged, and the ball passage 209 joins the ball passage 208 at the downstream of the general winning opening 40B, and is a passage having an area in the vertical direction orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball. The area is larger than the passage area of the ball passage 208.

  As a result, even when the number of game media passing through ball passages 208 to 210 per unit time increases in order to shorten the game speed, the game balls that are paid from general winning openings 40A and 40B are ball passages. It is possible to prevent clogging downstream of 209. As a result, the gaming balls can be smoothly discharged to the outlet 211 downstream, and the game characteristics can be improved.

  In particular, since the width in the vertical direction of the ball passage 209 is formed larger than the width in the vertical direction of the ball passage 208, an increase in the area occupied by the ball passage 209 in the back and forth direction of the game board 1 is prevented. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the game balls that are paid from the general winning openings 40A and 40B from being clogged downstream of the ball passage 209.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the width in the vertical direction of the ball passage 209 is formed larger than the width in the vertical direction of the ball passage 208, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The width may be formed larger than the width of the ball passage 208 in the front-rear direction. In this way, the game ball won from the general winning openings 40A and 40B is clogged downstream of the ball passage 209 while preventing the area occupied by the ball passage 209 from increasing in the vertical direction of the game board 1 It can prevent.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32 where the game ball can win, ball passages 203 and 204 for discharging the gaming ball that has won the first starting opening 32 downstream, and the lightable electric decoration board A ball passage for discharging the game ball discharged to the ball passages 203 and 204 of the first start hole member 202 having the first start hole member 202 and the first start hole member 202 through the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B to the back of the game board 1 A ball passage unit 205 in which 206 is formed, a first starting opening switch 320 provided in the ball passage 206 for detecting gaming balls passing through the ball passage 206, and a cable 216 connected to the electric decoration board 215 ing.

  In addition to this, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided on the upper surface of the ball passage unit 205 so as to be positioned above the ball passage unit 205, and a protrusion 217 for supporting the cable 216 extending from the electric decoration substrate 215 And a semi-cylindrical member 219 provided between the lower movable effect member 101 B and the ball passage unit 205 so as to cover the upper side of the protrusion 217.

  Thus, the ball passages 203, 204, and 206 can be passed from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to the lower portion of the lower movable effect member 101B to secure a space in which the lower movable effect member 101B is movable. Can. As a result, it is possible to enhance the rendering performance of the lower movable effect member 101B while sufficiently securing the installation space of the lower movable effect member 101B.

  Further, since a large installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B can be secured, enlargement of the lower movable effect member 101B can be achieved, and the effect by the lower movable effect member 101B can be more effectively enhanced. .

  Further, the cable 216 extending from the electric decoration substrate 215 can be supported by the protrusions 217, and the cable 216 extending from the electric decoration substrate 215 can be prevented from fluttering below the lower movable effect member 101B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the cable 216 from interfering with the outer ring member 117 when the outer ring member 117 of the lower side movable effect member 101B is moved, and the outer ring member 117 can be smoothly moved. Can be protected from

  In addition, the cable 216 extending from the electric decoration substrate 215 is inserted into a protrusion 217A (see FIG. 22) provided in the vicinity of the electric decoration substrate 215 before the protrusion 217 and is bent downward with respect to the protrusion 217A. . As a result, the cable 216 is guided by the protrusion 217A, so that no load is imposed on the connection portion between the electric decoration substrate 215 and the cable 216. Thus, the cable 216 is supported by the protrusion 217A.

  Note that supporting (guiding or guiding) the wire (cable 216) by the protrusion 217A includes the case where the wire is fixed to the protrusion 217A with a band or the like, and the wire is inserted through the opening formed by the protrusion 217A. May include.

  Furthermore, by providing a semi-cylindrical member 219 between the lower movable effect member 101B and the ball passage unit 205 so as to cover the upper side of the protrusion 217, the cable 216 and the lower movable effect member 101B are semi-cylindrical members It can be shielded by 219, and it can prevent more effectively that cable 216 interferes with outer ring member 117 at the time of movement of outer ring member 117. In addition, when the game ball flows down from the lower movable effect member 101B side, the game ball can be prevented from colliding with the cable 216 by causing the game ball to collide with the semi-cylindrical member 219, and the cable 216 can be removed from the game ball It can protect.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the protrusion 217 is formed in a U shape projecting from the upper portion of the ball passage unit 205, and the cable 216 is supported by the protrusion 217. Thus, the protrusion 217 can be firmly fastened to the protrusion 217, and the cable 216 can be more effectively prevented from flapping below the lower movable effect member 101B.

  Further, the protrusion 217 may be formed in a substantially U-shape, and the cable 216 may be configured to be accommodated in a space in the U-shape of the protrusion 217. In this case, the protrusion 217 may be made of a rigid or flexible body, and one end of the U-shaped side (the U-shaped left portion or the right portion) is a ball for inserting the cable 216 from the side. It may be configured to provide a space with the passage unit 205. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to more effectively prevent the cable 216 from fluttering.

  In the lower movable effect member 101B of the present embodiment, the outer ring member 117 is disposed without gaps in the circumferential direction at the standby position, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. The outer ring member 117 is configured to be positioned at a first position spaced apart in the circumferential direction via the gap 121 in a state of being in contact with the outer peripheral portion of the ring-shaped member 116 (see FIG. 15). The outer ring member 117 may be movable to the first position (the position shown in FIG. 25) and the second position (the position shown in FIG. 26) radially outward of the rotating body 114.

  In this case, the ball passages 204 and 206 may be provided to pass any one of the four gaps 121, for example, the lower gap 121. That is, the ball passages 204 and 206 may be provided to pass through the gap 121 in the state where the outer ring member 117 is positioned at the first position and the second position. The outer ring member 117 constitutes the movable portion of the present invention, and the gap 121 constitutes the gap of the present invention.

  In this way, in addition to securing the installation space and the like of the lower movable effect member 101B as described above, the ball passage 204 can be installed in front of the lower movable effect member 101B, avoiding the outer ring member 117. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball passages 204 and 206 from being formed to be separated downward from the lower movable effect member 101B, and the installation space of the game board 1 can be made smaller.

<Configuration and operation of upper movable effect member 101A>
FIGS. 27 to 48 are diagrams showing the game board 1 in a state in which the upper movable effect member 101A and the upper movable effect member 101A are movable, and in FIGS. 27 to 48, the upper, lower, left, and right directions are the upper side viewed from the player. It is the up, down, left, and right directions of the movable effect member 101A. The upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment constitutes a movable part of the present invention.

  In FIG. 27, the upper movable effect member 101A has a front decoration 160 provided at the foremost part, a case 161 provided at the rearmost part, a fixed base 162, a rear movable base 163, and a front movable base 164. It is equipped with a blade movable rack 165 (see FIGS. 28 and 29), and the case 161 is installed at the rear of the game board 1.

  In FIG. 28, the case 161 includes a motor 166, a plurality of gear wheels 167A, 167B, and an arm member 168.

  The motor 166 is fixed to the case 161 and rotatably supports the motor gear 166A. The gear 167A meshes with the motor gear 166A and the gear 167B, and the rotation of the motor gear 166A is transmitted to the gear 167B via the gear 167A.

  In FIGS. 34 and 35, the gear 167B includes a protrusion 167b that rotates integrally with the gear 167B, and the protrusion 167b moves in the rotational direction of the gear 167B as the gear 167B rotates.

  In FIGS. 28 and 30, the arm member 168 is attached to a swing shaft 168A provided in the case 161. 34 and 35, a slit 168B is formed in the arm member 168, and a projection 167b is slidably fitted in the slit 168B.

  The arm member 168 swings up and down with the swing shaft 168A as a fulcrum by the protrusion 167b sliding along the slit 168B as the gear 167B rotates. In FIGS. 28 and 30, the case 161 is provided with a torsion spring 196, and the torsion spring 196 biases the arm member 168 to swing upward.

  A slit 168C is formed in the arm member 168, and the fitting protrusion 163A of the rear movable base 163 is fitted in the slit 168C. The case 161 is provided with a curved guide rail 161A, and a fitting protrusion 163A is slidably fitted on the guide rail 161A.

  As a result, the arm member 168 is biased by the torsion spring 196 at the standby position, and is stopped in a state of being swung upward along the guide rail 161A.

  The fixed base 162 is attached to the case 161, and is fixed to the rear of the game board 1 integrally with the case 161. A rack 162A is provided at a substantially central portion in the width direction of the fixed base 162 (central portion in the left-right direction of the game board 1). The rack 162A extends in the extending direction (vertical direction) of the fixed base 162, and the rack 162A is formed with rack teeth 162a in which concavo-convex portions are continuous in the vertical direction.

  The fixed base 162 is formed with a slit 162B located on the right side of the rack 162A and extending in the vertical direction, and the fitting projection 163A of the rear movable base 163 passes through the slit 162B to the slit 168C of the arm member 168. It is fitting.

  The rear movable base 163 is provided movably with respect to the fixed base 162 so as to be located in front of the fixed base 162. Thus, the rear movable base 163 can move relative to the game board 1.

  In FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, on the back surface of the rear movable base 163, a guide rail 163B is provided at the center in the width direction of the rear movable base 163, and the upper end of the guide rail 163B is open.

  In FIG. 30, a slit 163C is formed on the front surface of the rear movable base 163, and the slit 163C communicates with the guide rail 163B. An engagement protrusion 163D is formed on the lower portion of the rear movable base 163, and the engagement protrusion 163D protrudes forward from the rear movable base 163.

  The guide rails 163B slidably hold the racks 162A so as to sandwich the racks 162A from both sides, and the rack teeth 162a project forward of the rear movable base 163 through the slits 163C. A plurality of gears 169A to 169E are rotatably provided on the front surface of the rear movable base 163 along the vertical direction.

  The uppermost gear 169A is in mesh with the rack teeth 162a of the rack 162A. When the arm member 168 swings in the vertical direction, the arm member 168 presses the fitting protrusion 163A in the vertical direction.

  As a result, the rear movable base 163 moves in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed base 162, and the gear 169A rotates along the rack teeth 162a. When the gear 169A rotates, the rotation of the gear 169A is transmitted to the gear 169E via the gears 169B to 169D.

  29 and 33, a protrusion 164A is provided at the right end of the front movable base 164 on the back surface of the front movable base 164, and the projection 164A extends in the vertical direction, and the back surface of the front movable base 164 Projected backward from the

  The protruding portion 164A is formed with rack teeth 164a in which concavo-convex portions are continuous in the vertical direction, and a gear 169E is engaged with the rack teeth 164a. A central blade member 170 is integrally provided on the front movable base 164, and the central blade member 170 protrudes laterally outward from the front movable base 164.

  In FIG. 32, a guide member 164B is provided on the front surface of the front movable base 164 so as to face in the left-right direction, and a blade movable rack 165 is supported by the guide member 164B. Racks 165A and 165B are provided in the upper left-right direction of the blade movable rack 165, and the racks 165A and 165B are formed of concavo-convex portions continuous in the vertical direction, and rack teeth 165a and 165b facing each other are formed.

  In FIG. 33, a rack 165C is provided at the lower part of the widthwise central portion of the blade movable rack 165, and the rack 165C is composed of concavo-convex portions continuous in the vertical direction, and rack teeth 165c and 165d facing in opposite directions to each other. Is formed.

  In FIG. 32, a pair of slits 165D is formed in the blade movable rack 165, and a fitting protrusion 164C formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164 is slidably fitted in the slit 165D.

  Thus, the blade movable rack 165 can move up and down along the fitting protrusion 164C with respect to the front movable base 164.

  The front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 are connected by a coil spring 171. An engaging portion 165F is provided on the upper portion of the blade movable rack 165, and one end of a coil spring 171 is attached to the engaging portion 165F. An engaging portion 164E is provided at a lower portion of the front movable base 164, and the other end of the coil spring 171 is attached to the engaging portion 164E. In FIG. 32, the coil spring 171 is shown in a fully contracted state.

  The coil spring 171 urges the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 such that the engaging portion 165F and the engaging portion 164E approach each other.

  On the front surface of the front movable base 164, a longitudinally long upper left blade member 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174 and a lower right blade member 175 are attached. The upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are positioned behind the decorative member 99 at the standby position and extend in the left-right direction whose longitudinal direction is the first direction. (See, for example, FIG. 36 and FIG. 38)).

  Here, a state in which the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 face in the first direction corresponds to the first position. Moreover, the longitudinal direction and the extending direction refer to the same direction, and the direction in which each member extends long is the longitudinal direction and the extending direction.

  As shown in FIG. 32, a tooth portion 172A is formed at the right end portion of the upper left blade member 172, and the tooth portion 172A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164G formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164. And mesh with the rack teeth 165 b of the blade movable rack 165.

  A tooth portion 173A is formed at the left end of the right upper blade member 173, and the tooth portion 173A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164H formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164, and the blade movable rack It meshes with 165 rack teeth 165a.

  A tooth portion 174A is formed at the right end of the lower left blade member 174, and the tooth portion 174A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164I formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164, and the blade movable rack It meshes with 165 rack teeth 165 d (see FIG. 33).

  A tooth portion 175A is formed at the left end of the right lower blade member 175, and the tooth portion 175A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164J formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164, and the blade movable rack It meshes with rack teeth 165c of 165 (see FIG. 33).

  In FIG. 33, an opening 164F is formed in the front movable base 164. An engagement protrusion 165 </ b> G is formed on the back surface of the blade movable rack 165. As shown in FIG. 40, the engagement protrusion 165G protrudes rearward through the opening 164F and overlaps the engagement protrusion 163D in the vertical direction.

  In the upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment, when the front movable base 164 moves downward relative to the rear movable base 163, the engagement protrusion 165G of the blade movable rack 165 is the one of the rear movable base 163. It engages with the engaging protrusion 163D (see FIG. 47 (b)).

  Thereby, the blade movable rack 165 is restricted from further downward movement, and the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the blade movable rack 165 against the biasing force of the coil spring 171 (FIG. c) see

  When the front side movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the blade movable rack 165, as shown in FIG. 37, the tooth portions 172A and 173A that respectively mesh with the rack teeth 165a and 165b rotate. As a result, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 are swung from the first direction in which they are horizontally directed to the vertical direction (the second direction) orthogonal to the horizontal direction to be united.

  At the same time, as shown in FIG. 37, the tooth portions 174A and 175A, which respectively mesh with the rack teeth 165c and 165d, rotate. Thereby, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are swung from the first direction in which the horizontal direction is directed to the vertical direction (the second direction) orthogonal to the first direction and united. .

  In FIG. 37, magnets 197A and 197B are provided on the mating surfaces of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175. Specifically, when the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 move vertically, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are provided to face each other in the left-right direction. The magnets 197A, 197B are attracted to one another. Thereby, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are brought close by the magnets 197A and 197B and united by being adsorbed. In addition, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 may be merely approached without being united.

In the upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 are united so as to face vertically, and the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are directed vertically. The position moved so as to be integrated with the position corresponds to the movable position of the present invention (see FIG. 48). In the movable position, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 relatively extend from the relatively contracted state (standby state).
Here, to be relatively shrunk is, in other words, that the overlapping of the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 is large, and the relatively extended state That is, the overlap between the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 is reduced.

  In FIG. 27, FIG. 28, and FIG. 32, the front decoration 160 is fixed to the front movable base 164. In FIGS. 38 and 39, an electric decoration substrate 160A having a plurality of LEDs 160a is built in the front face decoration 160, and the electric decoration substrate 160A controls the light emission of the LED 160a. Also, the front of the front decoration 160 is composed of a lens, and the LED 160a emits light through the lens.

  Electrically decorated boards 181 to 184 are incorporated in each of the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175. The electric decoration substrates 181 to 184 each include a plurality of LEDs 181 a to 184 a, and the electric decoration substrates 181 to 184 control light emission of the LEDs 181 a to 184 a.

  An electric decoration board 195 is built in the central blade member 170. The electric decoration board 195 is equipped with a plurality of LEDs 195a, and controls the light emission of these LEDs 195a.

  The LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a are configured of, for example, RGB full-color LEDs. In RGB full-color LEDs, LEDs of three primary colors of red, green and blue are accommodated in one package, and lighting of different colors is possible by combining these three primary colors as appropriate. Here, the LEDs 160 a, 181 a to 184 a, and 195 a are included in the LED group 28 (see FIG. 6) controlled by the lamp control circuit 78.

  In FIG. 31, the relay substrate 185 is attached to the back surface of the case 161, and the relay substrate 185 transmits control signals to the electric decoration substrates 160A, 181 to 184, and 195 via the flexible cable 186. The relay substrate 185 relays the control signal transmitted from the lamp control circuit 78 (see FIG. 6) and transmits it to the electric decoration substrates 160A, 181 to 184, and 195 to control the light emission of the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a.

  The front face of the front decoration 160, the central blade member 170, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 of this embodiment is made of lenses, and LEDs 160a and 181a are provided. When ~ 184a and 195a are emitted, the front is clearly illuminated through the lens.

  One end 186 a of the flexible cable 186 is connected to the relay substrate 185. The other end 186 b of the flexible cable 186 is attached to the front movable base 164 by being locked to a slit 164 K described later of the front movable base 164.

  In FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, slits 162C, 162D and 162E are formed in the fixed base 162 vertically aligned. The flexible cable 186 extending forward from the case 161 is routed to the front surface of the fixed base 162 through the slit 162C, and then routed to the back surface of the fixed base 162 through the slit 162D.

  The flexible cable 186 wired on the back surface of the fixed base 162 is wired in front of the front movable base 164 through the slit 162E.

  In FIG. 31, an opening 163a is formed in the upper part of the rear surface of the rear movable base 163, and in FIG. 30, an opening 163b is formed in the lower part of the surface of the rear movable base 163.

  In a state where the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted, the flexible cable 186 wired from the fixed base 162 to the front passes through the opening 163a of the rear movable base 163. It is accommodated in the movable base 163, extends from the rear movable base 163 to the front movable base 164 through the opening 163 b, and is bent between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164.

  In FIG. 45, the slit 164 K is formed in the front movable base 164, and the other end 186 b of the flexible cable 186 bent between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 is the rear movable base 163. It extends upward from below between the front movable bases 164 and is connected to the electric decoration substrate 195 through the slits 164K.

  In FIG. 33, FIG. 45, and FIG. 46, the clip 199 is attached to the back surface of the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186 is locked to the slit 164K by the clip 199. The clip 199 is fixed to the front movable base 164 by a screw 199A (see FIG. 33) so as to cover the slit 164K. The clip 199 has a rib 199a projecting forward, and the rib 199a presses the flexible cable 186 against the electric decoration substrate 195 to position the flexible cable 186 (see FIGS. 45 and 46).

  The flexible cable 186 is configured to be locked to the slit 164K by the clip 199. However, as a result of the locking, the portion of the flexible cable 186 in contact with the clip 199 does not move at all, and a certain degree of movement is possible. And may be included.

  Since it is sufficient if positioning can be performed as an effect, a fold or the like is formed on the flexible cable 186 to make contact with the clip 199, and even if the flexible cable 186 moves, the fold contacts the clip 199 and returns to the original position. A configuration is also envisaged that helps to return.

  In FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the slits 162D and 162E arranged vertically in the fixed base 162 are formed so that the distance between them is short, and the flexible cable 186 is locked to the slits 162D and 162E, whereby the fixed base is fixed. It is firmly locked at 162 and prevented from coming out of the fixed base 162. Here, the electric decoration substrate 195 is connected to the electric decoration substrates 160A and 181 to 184 via a cable not shown, and a control signal is transmitted to the electric decoration substrates 160A and 181 to 184 via the electric decoration substrate 195. Ru.

  In FIG. 30, FIG. 45, and FIG. 46, a protrusion 198 is provided on the front surface of the fixed base 162, and the protrusion 198 extends from the surface of the fixed base 162 toward the rear movable base 163. .

  As shown in FIG. 45, in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the standby position and the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted, the flexible cable 186 is fixed to the fixed base 162. And is accommodated between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, and is bent by being pressed against the projection 198.

  That is, the flexible cable 186 is further bent by the projecting portion 198 in a state of being bent and accommodated between the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164.

  As described above, the flexible cable 186 is bent from the fixed base 162 by the rear movable base 163 by being locked to the fixed base 162 and the front movable base 164, and is extended and wired to the front movable base 164. .

  When the upper movable presentation member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position and the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 relatively extend, the flexible cable 186 has one end 186a of the slit of the fixed base The other end 186 b is engaged with the slit 164 K of the front movable base 164 by the clip 199.

  As described above, the flexible cable 186 changes between the state of being extended and the state of being bent starting from the slits 162 D and 162 E of the fixed base 162 and the slit 164 K of the front movable base 164.

  In FIG. 30, FIG. 31 and FIG. 46, the slits 162C, 162D and 162E of the fixed base 162 and the openings 163a and 163b of the rear movable base 163 are provided at the center of the rear movable base 163 in the width direction. Are formed on the opposite side of the gears 169A to 169E.

  That is, in the rear movable base 163, the gears 169A to 169E are installed on the right side, which is one side across the rack 162A in the width direction central portion of the rear movable base 163, and the flexible cable 186 is the rear movable It is wired to the left which is the other on both sides of the width direction central part of the base 163.

  In FIG. 31, guide grooves 187 and 188 are formed on the back surface of case 161, and guide groove 188 extends in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the extending direction (horizontal direction) of guide groove 187. doing. A flexible cable 186 is fitted in the guide grooves 187 and 188, and the flexible cable 186 is wired from the relay substrate 185 along the guide grooves 187 and 188 and extends forward from the case 161.

  The guide groove 187 has a bottom surface 187c inclined downward toward the other end 187b in the extending direction communicating with the guide groove 188 from one end 187a in the extending direction located at the connection position of the relay substrate 185 and the flexible cable 186. Have.

  The flexible cable 186 is folded back and extends in the vertical direction at a position where the other end 187 b in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and the one end 188 a in the extending direction of the guide groove 188 communicate with each other. Be done. The flexible cable 186 is fastened to the case 161 by the fastening member 189 at a position where the other end 187 b in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and the one end 188 a in the extending direction of the guide groove 188 communicate with each other.

  The guide groove 188 has a bottom surface 188c that inclines from one end 188a in the extension direction toward the other end 188b in the extension direction.

  In FIG. 33, a protrusion 164 M is provided on the left side of the front movable base 164 on the back surface of the front movable base 164. The projecting portion 164M is opposed to the projecting portion 164A in the left-right direction of the gaming board 1, extends in the vertical direction of the front movable base 164, and protrudes rearward from the front movable base 164.

  Rack teeth 164a are formed on the inner surface of the projecting portion 164A facing the projecting portion 164M. Ribs 164s and 164t are formed on the projecting portion 164M and the projecting portion 164A, respectively. The ribs 164s and 164t are respectively bent outward from the rear end of the protrusion 164M and the rear end of the protrusion 164A.

  In FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 41 and FIG. 43, guide grooves 163F and 163G are provided on the left and right sides of the rear movable base 163, and the guide grooves 163F and 163G are in the longitudinal direction of the rear movable base 163. Extends to The ribs 164s and 164t (see FIG. 33) of the protrusions 164A and 164M (see FIG. 33) are slidably fitted in the guide grooves 163F and 163G, and the front movable base 164 is movable rearward along the guide grooves 163F and 163G. It moves up and down with respect to the base 163.

  In FIG. 30, on the front surface of the left side portion of the rear movable base 163, a guide surface 163v is formed. In FIGS. 32 and 33, a guide surface 164v is formed on the back surface of the front movable base 164 on the left outside of the protrusion 164M of the front movable base 164.

  In FIG. 41, the guide surface 163v is opposed to the guide surface 164v in the front-rear direction, and the projecting portion 164M moves relative to the rear movable base 163 in the vertical direction along the guide groove 163F and the guide surface 163v. .

  In FIG. 30, a guide surface 163 w is formed on the front surface of the right side portion of the rear movable base 163. In FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, a guide surface 164 w is formed on the back surface of the front movable base 164 on the right outside of the protruding portion 164 A of the front movable base 164.

  In FIGS. 43 and 44, the guide surface 163w faces the guide surface 164w in the front-rear direction, and the protrusion 164A extends in the vertical direction with respect to the rear movable base 163 along the guide groove 163G and the guide surface 163w. Move relative to each other.

  That is, the upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment has guide grooves 163F and 163G and guide surfaces 163v and 163w extending along the longitudinal direction on the side portion of the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 is , And includes protrusions 164A and 164M having ribs 164s and 164t and guide surfaces 164v and 164w, which extend along the longitudinal direction and relatively movably support the guide grooves 163F and 163G and the guide surfaces 163v and 163w.

  In each of FIG. 41 and FIG. 43, guide protrusions 190 and 191 are provided on the guide surfaces 164v and 164w on the back surface of the front movable base 164. The guide protrusions 190 and 191 are provided on the upper end portion side with respect to the vertical direction central portion of the front movable base 164, and project from the guide surfaces 164 v and 164 w toward the rear movable base 163.

  The guide protrusions 190 and 191 have inclined surfaces 190a and 191a, and vertical surfaces 190b and 191b which extend above the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a and extend in the vertical direction. The inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are uphill from the central portion in the extension direction of the front movable base 164 to the upper end portion (corresponding to the end portion of the present invention).

  As a result, the amount of projection of the guide projections 190 and 191 from the guide surfaces 164v and 164w increases toward the upper end portion of the front movable base 164 in the extending direction on the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a. Therefore, the amount of protrusion of the vertical surfaces 190 b and 191 b is the same as the maximum amount of protrusion of the inclined surfaces 190 a and 191 a and the same amount of protrusion up to the upper end.

  Lower side stoppers 163x and 163y are respectively provided at the end portions of the guide surfaces 163v and 163w at both side portions in the left-right direction of the rear movable base 163. The lower stoppers 163x and 163y are provided at the lower end portion of the rear movable base 163, and project toward the front movable base 164 from the guide surfaces 163v and 163w.

  Thereby, in the state where the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the movable position and the end of the rear movable base 163 and the end of the front movable base 164 overlap, the vertical surfaces 190b, 191b of the guide projections 190, 191 and When the lower stoppers 163x and 163y face each other, the gap between the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y is the back movable base 163 except the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y. The gap between the guide surfaces 163 v and 163 w and the guide surfaces 164 v and 164 w of the front movable base 164 is smaller.

  That is, as the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position toward the movable position on the guide surfaces 164v, 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x, 163y of the present embodiment, the distance between the guide surfaces 164v, 164w The inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are provided such that the separation distance is gradually narrowed.

  The guide surfaces 163v and 163w of the present embodiment constitute a first guide portion of the present invention. The guide surfaces 164v and 164w constitute a second guide portion of the present invention, and the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a of the present invention are formed on the guide surfaces 164w and 164v. Further, the lower stoppers 163x and 163y constitute the projecting portion of the present invention.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the guide portion is a rail (a passage, a weir, etc.) for guiding the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, but the invention is not limited thereto. If there is an effect of limiting the moving direction of the member, it can be expressed as a guide. In addition, it is possible to prevent an inclination caused by the gears 169A to 169E which are drive systems being biased to one side in the left-right direction by the guide portion.

  Upper stoppers 190z and 191z are provided at upper ends of the guide surfaces 164v and 164w. The upper stoppers 190z, 191z project from the guide surfaces 164v, 164w to the rear movable base 163.

  The upper stoppers 190 z and 191 z engage with the lower stoppers 163 x and 163 y when the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the rear movable base 163, whereby the front movable base 164 is moved to the rear movable base 163. Against excessive movement against

  Here, the case 161 of the present embodiment constitutes the main body member of the present invention, and the fixing base 162 constitutes the main body member and the fixing base of the present invention. The rear movable base 163 constitutes the main body member and the first movable base of the present invention. The rack teeth 162a of the fixed base 162 constitute a first uneven portion of the present invention, and the rack 162A constitutes a first rack of the present invention. The gear 169A constitutes a first gear of the present invention, and the gears 169B to 169E constitute a second gear of the present invention. Further, the rack 162A, the gears 169A to 169E, and the projecting portion 164A constitute a moving mechanism of the present invention.

  The front movable base 164 constitutes the main body member and the second movable base of the present invention, and the engagement protrusion 163D constitutes the first engagement portion of the present invention. The rack teeth 164a constitute a second uneven portion of the present invention, and the projecting portions 164A constitute a second rack of the present invention.

  The blade movable rack 165 constitutes a third movable base of the present invention, and the engagement protrusion 165G constitutes a second engagement portion of the present invention. The upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 constitute the movable member of the present invention.

  The flexible cable 186 constitutes the wiring of the present invention, and the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a constitute the light emitting member of the present invention. The coil spring 171 constitutes the biasing member of the present invention. The relay substrate 185 constitutes the wiring substrate of the present invention, and the magnets 197A and 197B constitute the suction member of the present invention.

Next, the operation of the upper movable effect member 101A will be described.
When the upper movable effect member 101A is in the standby position, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 47 (a), the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted. It has become. In this state, the upper movable effect member 101A is located behind the decorative member 99 (see FIGS. 3 and 48).

  When the upper movable effect member 101A is in the standby position, a control signal is transmitted from the lamp control circuit 78 to the relay board 185 (see FIG. 31). The relay substrate 185 transmits a control signal to the decorative substrates 160A, 181 to 184, and 195 (see FIG. 39) via the flexible cable 186 based on the control signal.

  The electric decoration boards 160A, 181 to 184, and 195 are LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a based on the control signal transmitted from the relay board 185 when the upper movable effect member 101A is at the standby position. By controlling the light emission, the color of the decorative member 99 viewed from the front is changed, and when the upper movable effect member 101A is positioned from the standby position to the movable position, the decorative member 99 viewed from the front of the decorative member 99 As the color changes, the light emission color of the upper movable effect member 101A becomes easy to view.

  The LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a and 195a emit the same color as the front decoration 160, for example, if the front decoration 160 is blue, it emits blue light. Thereby, the decoration member 99 emits light in blue.

  If the front decoration 160 is colored, even if the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a and 195a emit white light, the color of the front decoration 160 from the front of the gaming machine (from the player side) The light emission color of the upper movable effect member 101A is difficult to visually recognize.

  If the upper movable effect member 101A moves downward in such a state, the player's line of sight follows the upper movable effect member 101A, and the player's interest gathers in the upper movable effect member 101A and the liquid crystal behind it. .

  On the other hand, the front decoration 160 becomes darker (or returns to the original color by losing the light emitters) due to the light emitters of the upper movable effect member 101A that was on the back disappearing, and the color change and brightness In this case, even the excitement that was on the front decoration 160 gathers to the upper movable presentation member 101A.

  By providing such an effect mode, it is possible to perform an effective effect by the upper movable effect member 101A and the front decoration 160. In particular, when the front decoration 160 is, for example, blue, the upper movable presentation member 101A emits, for example, red light to make the front decoration 160 look purple, or the blue of the front decoration 160 is a material. If the upper side movable effect member 101A emits light in red if the thickness only makes it look blue, the front decoration 160 is also recognized in red.

  In any case, when the upper movable effect member 101A is moved, the front ornament 160 loses the light emitter to change the visibility, and on the other hand, the light emission mode of the upper movable effect member 101A becomes easily visible. It is thought that the interest of people will improve.

  In the state where the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a do not emit light, the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a emit white light even if the color for visually recognizing the front decoration 160 is blue. By doing this, the front decoration 160 may be made to appear white.

  In order to move the upper movable effect member 101A from the standby position to the movable position, as shown in FIG. 34, first, the motor 166 is rotated from the standby position in one direction (forward rotation). When the motor 166 rotates in one direction, the rotation is transmitted from the motor gear 166A to the gears 167A and 167B, and the protrusion 167b provided on the gear 167B moves along the extending direction of the slit 168B of the arm member 168.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 35, the arm member 168 swings downward along the guide rails 161A of the case 161 with the swing shaft 168A as a fulcrum. At this time, the fitting projection 163A of the rear movable base 163 fitted to the slit 168C of the arm member 168 is pressed downward, and the rear movable base 163 moves downward with respect to the fixed base 162, and the fixed base 162 is fixed. And the rear movable base 163 relatively extend.

  When the rear movable base 163 moves downward, the gear 169A meshing with the rack teeth 162a rotates while moving downward with the rear movable base 163. As a result, the rotation of the gear 169A is transmitted to the gear 169E via the gears 169B, 169C, 169D, and the gear 169E rotates downward and moves downward with the rear movable base 163.

  Since the gear 169E meshes with the rack teeth 164a of the front movable base 164, when the gear 169E rotates downward and moves downward with the rear movable base 163, the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the rear movable base 163. Move to As a result, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 46, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 relatively extend.

  FIG. 47 is a view for explaining the movements of the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 in an easy-to-understand manner, and the movements of the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 with the rear movable base 163 fixed. Is drawn.

  When the front movable base 164 moves downward as the rear movable base 163 moves downward, the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 integrally move downward and move to the lower part of the rear movable base 163. The engaging protrusion 165G of the blade movable rack 165 engages with the formed engaging protrusion 163D (see FIG. 47 (b)).

  When the engaging protrusion 165G of the blade movable rack 165 engages with the engaging protrusion 163D, the blade movable rack 165 is restricted from moving downward, and only the front movable base 164 is directed downward with respect to the rear movable base 163. It moves (refer FIG.47 (c)).

  When the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the rear movable base 163, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 37, the teeth 172A and 173A meshing with the rack teeth 165a and 165b rotate, and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 swing from the horizontally oriented state to unite so as to be vertically oriented.

  At the same time, the tooth portions 174A and 175A meshing with the rack teeth 165c and 165d rotate, and the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 swing from the horizontally oriented state to vertically oriented. Unite.

  Since magnets 197A and 197B are provided on the mating surfaces of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175, when the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 merge in the vertical direction, the left lower portion The blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are attracted by the magnets 197A and 197B.

  When the front movable base 164 is moved downward with respect to the blade movable rack 165 from the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), the inner peripheral upper end of the opening 164F of the front movable base 164 is in contact with the engagement protrusion 165G of the blade movable rack 165. By the contact, the front movable base 164 is restricted from moving downward with respect to the blade movable rack 165. At this time, a gap is formed between the lower end of the inner periphery of the opening 164F of the front movable base 164 and the engagement protrusion 165G.

  Thus, when the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the movable rack 165, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173, and the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are horizontally oriented. At the same time, it swings and unites so as to turn up and down simultaneously from the state.

  In addition, when the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 move in a relatively extended state, as shown in FIG. 46, the slits 162D and 162E of the fixed base 162 and the slits 164K of the front movable base 164 The flexible cable 186 extends from the point. Thereby, the control signal is stably transmitted from the flexible cable 186 to the electric decoration substrates 160A, 181 to 184, and 195.

  Thus, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 move from a relatively contracted state to a relatively extended state, and the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position (FIG. The operation to move to) is completed.

  The front movable base 164 is shown in FIGS. 42 and 44 when the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 extend relative to each other when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position. As such, the ribs 164s and 164t and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the protrusions 164A and 164M are supported by the guide grooves 163F and 163G and the guide surfaces 163v and 163w of the rear movable base 163 to move downward.

  In the process of moving the front movable base 164 downward with respect to the rear movable base 163, that is, in the process of moving from the standby state shown in FIGS. 41 and 43 to the movable position shown in FIGS. After the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a of the guide projections 190 and 191 pass the lower stoppers 163x and 163y of the rear movable base 163, the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b are opposed to the lower stoppers 163x and 163y.

  Therefore, when the upper movable effect member 101A is moved to the movable position and the end of the rear movable base 163 and the end of the front movable base 164 overlap, the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b of the guide projections 190 and 191 and The lower stoppers 163x and 163y face each other, and the gap between the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y is a guide of the rear movable base 163 excluding the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y. It is smaller than the gap between the surfaces 163 v and 163 w and the guide surfaces 164 v and 164 w of the front movable base 164.

  As described above, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, a control signal is transmitted from the relay substrate 185 to the electric decoration substrates 160A, 181 to 184, and 195 via the flexible cable 186. The electric decoration substrates 160A, 181 to 184, and 195 are different in color from the color when the decorative member 99 emits light when located at the standby position based on the control signal LED 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, The light is emitted at 195.

  In the case of controlling the light emission of the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a, the upper movable effect member 101A may continuously emit light in any color until it moves from the standby position to the movable position. The light may be emitted in an arbitrary color when the upper movable effect member 101A is moved to the movable position. However, it is preferable to emit light in different colors at the standby position and the movable position.

  Next, when moving the upper movable effect member 101A from the movable position shown in FIGS. 37 and 39 to the standby position, the motor 166 is rotated in the other direction (reverse rotation) in FIGS. When the motor 166 rotates in the other direction, the rotation is transmitted from the motor gear 166A to the gears 167A and 167B, and the protrusion 167b moves along the extending direction of the slit 168B of the arm member 168.

  Thereby, the arm member 168 is guided by the guide rail 161A of the case 161 with the pivot shaft 168A as a fulcrum and pivots upward. At this time, the rear side movable base 163 is moved upward with respect to the stationary base 162 by pressing the fitting projection 163A of the rear side movable base 163 fitted into the slit 168C of the arm member 168 upward.

  When the rear movable base 163 moves upward, the gear 169A meshing with the rack teeth 162a rotates while moving upward together with the rear movable base 163. Thus, the rotation of the gear 169A is transmitted to the gear 169E via the gears 169B, 169C, 169D, and the gear 169E rotates upward and moves upward together with the rear movable base 163.

  The gear 169E meshes with the rack teeth 164a of the front movable base 164. Therefore, when the gear 169E rotates and moves upward with the rear movable base 163, the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the rear movable base 163. Move to When the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the rear movable base 163, the front movable base 164 and the rear movable base 163 move upward so as to relatively contract.

  When the front movable base 164 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 47C, the front movable base 164 moves upward by the gap between the inner peripheral lower end of the opening 164F and the engagement protrusion 165G. As a result, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the blade movable rack 165.

  Further, the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 are connected by a coil spring 171, and the coil spring 171 has the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 so that the engaging portion 165F and the engaging portion 164E approach. I am energized.

  As a result, when the front movable base 164 moves upward by the gap between the inner peripheral lower end of the opening 164F and the engagement protrusion 165G, the front movable base 164 is assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring 171. The movable rack 165 is quickly moved upward.

  When the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the blade movable rack 165, as shown in FIG. 36, the tooth portions 172A and 173A that respectively mesh with the rack teeth 165a and 165b rotate. As a result, as shown in FIG. 36, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 swing from the state of being vertically directed to be horizontally directed, and the combination is released.

  At the same time, the tooth portions 174A and 175A, which respectively mesh with the rack teeth 165c and 165d, rotate. As a result, as shown in FIG. 36, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 swing from the state of being vertically directed to be horizontally directed, and the combination is released.

  That is, when the blade movable rack 165 moves upward, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are simultaneously directed in the horizontal direction. It is rocked to release the union.

  When the front movable base 164 moves upward together with the rear movable base 163 while the gear 169 E rotates, the front movable base 164 moves upward relative to the rear movable base 163.

  At this time, the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 integrally move upward with respect to the rear movable base 163, and as shown in FIG. 47A, the engagement protrusion 165G of the blade movable rack 165 It is separated upward from the engagement protrusion 163D of the side movable base 163.

  When the motor 166 is driven to the initial position and the arm member 168 swings to the upper end of the guide rail 161A of the case 161, the drive of the motor 166 is stopped. At this time, as shown in FIG. 47A, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted.

  Furthermore, when the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted, as shown in FIG. 45, the flexible cable 186 includes the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable. It is bent and housed between the bases 164 and is pressed against the projecting portion 198 to be in a bent state.

  An opening 163a is formed in the upper part of the back surface of the rear movable base 163 in the present embodiment, and an opening 163b is formed in the lower part of the surface of the rear movable base 163, and the flexible cable 186 is It is accommodated in the rear movable base 163 through the opening 163 a of the rear movable base 163 and extends from the rear movable base 163 to the front movable base 164 through the opening 163 b.

  Thereby, the flexible cable 186 can be easily wired from the fixed base 162 to the front movable base 164 through the rear movable base 163.

  By moving the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 in the relatively contracted state from the relatively extended state in this manner, the upper movable presentation member 101A moves from the movable position to the standby position. Complete the move operation (see FIG. 3).

  In the process of moving the front movable base 164 upward with respect to the rear movable base 163, that is, in the process of moving from the deployed state shown in FIGS. 42 and 44 to the standby position shown in FIGS. The lower stoppers 163x and 163y face the guide surfaces 164v and 164w after passing the inclined surfaces 190a and 191 from the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 of the front movable base 164.

  Since the gap between the guide surfaces 164v and 164w and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y is larger than the gap between the lower stoppers 163x and 163y and the guide protrusions 190 and 191, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are relative to each other. The rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 can be smoothly moved when moving so as to be contracted.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the upper movable effect member 101A moves relative to the rear movable base 163 provided movably with respect to the game board 1 and the rear movable base 163. A front movable base 164 and a rear movable base 163, which are freely provided and pivotally support the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175. The upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right portion are provided slidably on the engaging protrusion 163D and the front movable base 164 and moved relative to the front movable base 164. A blade movable rack 16 for swinging the blade member 175 to a first position extending in a first horizontal direction and a second position extending in a second direction directed in the vertical direction And an engaging protrusion 165G provided on the blade movable rack 165 and engageable with the engaging protrusion 163D, a coil spring having one end attached to the front movable base 164 and the other end attached to the blade movable rack 165 It has 171 and.

  When moving from the standby position to the movable position, the upper movable effect member 101A moves so that the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 extend relative to each other, and the engagement protrusion 165G is engaged with the engagement protrusion 163D. , The blade movable rack 165 is slid, and the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are moved from the first position to the second position. When swinging and moving from the movable position to the standby position, the coil spring 171 causes the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 to move from the second position. The blade movable rack 165 is biased to swing to the 1 position.

  Thus, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are moved so as to extend relative to each other, and the upper left wing member 172 and the upper right The partial blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 can be swung from the first position to the second position. As a result, the rendering performance by the upper movable rendering member 101A can be enhanced.

  When the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the movable position to the standby position, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are moved by the coil spring 171. The blade movable rack 165 is biased to swing from the position to the first position, so the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 The position can be quickly returned to the first position. Thereby, the rendering performance of the upper movable rendering member 101A can be more effectively improved.

  In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the upper movable presentation member 101A is fixed to the rear cover 1A, and the case 161 having the rack 162A on which rack teeth 162a continuous in the longitudinal direction are formed. The rear movable base 163 having gears 169A-169E, engaging projections 163D and gears 169B-169E, which are movably provided and meshed with the rack teeth 162a and which transmit power from the gears 169A, and relative movement with the rear movable base 163 A front movable base 164 having a projecting portion 164A which is freely provided and has rack teeth 164a formed continuously in the longitudinal direction and meshing with the gear 169E, and movably provided on the front movable base 164 and engaged with the engagement projection 163D Movable blade rack 165 in which the engageable engagement protrusion 165G is formed, and the front movable base 164 An upper left blade member 172 is provided, which can swing to a first position in which the longitudinal direction is directed horizontally and a second position in which the longitudinal direction is directed vertically as the movable rack 165 moves. A partial blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174 and a lower right blade member 175 are provided.

  In addition to this, the upper movable effect member 101A has the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164, and the guide surfaces 163v and 163w of the rear movable base 163 have Lower stoppers 163x and 163y are provided, and inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are formed on the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164. The inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are located between the lower stoppers 163x and 163y and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w opposed to the lower stoppers 163x and 163y as the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position. The separation distance, which is the distance, is inclined so as to gradually narrow.

  When moving from the standby position to the movable position, the upper movable effect member 101A moves with the end of the rear movable base 163 in the extending direction such that the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 relatively extend. As the movable movable rack 165 is engaged with the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, and the lower left, by overlapping the end of the front movable base 164 with the extending direction and engaging the engaging protrusion 165G with the engaging protrusion 163D. The partial blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are swung from the first position to the second position.

  Thus, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the movable position, the distance between the lower stoppers 163x and 163y and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w opposed to the lower stoppers 163x and 163y becomes the narrowest. When the movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 overlap little (the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 (Relatively extending state), firmly connecting the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 when the end in the extending direction of the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 overlap in a short length Can. As a result, it is possible to prevent rattling when the upper movable effect member 101A is moved to the movable position.

  Furthermore, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the lower stoppers 163x and 163y of the rear movable base 163 can be moved along the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164. . Thereby, the state in which the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 overlap is small and the overlap is large (the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted) As a result, it is possible to smoothly move the upper movable effect member 101A.

  In addition to the narrowest distance between the lower stoppers 163x, 163y and the guide surfaces 164v, 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x, 163y, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member Since the 174 and the lower right blade member 175 swings from the first position to the second position, it is possible to more effectively improve the rendering of the movable combination.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, lower stoppers 163x and 163y and upper stoppers 190z and 191z are provided on the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, respectively, and they face the lower stoppers 163x and 163y. The guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, a protrusion (a protrusion or the like) is provided on any movable base (or guide or the like), and there is an inclined surface facing this protrusion, and the inclined surface corresponds to the distance between the protrusion and the inclined surface It is possible to change the position of the movable base as long as the movement of the movable base can be stabilized and the movement of the movable base can be stabilized by the protrusion and the inclined surface. The configuration and the like of the number and arrangement of the components are not limited.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a decoration member 99 provided on the game board 1 so as to be located in front of the upper movable effect member 101A, and the upper movable effect member 101A is elongated in the longitudinal direction Provided on the lower blade member 172, upper right blade member 173, lower left blade member 174 and lower right blade member 175, upper left blade member 172, upper right blade member 173, lower left blade member 174 and lower right blade member 175 And the LEDs 181-184.

  In addition to this, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are positioned behind the decorative member 99 in the standby position. And the LED 181a to 184a are configured to emit light toward the decorative member 99, and the upper movable effect member 101A is moved from the standby position to the movable position. When moved, it moves and unites in a second direction in which the longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the first direction. As a result, it is possible to more effectively enhance the rendering performance of the upper movable rendering member 101A.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 have magnets 197A and 197B, and the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are in the second direction. When moved, they face in the left-right direction and are attracted by the magnets 197A and 197B.

  Thereby, the state where the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 unite can be stably maintained. For this reason, the sway or the like of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 integrally movable with the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 occurs. It is possible to more effectively enhance the rendering effect by the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 by preventing this.

  The magnets 197A and 197B may be attached to the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 instead of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175, and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 may be attached to the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided on the game board 1 so as to be positioned in front of the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a provided on the upper movable effect member 101A and the upper movable effect member 101A positioned at the standby position. The LED 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a are provided with a decorative member 99 capable of transmitting light, and a full color LED capable of emitting light of different colors when the upper movable effect member 101A is positioned at the standby position and the movable position. It is configured.

  Thereby, it is not necessary to provide a light emitting member such as an LED on the decorative member 99, and the decorative member 99 can be made to emit light by the upper movable effect member 101A. For this reason, the structure of the decoration member 99 can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the decoration member 99 can be reduced. In addition to this, effects of various colors can be performed by the upper movable effect member 101A, and the effect of the upper movable effect member 101A can be improved.

  In addition, when the upper movable effect member 101A during light emission moves from the standby position to the movable position, the light emission of the decorative member 99 disappears as the upper movable effect member 101A moves. At this time, by moving the upper movable effect member 101A downward while emitting light, the upper movable effect member 101A moving downward while emitting light from the player's line of sight can be noticed. Thereby, the effect of the upper movable effect member 101A can be made to stand out.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a emit light in the same color as the color of the decorative member 99 in the state where the upper movable effect member 101A stands by, the color of the decorative member 99 Of the upper movable presentation member 101A can be more effectively improved.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a flexible cable 186 connected to the electric decoration substrates 160A, 181 to 184, and 195 of the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a, and the flexible cable 186 includes the fixed base 162 and the front movable. By being locked to the base 164, the fixed base 162 is bent at the rear movable base 163, and is extended and wired to the front movable base 164.

  As a result, when the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 move to a relatively extended position and a relatively contracted position, the flexible cable 186 moves relative to the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164. It is possible to move the flexible cable 186 smoothly while preventing it from floating.

  In addition to this, the gears 169A to 169E are installed on the left side, which is one side of the central axis in the width direction of the rear movable base 163, and the flexible cable 186 is the central axis in the width direction of the rear movable base 163. Is placed on the right side, which is the other side.

  Thereby, it is possible to move the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 to the relatively extended position and the relatively contracted position while preventing the flexible cable 186 from interfering with the gears 169A to 169E. it can. As a result, the flexible cable 186 can be moved more effectively and smoothly.

  In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the protruding portion 198 is provided on the fixed base 162 and the upper movable effect member 101A is in the standby position, the flexible cable 186 is fixed to the fixed base 162 and the rear side. It is bent and accommodated between the movable base 163 and between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, and is bent by being pressed against the projecting portion 198.

  As a result, the flexible cable 186 bent and stored in the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 can be further bent by the projection 198.

  Therefore, the length of the flexible cable 186 accommodated in the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 is increased to fix the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186. And the flexible cable 186 is prevented from fluttering inside the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186 is fixed to the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable. It can be stably accommodated in the base 164.

  Furthermore, by further bending the flexible cable 186 by the projecting portion 198, it is possible to generate a restoring force to return the flexible cable 186 from the bent state. For this reason, the frictional force generated between the flexible cable 186 and the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 can be increased. As a result, the flexible cable 186 can be more effectively prevented from fluttering inside the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186 is fixed to the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable. The base 164 can be accommodated more stably.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the upper movable effect member 101A is provided with a case 161, a flexible cable 186 provided in the case 161, and a relay substrate 185 connected to the flexible cable 186.
The case 161 includes a guide groove 187 in which the flexible cable 186 is fitted, and a guide groove 188 which extends in a direction orthogonal to the extension direction of the guide groove 187 and in which the flexible cable 186 is fitted. There is. The guide groove 187 and the guide groove 188 are formed in an L shape and are in communication with each other.

  The guide groove 187 has a bottom surface 187c inclined downward toward the other end 187b in the extending direction communicating with the guide groove 188 from one end 187a in the extending direction located at the connection position of the relay substrate 185 and the flexible cable 186. The flexible cable 186 is fastened to the case 161 by the fastening member 189 at a position where the other end 187 b in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and the one end 188 a in the extending direction of the guide groove 188 communicate with each other. .

  Thereby, the flexible cable 186 fitted in the guide groove 187 can be extended to the guide groove 188 along the inclined bottom surface 187 c of the guide groove 187. For this reason, compared with the case where the inclination of the one end portion 187a in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 located at the connection position of the flexible cable 186 and the relay substrate 185 is steep (for example, a step having an inclination of 90 °), The cable 186 can be prevented from bending. Therefore, the flexible cable 186 can be protected by preventing a load from being applied to the connection position of the flexible cable 186 and the relay substrate 185.

  Further, the flexible cable 186 is fastened to the case 161 by the fastening member 189 at a position where the other end 187 b in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and the one end 188 a in the extending direction of the guide groove 188 communicate with each other. It is possible to prevent the flexible cable 186 from fluttering at a bent position where the guide groove 187 and the guide groove 188 communicate with each other.

  The bottom surface 187c of the guide groove 187 is from the one end portion 187a in the extension direction located at the connection position of the relay substrate 185 and the flexible cable 186 to the other end portion 187b in the extension direction communicating with the guide groove 188. You may incline it.

  Here, "coalescent" can mean completion, appearance, driving of a gimmick, etc. for a player by forming a specific design by contact, proximity, interlocking movement of game members. It represents that the effect etc. are executed.

  In particular, when performing a production involving such a combination, it may indicate that the big hit is reported or that the expectation of the big hit (probability or reliability to be a big hit when the corresponding production is performed) is large. It is conceivable that the appearance of a specific design can be used to improve the player's interest in the gaming machine or to improve the expectation for the game itself.

  In addition, the usage method is not limited to this, and pseudo link, reach, special role, small hit, BB, RB, reel lock, pseudo bonus, RT (replay time), AT (assist time), ART (assist) It is assumed that it is used for a number of notification such as replay time), CT (chance time), CZ (chance zone), and the like.

  In addition, this embodiment can be used in a pachislot machine, a pachinko machine, an enclosed type game machine, etc. As a game medium, in addition to balls and medals, the number of game media on the data (balls, balls, balls, balls for lending) , Various kinds of game media such as balls, credits, number of throws, number of shots, number of payouts, number of balls, etc.) are assumed. In addition, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which the number of gaming media on data is increased or decreased. In addition, balls, balls, balls, balls, balls, etc. can be applied to various game media such as balls and medals. Also, the number of game machine outs may be counted using an out box or other peripheral device.

<Configuration and Operation of Left-side Moveable Effect Member 271 and Right-side Moveable Effect Member 272>
As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a left movable effect member 271 and a right movable effect member 272. The left side movable effect member 271 and the right side movable effect member 272 are provided at the rear of the game board 1 on both the left and right sides of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  As shown in FIG. 121, the left side movable effect member 271 is provided with the upper cover 273 fixed at the rear of the game board 1, and the left sword member 274 is freely rockable on the rocking shaft 273A of the upper cover 273. It is attached.

  The left sword member 274 is a member imitating a sword extending in the vertical direction. An arm portion 275 is integrally provided on the upper portion of the left sword member 274, and the arm portion 275 is formed with a slit 275A extending in the left-right direction.

  A motor 276 is attached to the upper cover 273, and a motor gear 276A is provided on a shaft of the motor 276. Gears 277A, 277B and 277C are rotatably provided on the upper cover 273, and the gear 277A meshes with the motor gear 276A. A fitting protrusion 277c is integrally provided on the motor gear 277C, and the fitting protrusion 277c is slidably fitted in the slit 275A.

  The right movable effect member 272 includes a lower cover 278 fixed at the rear of the game board 1, and a right sword member 279 is swingably attached to a swing shaft 278A of the lower cover 278.

  The right sword member 279 is a member imitating a sword extending in the vertical direction. An arm portion 280 is integrally provided at a lower portion of the right sword member 279, and the arm portion 280 is formed with a slit 280A extending in the left-right direction.

A motor 281 is attached to the lower cover 278, and a motor gear 281A is provided on a shaft of the motor 281. Gears 282A, 282B are rotatably provided on the lower cover 278, and the gear 282A meshes with the motor gear 281A.
A fitting protrusion 282 b is integrally provided on the motor gear 282 B, and the fitting protrusion 282 b is slidably fitted in the slit 280 A.

Next, the operation of the left movable effect member 271 and the right movable effect member 272 will be described.
When the left movable effect member 271 is in the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 3), the left sword member 274 extends in the vertical direction. When the motor 276 rotates forward in the clockwise direction with the left movable effect member 271 positioned at the standby position, the rotation of the motor gear 276A is transmitted to the gear 277C via the gears 277A and 277B, and the gear 277C rotates counterclockwise. To rotate. When the gear 277C rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the fitting protrusion 277c moves along the slit 275A in the circumferential direction of the gear 277C.
Thus, as shown in FIG. 122, the left sword member 274 swings in the counterclockwise direction from the standby position, and moves to the deployed position obliquely inclined in the display area 4A.

  On the other hand, when the right movable effect member 272 is at the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 3), the right sword member 279 extends in the vertical direction. When the motor 281 rotates forward in the counterclockwise direction with the right movable effect member 272 positioned at the standby position, the rotation of the motor gear 281A is transmitted to the gear 282B via the gear 282A and the gear 282B rotates counterclockwise. Rotate. When the gear 282B rotates counterclockwise, the fitting projection 282b moves along the slit 280A in the circumferential direction of the gear 282B.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 122, the right sword member 279 swings in the counterclockwise direction from the standby position, and moves to the deployed position obliquely inclined in the display area 4A. The left side movable effect member 271 and the right side movable effect member 272 simultaneously move from the standby position to the deployed position, for example, and are connected in an oblique direction at the deployed position.

  On the other hand, in the left sword member 274, when the motor 276 reversely rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the unfolded state, the rotation of the motor gear 276A is transmitted to the gear 277C via the gears 277A, 277B and the gear 277C rotates clockwise. Do. When the gear 277C rotates in the clockwise direction, the fitting protrusion 277c moves along the slit 275A in the circumferential direction of the gear 277C. Thus, the left sword member 274 swings in the clockwise direction from the unfolded position, retracts from the display area 4A, and returns to the state of extending in the vertical direction at the standby position.

  In the right sword member 272, when the motor 281 reversely rotates in the clockwise direction from the unfolded state, the rotation of the motor gear 281A is transmitted to the gear 282B via the gear 282A, and the gear 282B rotates in the clockwise direction. When the gear 282B rotates clockwise, the fitting projection 282b moves along the slit 280A in the circumferential direction of the gear 282B. As a result, the right sword member 279 swings in the clockwise direction from the unfolded position, retracts from the display area 4A, and returns to the state of extending in the vertical direction at the standby position.

[Example of another embodiment]
Next, an example of another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  123 to 127 show another embodiment of the game board 1. In FIG. 123, on the right of the game area 1p of the game board 1, the passing gate 251, the second start opening 252, the wing member 253, the first big winning opening 254, the second big winning opening 255, the first big winning opening 254 A first large winning opening shutter 254A for opening and closing the second large winning opening shutter 255A for opening and closing the second large winning opening 255, and a general winning opening 40D are provided.

  The pass gate 251 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 252. The winning of the game ball on the passing gate 251 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). In addition, even if a game ball is won in the passing gate 251, a winning ball is not generated.

  The first large winning opening shutter 254A switches the first large winning opening 254 to an open state or a closed state by opening and closing in a forward and backward posture in the front-back direction of the gaming board 1, It is arranged to cover the first large winning opening 254 in the closed state.

  The second large winning opening shutter 255A switches the second large winning opening 255 to the open state or the closed state by opening and closing so as to be in a forward and backward posture in the front and rear direction of the gaming board 1, It is arranged to cover the second big winning opening 255 in the closed state.

  The first large winning opening shutter 254A and the second large winning opening shutter 255A are driven by a first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A and a second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

  The game board 1 is provided with a ball passage unit 256 shown in FIG. 124 and FIG. The ball passage unit 256 is located below the passing gate 251 (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 125), and is a discharge port 257 from which the game ball won in the second starting port 252 (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 125) is discharged. And a ball passage 258 extending downward from the discharge port 257 in communication with the discharge port 257 and discharging the gaming balls discharged from the discharge port 257 downstream.

  An opening 259 opened to the side of the game board 1 is formed at the upper right of the discharge port 257, and the opening 259 communicates with the game area 1p.

  In the second start opening 252, the difficulty of winning is determined by the blade member 253 as a normal motorized combination, and the game ball of the second start opening 252 has a second start opening switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

  The wing members 253 move in the back and forth direction so that the game board 1 projects in the back and forth direction, and the opening state enabling the game ball to win the second starting opening 252, and 2) It is a so-called ordinary electric winning combination that switches between a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball on the starting opening 252. The blade member 253 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

  When the wing member 253 is in the open state, the gaming ball passing through the passing gate 251 wins the second starting opening 252, and when the wing member 253 is in the closing state, the gaming ball passing through the passing gate 251 is the first After being in contact with the wing member 253 without winning in the second starting opening 252, it is discharged to the game area 1p through the opening 259.

  The ball passage unit 256 is provided with a discharge port 260, and the gaming balls having won the general winning hole 40D are discharged to the ball passage 258 through the discharge port 260.

  A ball passage 259 is in communication with the lower end of the ball passage 258, and the ball passage 259 extends in the left-right direction of the game board 1 from the lower end of the ball passage 258. In the ball passage 258 and the ball passage 259, the passage area, which is the area of the cross section in the front-rear direction orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball, is formed in the passage area for about two or more game balls. Thereby, in the ball passages 258 and 259, the game balls can pass side by side in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  Below the outlet 260, the ball passage 258 is provided with a general winning opening right switch 400B, and the general winning opening right switch 400B detects the gaming balls that have been won in the general winning opening 40D and discharged to the outlet 260. Do.

  The ball passage unit 256 includes a ball passage 262. The ball passage 262 is located below the first large winning opening 254, and the gaming ball that has won the first large winning hole 254 is discharged to the ball passage 262.

  In FIG. 126, the ball passage 263 is in communication with the lower portion (downstream) of the ball passage 262. In FIGS. 124 to 126, the ball passage 263 is located above the ball passage 259, and extends in the left-right direction of the game board 1 together with the ball passage 259.

  As a result, the gaming balls won from the first big winning opening 254 are discharged to the ball passage 263 through the ball passage 262 and discharged toward the left (downstream) of the game board 1 along the ball passage 263.

  In FIGS. 125 and 126, the ball passage unit 256 is provided with a ball passage 264. The ball passage 264 is located below the second large winning opening 255, and the gaming ball that has been won in the second large winning opening 255 is discharged to the ball passage 264.

  In FIG. 127, the ball passage 259 and the ball passage 263 are in communication with the ball passage 264. For this reason, the game balls that have won the first large winning opening 254 are discharged toward the left (downstream) of the game board 1 through the ball passage 263, and the ball passage 264 in the middle of the ball passage 263. It is divided into what is discharged to the ball passage 259 through.

  In FIGS. 124 and 125, the downstream end of the ball passage 259 and the downstream end of the ball passage 263 are joined by the joining portion 265, and the gaming ball discharged downstream along the ball passage 259 or the ball passage 263 is , And are merged at the merging section 265 and discharged to the back of the game board 1. That is, the ball passage 259 and the ball passage 263 discharge the gaming balls having won the first large winning opening 254 and the second large winning opening 255 on the back surface of the gaming board 1.

  Further, since the ball passage 259 is in communication with the ball passage 258, the gaming balls having won the second starting opening 252 and the general winning hole 40D are discharged from the ball passage 258 through the ball passage 259 to the merging portion 265. That is, gaming balls discharged to the ball passage 258 and the ball passage 263 can be discharged to the ball passage 259.

  Here, the first large winning opening 254 of the present embodiment constitutes a first winning opening of the present invention, and the second large winning opening 255 constitutes a second winning opening of the present invention. The ball passage 263 constitutes a first game medium passage of the present invention, and the ball passage 259 constitutes a second game medium passage of the present invention.

  In the ball passage 259 of the present embodiment, the passage area, which is the area of the cross section orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball passes (left and right direction of the game board 1) (front and back direction of the game board 1) It is formed large.

  The ball passage 263 is in communication with the ball passage 264 separately from the merging portion 265. As a result, the gaming ball that has won the first large winning opening 254 can be discharged to the ball passage 259 via the ball passage 264.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the ball passage 259 merges with the ball passage 263 downstream of the second large winning opening 255 and has an area of a cross section orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball. The passage area is formed larger than the passage area of the ball passage 263 and has a ball passage 264 as a communicating portion communicating with the ball passage 263 separately from the joining portion 265 which is a joining portion with the ball passage 263. In addition, since the game balls that have won the first large winning opening 254 can be discharged to the ball passage 259 through the ball passage 264, the gaming balls that have won the first large winning hole 254 get clogged downstream thereof Can be prevented. As a result, the gaming balls can be smoothly discharged toward the downstream, and the game characteristics can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, two large winning openings 254, 255 are provided two, but three or more large winning openings may be provided. Further, although two ball passages 259 and 263 are provided, three or more ball passages may be provided corresponding to the number of big winning openings. It should be noted that the game medium passage may be provided on the game board, the spacer, etc. as long as it can guide or discharge the game medium from the winning opening.

[Example of another embodiment]
Next, an example of another embodiment will be described using FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the upper movable effect member 101A is installed behind the decorative member 99 (see FIG. 3), and the lens 289 is installed on the right of the upper movable effect member 101A. Behind the lens 289, an electric decoration substrate 290 is installed. The electric decoration substrate 290 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 291 emitting light in a single color (for example, white). The LED 291 emits light toward the decorative member 99 through the lens 289. Here, the LED 291 is included in the LED group 28 (see FIG. 6) controlled by the lamp control circuit 78.

  The LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a, which are full-color light emitters of the present embodiment, constitute a first light-emitting portion of the present invention, and the LEDs 291, which are single-color light emitters, constitute a second light-emitting portion. Further, the front decoration 160 including the blue lens member constitutes the lens member of the present invention.

Next, the operation will be described.
When the upper movable effect member 101A is in the standby position, light emission is performed so as to match the monochromatic LED 291 with the light emission mode. Specifically, since the front decoration 160 is blue, light emission is performed in green so that the color transmitted from the front decoration 160 is white.

  As a result, the color emitted from the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a becomes similar to that of the LED 291, and the decorative member 99 emits white light. Here, it is conceivable that the decoration member 99 emits light in dark white by superimposing green light on the blue front decoration 160. In this case, the lens of the decoration member 99 or the lens of the decoration member 99 By providing a diffusion sheet or the like in the vicinity, it is possible to diffuse the light from the upper movable effect member 101A and the light from the LED 219 to the decorative member 99 and adjust the light emission mode of the decorative member 99.

  In addition, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the decoration member 99 emits light by the LED 291, and the upper movable effect member 101A emits light in a color different from that of the LED 291, whereby the upper movable effect member 101A It is possible to more effectively improve the stage effect.

  In addition, when controlling the light emission of the upper movable effect member 101A according to the expectation of the effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 4 or when the LED 291 emits white light according to the expectation of the effect, The light emission of the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a may be controlled so that the upper movable effect member 101A appears in the same color at the movable position.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a emit light when the upper movable effect member 101A is in the standby position, whereby the LEDs 160a and 181a to 184a are viewed from the front. Since it is possible to change the color of 195a to the color similar to the light emission color of the LED 291, it is unnecessary to provide the decoration member 99 with a light emitting part such as an LED, and the upper movable presentation member 101A emits the decoration member 99 it can.

  In addition to this, the mounting amount of the full color LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a can be reduced, and the decorative member 99 can emit light in the same color (white). As a result, the configuration of the decorative member 99 can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the decorative member 99 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the upper movable effect member 101A is positioned from the standby position to the movable position, the color of the decorative member 99 viewed from the front of the decorative member 99 can be changed, so various colors by the upper movable effect member 101A The effect of the upper movable effect member 101A can be improved.

  Further, for example, if the effect of moving the movable display member 101A from the standby position to the movable position while emitting the upper movable presentation member 101A is performed, the upper movable presentation member 101A moving while emitting light of the player's gaze can be focused. Thereby, the effect of the upper movable effect member 101A can be made to stand out.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later, the non probability variation / non time saving gaming state and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is non non There is a probability variation gaming state (special gaming status) that is higher than the probability variation / non-time minor gaming status, and a short gaming status when the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non probability variation / non-time minor gaming status. When the special symbol lottery is won, it shifts to the big hit game state (specific game state).

  In the time saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is a high probability state, and therefore the winning of the second starting opening 33 is facilitated by the support of the blade members 34 as the normal electric throws. This state is a state called so-called "power support", and it becomes easy to store the holding balls of the special symbol game described later, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the game balls by winning in the second starting opening 33. Specifically, the time saving game state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time saving gaming state 1), the state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (time saving gaming state 2 ), The opening time of the wing member 34 as a motorized part normally means at least one of the relatively long states (time saving gaming state 3). For example, the time saving game state also includes a state in which the time saving game state 1, the time saving game state 2, and the time short game state 3 simultaneously progress with any combination. In such a time saving game state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit game state is improved.

  After the end of the big hit gaming state that succeeded in V winning in the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state, transition to the probability change · short time gaming state (a normal gaming state that is a probability change gaming state, time saving game state) without fail It does not shift to a definite change / non-short time gaming state (a non normal probability gaming state, a non normal time gaming state, a normal gaming state). On the other hand, when the big hit gaming state ends with non-V winning without a V winning in the specific area 38A, the normal gaming state is a non-probability changing gaming state and a time saving gaming state after the end of the big hitting gaming state. It is supposed to move to

  Also, in this embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state, for example, 180 special symbol lottery (180 variation display or stop display of special symbols) is performed in the probability variation / time saving gaming state, non-triggered It is supposed to shift to a definite change, non time saving game state. In addition, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, for example, in the non-probability · time-short game state 100 times or 4 special symbol lottery (100 or 4 times the variation display or stop display of special symbols) was triggered , Non-probability · non-time saving game state is to shift. In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state, until it shifts to the next big hit gaming state, it may be made to maintain the probability variation / time saving gaming state. In the following description, the probability variation gaming state ending by performing the special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times as in the present embodiment will also be described as ST (Specia 1 Time) gaming state.

  The upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B are installed in a state of being retracted from the central portion of the display area 4A at the rear of the game board 1 when not in operation (see FIG. 3). The upper movable effect member 101A appears at a movable position in front of the central portion of the display area 4A (see FIGS. 19 and 48) when a specific effect is performed, and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173. And the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 move and emit light. The lower movable effect member 101B appears at a movable position in front of the lower portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs movement and light emission in the circumferential direction in the radial direction of the outer ring member 117. The lower movable effect member 101B moves the outer ring member 117 in the radial direction and emits light at the standby position below the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed.

  The cover member 43 is provided to form the second large winning opening 37, and is attached below the first large winning opening 36. The cover member 43 forms the second large winning opening 37 by opening a part of the upper end surface thereof. In the state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the displacement member 39 is positioned at the opening corresponding to the second large winning opening 37. Further, at the front edge of the upper end face of the cover member 43, a guide piece 43a for guiding the game ball toward the second large winning opening 37 is provided. Inside the cover member 43, a ball passage is formed from the opening corresponding to the second large winning opening 37 through the second large winning opening count switch 370 to the specific area 38A and the nonspecific area 38B. Such a cover member 43 is disposed to cover the second winning opening count switch 370, the specific area switch 380A, and the non-specific area switch 380B.

  The LED unit 5 notifies the player of each gaming state and the lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the normal symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, the first 2) A special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol hold display unit 55, a second special symbol hold display unit 56, and a round display unit 59 are provided. Although not illustrated, the lamp / LED 27 (see FIG. 6) disposed on the game board 1 etc. includes the one corresponding to the character appearance notification lamp, and the transition to the jackpot gaming state is normally determined Lights up (or blinks) when a special character (hereinafter also referred to as "SP character") appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during part of the special symbol fluctuation in the gaming state or during the big hit gaming state It is supposed to be.

  The normal symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not the second starting port 33 is opened by driving the blade member 34 as a normal electric role when the gaming ball has won the passage gate 35 as a trigger. It displays the lottery result for the game. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 is capable of, for example, red lighting and blue lighting, and lights in red when winning in the normal symbol game, and lights in blue when losing in the normal symbol game. When the lighting mode of the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display unit 51 is, for example, a lighting mode of red, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 33 is permitted. In addition, as a lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game, other lighting modes may be used, for example, it becomes a lighting state or blink state in the case of winning, while it becomes the extinguishing state in the case of losing You may

  In the normal symbol holding display unit 52, a new gaming ball wins the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524. In the case of having performed, the number of executable times of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol held to perform the fluctuation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 after the next time is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524 are normally located on the left side of the symbol display unit 51, and are arranged in a row along with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524, for example, when the number of holds is “1”, the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of reservations is "2", the LED lamps 521 and 522 turn on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 turn off. When the number of reservations is "3", the LED lamps 521, 522 and 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of reservations is "4", all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524 light.

  The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 indicate the results of the winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of symbols (hereinafter referred to as "first special symbols") serving as identification information triggered by winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 32 and The result of the winning lottery based on the winning on the starting opening 32 is stopped and displayed as the stopping symbol according to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of symbols (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbols") serving as identification information triggered by winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 33, The result of the winning lottery based on the winning on the starting opening 33 is displayed as a stop symbol relating to the second special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 implement identification information display means.

  The variable display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed, for example, using a 7-segment LED or the like by repeating lighting and extinguishing each segment individually. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (pattern) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54. At this time, the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the first special symbol and the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the second special symbol are different from each other. As a hit symbol of the first special symbol, it is a symbol that becomes a transition opportunity to the big hit gaming state, and indicates that it can shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends, such as "probably 1 to 6" There are nominal jackpot symbols, and nominal jackpot symbols such as "time saving 1" to "time saving 5" indicating transition to a non-probable and time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see FIG. 50). The second special symbol is a symbol serving as a transition trigger to a big hit gaming state, and it is a symbol of a big hit symbol such as “provisional change 1” indicating that it can shift to a probability variation gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends. (See FIG. 50). That is, the first special symbol hit symbol has a big hit symbol indicating transitioning to the short time gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, but the second special symbol hit symbol has the short time gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends. There is no jackpot symbol to indicate that the transition to. In addition, the 1st special symbol display part 53 and the 2nd special symbol display part 54 are not limited to 7 segment LED etc. For example, it may be based on combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is obtained by turning on or off the LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554. Or, for the first special symbol variation display for the next and subsequent special symbol games when the new game ball is won in the first starting opening 32 while the second special symbol display unit 54 is the variation display of the symbols for the special symbol game The number of executable times (number of holdings) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held on the is displayed. The second special symbol hold display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is obtained by turning on or off the LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564. Alternatively, the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended for the variation display of symbols for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball is won in the second starting opening 33 during the variation display of symbols for the special symbol game. The number of executable times (number of reservations) of the variable display of the second special symbol display portion 54 is displayed. Each of the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is arranged side by side vertically, and is located above the normal symbol hold display unit 52. The display mode of the number of holdings in the first special symbol holding display unit 55 and the second special symbol holding display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of holdings by the normal symbol holding display unit 52.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 are connected to the first starting opening 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying variable. The game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the communicating ball passage or the second starting opening switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second starting hole 33 If it is, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 are stopped and displayed, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 which has been suspended is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set to the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32 and the first start opening 32 The number of pending variable displays of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 33 is four at maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held for four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol display unit 53 during variation is the main RAM 63 (see FIG. Information of the first special symbol game for 4 times stored as starting memory (starting memory information) in the first special symbol starting memory area (0) of 6) is held as the first special symbol starting memory area ( 1) to 1st special symbol start storage area (4) is stored as start storage. Similarly, with respect to the second special symbol game, when held for four times, information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol in motion is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 ( 0) information of the second special symbol game stored for four times as start memory (start memory information) and held is the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) Is stored as start-up memory. Therefore, the number of prize holdings for both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33, is a maximum of eight in total.

  In addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, the liquid crystal display device 4 Alternatively, the suspension of the winning on the first starting opening 32 and the suspension of the winning on the second starting opening 33 may be displayed.

  The round display unit 59 is lighted while the winning symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of round games to be described later when the big hit gaming state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, and 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the big hit gaming state is executed by turning on or off the LED lamps 591, 592, and 593. In the present embodiment, when the number of rounds is 16 (which may be described as “16R” below), the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592, 593 are turned off. Further, for example, in the present embodiment, when setting the jackpot gaming state of the number of rounds different from the above-described number of rounds, the LED lamp 592 or 593 is turned on and the other LED lamps are turned off. Can. The number of rounds (number of rounds) may mean the whole number of times a round game (round game) is executed, or an ordinal number indicating the order in which the round games are sequentially executed. The number of rounds is described as, for example, “16 rounds” or “16R” when the former is meant, and as “16R's” when the latter is meant. In the following description, "round game" may be simply referred to as "round".

  The liquid crystal display device 4 is disposed behind the gaming board 1 as shown in FIG. 3, and the display area 4A is disposed substantially at the center of the display panel 4 so that the player can visually recognize it. Other than the result of the hit lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting opening 33, various images related to the game, for example identification symbol for effect, effect image in normal game state, effect in big hit game state An image, an effect image for demonstration display, and the like are displayed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is configured to perform the fluctuation display of the identification information on condition that the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c and the lamp / LED 27 constitute an effect execution means. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, these effect execution means are also used as notification means.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 6, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW”, and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 which is a read only memory, a main RAM 63 which is a read / write memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. Is equipped. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

  The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processing in accordance with the program stored in the main ROM 62. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 determines the specific gaming state transition determining means (the first specific gaming state transition determining means and the second specific gaming state transition determining means), the specific gaming state control means, and the special gaming state control means , And a round game execution means (a first round game execution means and a second round game execution means) are realized.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first start opening switch 320 disposed behind the first start opening 32. When the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second start port switch 330 disposed behind the second start port 33. When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

  The first start opening switch 320 and the second start opening switch 330 are determined to have won when the game ball has entered the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33, and thus the predetermined detection signal is set. It supplies the main control circuit 60.

  A pass gate switch 350 disposed behind the pass gate 35 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 350, it is determined that the game ball has won in the passage gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display section 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display portion 51, an effect image is displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to make the player know that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning. You may

  The passage gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 noting that winning is achieved when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed the passage gate 35. Thus, the passing gate switch 350 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33.

  In the main control circuit 60, a general winning opening left switch 400A disposed behind the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C located on the left and right sides of the game board 1, and a general winning located behind the general winning opening 40D. The mouth right switch 400B is connected. When the game balls are detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, the payout device 83 performs a predetermined number of winning balls.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first large winning opening count switch 360 disposed at the back of the first large winning opening 36. The first large winning opening count switch 360 is for counting the number of winnings of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening 36. When the winning of the gaming ball is detected by the first large winning opening count switch 360, the payout device 83 sets the number of gaming balls set in advance as the winning ball to the upper tray 17 or lower through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21. Pay out on the plate 18.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second large winning opening count switch 370 disposed at the back of the second large winning opening 37. The second large winning opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the second large winning opening 37. When the winning of the gaming ball is detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370, the payout device 83 sets the number of gaming balls set in advance as the winning ball to the upper tray 17 through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21. Alternatively, the bottom plate 18 is paid out.

  When the gaming ball passes through the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37, the first large winning opening count switch 360 and the second large winning opening count switch 370 mainly control predetermined detection signals. The circuit 60 is supplied.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a specific area switch 380A and a non-specific area switch 380B disposed in the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 on the assumption that the V winning is achieved when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state. The non-specific area switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 on the assumption that the non-V prize is won when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed through the non-specific area 38B in the big hit gaming state.

  The main control circuit 60 drives a first large winning opening shutter 36A that opens and closes the first large winning opening 36, and a second large winning opening shutter opens and closes the second large winning opening 37. It exclusively controls the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A which drives 37A. As a result, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is driven to change to an open state in which the game ball can be won to the first large winning hole 36 and a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. In the situation where the first large winning opening 36 is at least in the closed state, the second large winning opening shutter 37A is in the open state where the game ball can be won to the second large winning opening 37 and the winning of the gaming ball Is driven to change into an impossible or difficult closed state. The opening driving of the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 by the first large winning opening shutter 36A and the second large winning opening shutter 37A is the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display. It is performed when the special symbol in the part 54 becomes a specific stop display mode and is shifted to the big hit gaming state.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. Thereby, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the predetermined light emission mode in the normal symbol display portion 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and the gaming ball is put in the second starting opening 33 It becomes easy.

  For example, in the normal symbol game of this embodiment, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the gaming state which is not the short time gaming state (in the present embodiment "non-probability change / non-short time gaming state") is 0 (for example, lottery) (Non-winning is decided), and the wing member 34 is not opened. On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving gaming state) is, for example, 1/1 (for example, the winning is determined without being drawn), and when it is won, the wing member 34 is 1 .3 seconds, opened three times.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific area 38A. Thereby, when the round game to be described later is being executed in the big hit gaming state, the displacement member 39 is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is in the closed state even in the big hit gaming state, the game ball can not pass through the specific area 38A or becomes difficult, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area 38B.

  When the first starting opening switch 320 detects a game ball when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying the first special symbol hold display unit 55 variably, the first special symbol hold display unit 55 1) The first special symbol based on winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 The number of executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol is held, that is, the number of held according to the first special symbol. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended as the number of reservations according to the first special symbol is started.

  The second special symbol hold display unit 56 is a second special start symbol switch unit 330 when the game ball is detected while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is fluctuatingly displayed. 1 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being variably displayed in the special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 is stopped and displayed, the second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 33 The number of executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol is put on hold, that is, the held number relating to the second special symbol. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been suspended as the number of reservations according to the second special symbol is started.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set such that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, according to the winning order to the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, the corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol may be variably displayed according to the winning order.

  In addition, the upper limit is set to the number of reservations for which the execution of the variable display of the special symbol is held, as described above, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 controls the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 The number of pending displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the game ball is won and the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 and the second starting opening switch 330, up to 4 each. (Ie, the number of times of detection is 4), and the fifth and subsequent ones are not stored as the number of reservations. Under the present circumstances, when the number of reservations reduces by completion | finish of the fluctuation display of a special symbol, the number of reservations is again added by making four pieces into an upper limit.

  When the number of pending first special symbol games in the first special symbol display unit 53 is held, for example, up to four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol display unit 53 in change is the first of the main RAM 63 1 Special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as start storage, and thereafter, information on special symbol games for which the number of reservations is 4 is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63 It is sequentially stored as starting memory.

  Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of pending second special symbol games is held, for example, up to four, the second corresponding to the second special symbol display unit 54 being changed 2 Special symbol game information is stored as starting storage in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game for the number of pending four is the second of the main RAM 63 2 Special symbols start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start storage.

  Therefore, the maximum number of pending game balls pertaining to the special symbol game associated with winning in the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33 is a maximum of eight in total, and the first special symbol hold display portion 54 and the second special symbol The number of pending display by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the pending display unit 55 is also four.

  In the open state of the first large winning opening 36 by the first large winning opening shutter 36A, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the first large winning opening count switch 360 becomes a predetermined number (for example, nine winning numbers) It is maintained until one of the conditions is met, such as passing a predetermined opening time described later. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first large winning opening shutter 36A elapses, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is driven to close the first large winning opening 36. Be done.

  Similarly, in the open state of the second large winning opening 37 by the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the second large winning opening count switch 370 is a predetermined number (for example, nine winning numbers). Or one of the conditions such as passing a predetermined opening time described later is maintained. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second large winning opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the second large winning opening shutter 37A is driven to close the second large winning opening 37 Be done.

  In the big hit gaming state, the open state and the closed state of the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are repeated based on a preset large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit game state, the game in which the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are opened and closed for a predetermined number of times including a plurality of times based on a large winning opening opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) described later Is called "round game (round game)". A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. After the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37 is closed in one round game, the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37 is opened as the next round game. The state of up to is also referred to as "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval" or simply "interval". In one round game, each of the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 may be in the open state and the closed state for a plurality of times. Further, in one round game, the open / close state of the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 is exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big winning opening is continuously closed.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment does not have a so-called small hit gaming state as a gaming state having a property different from the big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state may be provided. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and for example, the second big winning opening 37 is defined as being opened only once. However, in the case of providing a small hit gaming state, it may be controlled so that an arbitrary or specific large winning opening is repeatedly opened several times. Further, the gaming state after the end of the small hitting gaming state may be shifted to a gaming state different from the gaming state before shifting to the small hitting gaming state, and the gaming state before shifting to the small hitting gaming state It is also possible to return to

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of rounds) like one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including the drawings to be referred to in connection with the description), with regard to the numbered “round” such as one round or the first round, for example, simply “R” as in 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc. In addition, in one round game, before the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37 is opened a predetermined number of times, the upper limit number of winnings per round If it reaches, the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 will be closed, and the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 will not be opened for the remaining number of times of opening , The round game is ended.

  Further, in a specific round game in which the second large winning opening 37 is in the open state in the big hit gaming state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) described later. As a result, the specific area 38A is in the open state and the closed state in the specific round game in the big hit gaming state. That is, in the specific round game, the game ball may pass the specific area 38A and become a V prize, while in the round games other than the specific round game, the game ball temporarily wins the second big winning opening 37 Even if it is, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A. In other words, the type of big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) is a big hit gaming state (first specific gaming state) including a specific round game and a big hit gaming state not including a specific round game (second specific gaming state) There is.

  In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image associated with the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, in the variable display of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the display region 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is made of numerals except in a specific case. Symbols (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as “0”, “1”, “2”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  In addition, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is a specific stop display mode, the player is made to grasp that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4 A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Specifically, a special symbol is displayed on one of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to a "big hit" that can be obtained by many balls. When the stop display is performed, the combination of the decorative symbols for effect displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 has a specific display mode (for example, a state in which all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows The display image for the big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4).

  The main CPU 61 included in such a main control circuit 60 is placed in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, on the condition that the game medium has passed through the first start area (the first start opening 32). It functions as a first specified game state transition determining unit that determines whether to shift. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, on the condition that the game medium has passed through the second start area (the second start opening 33) It functions as a second specified gaming state transition determination means.

  Further, the main CPU 61 controls the gaming state to the specific gaming state on the condition that the first or second specific gaming state transition judging means obtains the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state. Act as.

  Further, the main CPU 61 determines that the specific gaming state transition determining unit causes the specific gaming state transition determination unit to shift to the specific gaming state after the specific gaming state ends on the condition that the game medium has passed the specific area 38A in the specific gaming state. Functions as special gaming state control means for controlling the special gaming state (probable variation gaming state) which is relatively easy to be obtained.

  In addition, the main CPU 61 changes the first variable winning device (first large winning opening shutter 36A) to the first mode (opened state) and the second mode (closed state) in the specific gaming state, the first round game (round) It functions as a first round game execution means that executes the game a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61 functioning as the first round game executing means can perform control to change the first variable winning device between the first mode and the second mode during the execution of at least one first round game.

  In addition, the main CPU 61 changes the second variable winning device (second large winning opening shutter 37A) to the first mode (opened state) and the second mode (closed state) in the specific gaming state, a second round game (round) It functions as a second round game execution means that executes the game a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61 functioning as a second round game executing means is a specific round game aspect in which passing of the second variable winning device to the specific area 38A is relatively easy during execution of at least one second round game. It is possible to perform a specific second round game in which control is performed to change the first aspect and the second aspect. Also, during the execution of at least one other round game, the second variable winning device is changed to the first aspect and the second aspect in a predetermined round game mode in which passage of game media to the specific area 38A is relatively difficult. It is also possible to control.

  In the jackpot gaming state, after a first specific number of first round games have been executed by the first round game execution means, at least one specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means. (1) A specific gaming state, and a second specific gaming state in which a specific second round game is not executed by the second round gaming execution means after the first specific number of first round games have been executed by the first round gaming execution means, The first round game executing means executes a second specified number of first round games more than the first specified number of times, and then the second round game executing means executes at least one specified second round game. After the specific game state and the first round game execution means execute the second specific number of first round games, the second round game execution means performs Realizes a specific game state including a fourth specific game state the round game is not executed, the.

  A specific example of control of the main CPU 61 for realizing each of the above-described means will be described later.

  The main ROM 62 stores programs for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes, which will be described later, including various functions of the main CPU 61 described above, and various tables.

  The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another readable and writable storage medium can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

  The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

  The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

  The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub control circuit 70.

  The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by supplying power to the main RAM 63 promptly when the power is disconnected.

  The various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, a second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, a wing member solenoid 340, a displacement member solenoid 390, and an external terminal board 80. .

  The external terminal board 80 is connected to an external device such as a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of big hits, or a hall computer 100 managing a plurality of pachinko machines installed in the hall. Is for data communication.

  Various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start opening switch 320, a second start opening switch 330, a passing gate switch 350, a first large winning opening count switch 360, and a second large winning opening count switch 370. , A specific area switch 380A, a non-specific area switch 380B, a general winning opening left switch 400A, a general winning opening right switch 400B, and a backup clear switch 81.

  The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and the payout / firing control circuit 82 described later at the time of power interruption or the like according to the operation of the hole manager.

  Further, the main control circuit 60 is connected with the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 via the payout / firing control circuit 82.

  The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / emission control circuit 82. The dispensing and firing control circuit 82 mainly controls the launching device 26 and the dispensing device 83, and the launching device 26, the dispensing device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the payout / firing control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize a game value giving unit.

  The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of gaming balls in accordance with the operation of a player, and can transmit and receive signals with the ball lending operation panel 85. .

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and a rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. Causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. The payout device 83, for example, pays out three game balls as the number of winning balls per one winning opening to the first starting opening 32, and one gaming ball as the number of winning balls per one winning opening to the second starting opening 33. , And pays out 10 game balls as the number of prize balls per winning to the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, per 1 winning to the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37 Pay out 14 game balls as the number of winning balls.

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 is a solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the player handles the firing handle 26b of the launching device 26 and rotates the device in the clockwise direction. Power is supplied to the game area 1p, and control is made to shoot the game ball toward the game area 1p.

  The main CPU 61 interrupts the main processing and executes timer interrupt processing as interrupt processing even during execution of main processing described later. The timer interrupt process is executed triggered by an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured to be supplied with a command from the main control circuit 60.

  The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and the sub CPU 71, program ROM 72, work RAM 73, command input port 74, backup capacitor 75, display control A circuit 76, an audio control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect apparatus control circuit 79 are included. The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. The voice control circuit 77 is connected to the speakers 10 a, 10 b and 10 c. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is a motor (motor 110A, motor 166) for driving the upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B, a motor for driving the left movable effect member 271 and the right movable effect member 272 (motor 276 , A motor 281) and a mechanism etc. are connected.

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the push operation button switch 90A provided to the push operation button 9A and to the jog dial switch 90B provided to the jog dial 9B. The pressing operation button switch 90A is for detecting the operation of the pressing operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B is for identifying the rotation direction and the rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub control circuit 70 is supplied with a pressing operation signal from the pressing operation button switch 90A, and is supplied with a rotation operation signal from the jog dial switch 90B.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with the program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display means, and the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c function as music output means. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 implements display control means, advance notification means, scheduled amount determination means, notification quantity change means, and effect pattern selection means. The program ROM 72 and word RAM 73 implement storage means. The effect pattern selection means includes music pattern selection means.

  The liquid crystal display device 4 displays a round number notification image (for example, an icon indicating the number of rounds) at least a part of the number of times of execution of the round game executed by the first round game execution means and the second round game execution means in the specific gaming state. Functions as a display means that can be displayed. The sub CPU 71 and the program ROM 72 function as display control means for controlling the display means (liquid crystal display device 4).

  In the sub CPU 71, a predetermined special game state (a round game for changing the first large winning opening 36 to the opening mode and the closing mode is executed a plurality of times by the specific game state transition determining means, and the second large winning port 37 is opened. The specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means on condition that it is decided to shift to the big hit gaming state in which the round game fluctuating to the aspect and the closing aspect is executed at least once. Before, it functions as advance notification means capable of executing advance notification to notify that the specific second round game is to be executed. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit capable of displaying a round number notification image based on the execution timing of the prior notification by the prior notification unit.

  The sub CPU 71 is, in the specific gaming state, the number of substantial round games (round games in which winning to the first large winning opening 36 is facilitated) executed by the first round gaming execution means (main CPU 61), and the substantial rounds Accepted upper limit number (upper limit number of winnings) of gaming media to the first variable winning device (the first large winning opening 36) defined for one game number of times, and accepting gaming media to the first variable winning device It is executed by the second round game execution means (main CPU 61) and the number of award (the number of award balls) of the game value (game ball) given by the game value giving means (payout device 83) per number (winning number) The second variable winning device (the second variable winning device) defined for the number of times of the substantially round game (round game where winning to the second large winning opening 37 is facilitated) and the number of times of the substantially round game The upper limit number of accepted gaming media to the large winning opening 37) (upper limit number of winnings), and the number of awarding of gaming value given by the gaming value giving means per one accepted number of gaming media to the second variable winning device, Function as a means for determining a planned granted quantity based on the above.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a notifying means capable of notifying a part of the planned provided quantities determined by the planned provided quantity determining means, and the sub CPU 71 plans the quantity notified by the notifying means. It functions as an informing amount changing means which can be changed within the range of the scheduled amount to be determined determined by the amount determining means.

  The sub CPU 71 functions as an effect pattern selection means capable of selecting an effect pattern according to the type of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c and the lamp / LED 27 produce effects Based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selection means, it functions as effect execution means capable of executing effects in the specific gaming state.

  The sub CPU 71 selects a plurality of music patterns (for example, music pattern A (success), music pattern A (reverse), music pattern A (failure), music pattern B (success), music pattern in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) It functions as a music pattern selection means for selecting a music pattern from B (reverse), music pattern B (failure) and music pattern C (confirmed), and the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c are selected by the music pattern selection means It functions as music output means for outputting a music according to the music pattern in the special game state.

  The sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute an item prefetch effect (item effect) to be described later, determines the content of the effect in the item prefetch effect (item effect), and controls the progress of the item prefetch effect (item effect) The effect control means functions as an item advance notice determination means for determining whether or not to perform advance notice effect described later, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 Functions as an item effect execution means for executing advance notification effects.

  The sub CPU 71 functions as a story effect control means for controlling the progression of a series of story effects and related story effects described later, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 perform a series of story effects and It functions as a story effect execution means for executing related story effects.

  A specific example of control of the sub CPU 71 that implements each of the above-described means will be described later.

  The program ROM 72 stores programs for controlling the various effects mainly by the sub CPU 71 and various tables.

  The work RAM 73 stores various data (flag, counter, timer, value of variable, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

  The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60, and transmits the various commands to the sub CPU 71.

  The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by supplying power to the work RAM 73 promptly when the power is disconnected.

  The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to data supplied from the sub CPU 71, and, for example, an image data processor (VDP) and various image data are generated. It comprises an image data ROM in which data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and a D / A converter for converting image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores, in the frame buffer, image data to be displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative symbol image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

  The display control circuit 76 also supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an image is displayed based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The sound control circuit 77 is for controlling the sounds (voice, music, etc.) output from the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c, and for example, a sound source IC for controlling the sound and sound data for storing various sound data. The ROM includes an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying a sound signal. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is also merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and one of a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM according to a sound generation instruction supplied from the sub CPU 71. Sound data can be selected.

  Further, the sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal and causes the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c to output sound.

  The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamp / LED 27 including a decoration lamp and the like, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, and a decoration data ROM etc. in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored. It consists of The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is also merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, in the big hit gaming state, the movable effect device control circuit 79 waits the upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B in standby positions (for example, by operating the pressing operation button 9A during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9). The rendering operation such as moving to the movable position (see FIGS. 19 and 48) and the like is controlled.

[Playing state and effect mode of the gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the gaming state and effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a normal mode, a time saving mode, and an ST mode are implemented as effect modes in the normal gaming state. In the time saving mode, there are relatively many time saving modes such as the short mode which impresses that the time saving mode becomes the relatively small number of games (the number of times the special symbol changes, ie, the number of games of the special symbol game) as effects. There is a long mode to impress that it will be the number of games. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the live bonus, the story bonus, and the battle bonus, the second special symbol hit, the SP bonus, which is in the first special symbol hit, as the effect mode in the big hit gaming state. Has been implemented.

  The normal mode is an effect mode of non-deterministic change and non-short time game state. The normal mode is an effect mode which is to stay when the time saving mode, the ST mode, the first special symbol, or the second special symbol is not present. For example, in the time saving mode, when the special symbol game of 4 times (short mode) or 100 times (long mode) is digested, the mode shifts from the time saving mode to the normal mode. In addition, when the special symbol game of 180 times (prescribed number of times) is consumed in the ST mode, the ST mode is shifted to the normal mode. Further, in the normal mode, when the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol described above, the live bonus, the story bonus being in the middle of the first special symbol. Or shift to battle bonus. In the normal mode, when the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the above-mentioned start memory information of the second special symbol, the SP special bonus is being hit per the second special symbol. May migrate.

  Moreover, as a combination aspect of the decorative symbol in the normal mode, the combination aspect of any of “1” to “7” will be stopped and displayed, but if it is displayed as a combination aspect of “7” If it is determined that the jackpot symbol corresponding to "the 1st variation" to "the 2nd variation" of the first special symbol is displayed as the combination mode of the "3", the "1st variation" of the first special symbol is displayed. If the degree of expectation corresponding to the jackpot symbol corresponding to “probable variation 6” is high and stopped and displayed as a combination mode of “2”, “4”, or “6”, “probability variation 1 for the first special symbol” "--The probability of being a big hit design corresponding to" probability 6 "is low. In addition, when it is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of “1” or “5”, the degree of expectation that is a big hit symbol corresponding to “certain variation 1” to “certain variation 6” of the first special symbol is “2” , "4", or "6" is higher than when displayed as a stop, and lower than when "3" is displayed as a stop. However, as a combination aspect of the decorative symbol in the normal mode, the combination aspect excluding the combination aspect of “7” may be stopped and displayed. As described above, when transitioning to the SP bonus, which is in the middle of the second special symbol from the normal mode, the combination pattern of "7" is stopped and displayed as the combination pattern of the decorative symbol, and the second special symbol is displayed. It is decided that it is a jackpot symbol corresponding to "probability 1".

  The normal stage and the special stage in the normal mode are effect stages that are elements determining the presentation mode in the non-deterministic and non-short time game state, that the result of the big hit determination is a predetermined result, and the special symbol game is a predetermined number of times When the transition conditions such as digestion or passage of a predetermined predetermined time are satisfied, they mutually shift. In the normal stage and the special stage, the decorative symbol image data, the background image data, the frequency of the effect, the appearance rate of the specific effect, and the like can be made different. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player playing the game in the normal mode.

  The time saving mode is an effect mode of non-deterministic change and time saving gaming state. In the normal game mode, when the big hit symbol corresponding to "1st to 1st" to "1st to 5th" of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal game mode, the "short to 1" to "short 5" corresponds to the big hit symbol. It is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. For example, after the end of the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbols of "time saving 1" and "time saving 5", 100 bonus games are basically given as the number of times until 100 special symbol games are digested. It will be continued. In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol of "time saving 2" to "time saving 4", by being granted four times as the number of games, basically until four special symbol games are digested It will be continued. In addition, even when the big hit symbol corresponding to the "special variation 1" to "the definite variation 6" of the first special symbol or the "special variation 1" of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is finally regarded as the non-V prize When it becomes, the mode shifts to the 100 time saving mode as in the case of "time saving 1" and "time saving 5". As described above, the time saving mode is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, when the non-V prize is finally reached in the big hit gaming state.

  In the time saving mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the combination mode of "7", the effect mode is shifted to the SP bonus which is in the middle of the second special symbol. In the time saving mode, the combination pattern of the decorative symbol "7" is a jackpot symbol corresponding to the "special variation 1" of the second special symbol. However, in the time saving mode, as the big hit symbol corresponding to the "special variation 1" of the second special symbol, the decoration symbol may be stopped and displayed in combination with "1" to "6". Further, in the time saving mode, when the special symbol game given as the number of times of the game is digested without being stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In the short time mode, when the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol described above, a bonus other than the SP bonus (during the first special symbol winning There may be transition to a live bonus, a story bonus, or a battle bonus). In this case, the combination pattern other than "7" is stopped and displayed as the combination pattern of the decorative symbol, and the big hit symbol corresponding to "probable variation 1" to "probable variation 6" or "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" of the first special symbol. Is shown.

  The short mode in the time saving mode is executed as an effect mode that gives an impression when the number of games to be awarded is four, and even when the number of games is 100, it is up to the fourth which is the beginning To be performed. The long mode in the time saving mode is executed as an effect mode that gives an impression when the number of games to be given is 100 times, and for example, the short mode when the number of games becomes 4 or more from the start of the time saving mode. It may be performed with the presentation aspect which impresses promotion from.

  The ST mode is a production mode with a definite change and a short time gaming state, and is executed in conjunction with the transition of the gaming state to the positive change gaming state (ST gaming state) after the end of the big hit gaming state that finally became V prize winning. It is The ST mode is continued until the special symbol game of 180 times is basically absorbed by being given 180 times as the number of games, for example.

In the ST mode, also when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "7", the transition to the SP bonus, which is in the middle of the second special symbol, as in the case of the time saving mode. However, even in the ST mode, as a big hit symbol corresponding to the “special variation 1” of the second special symbol, the decoration symbol may stop displaying the combination mode of “1” to “6”, and the time saving mode and the ST mode The combination pattern of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed may be made different. For example, in one mode, the combination pattern of the decorative symbol "7" corresponds to the big hit symbol corresponding to the "special variation 1" of the second special symbol, and in the other mode, the decorative symbol is "1". The combination mode of “7” may be made to correspond to the big hit symbol corresponding to “the first variation” of the second special symbol. In addition, also in the ST mode, when the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol described above, a bonus other than the SP bonus (per first special symbol) There may be transition to a live bonus, a story bonus, or a battle bonus). In this case, the combination pattern other than "7" is stopped and displayed as the combination pattern of the decorative symbol, and the big hit symbol corresponding to "probable variation 1" to "probable variation 6" or "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" of the first special symbol. Is shown.

  The story section in ST mode is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state when it is finally V prize winning in the big hit gaming state, basically 51 special symbol games are digested Continue until In this story section, a series of story effects is performed over a total of 10 sets, with the number of games being set as one set. In addition, at the beginning of the series of story effects to be executed, which is the remaining number of times of the game, one time is used to execute an effect (for example, a title display or the like) when the series of stories is introduced. The series of story effects performed in the story section is such that the story progresses in the 50 games, and the story progresses each time it is executed in the series of story effect units. A series of story effects are advanced by the jackpot gaming state being so-called "series" in ST mode.

  The battle reach section in ST mode is executed after the end of the story section in ST mode, and basically continues until the end of ST mode. In this battle reach section, an effect of displaying a battle scene of one character (for example, an allied character) and another character (for example, an enemy character) is executed, and it is determined to perform reach as the effect content The result of the jackpot determination is notified by executing the battle effect between the one character and the other character and displaying the outcome. In this battle reach section, when it is determined to perform reach as the effect content, the battle effect will be performed regardless of the result (big hit) of the big hit judgment, but in the above-mentioned story section, the effect content Even if it is decided to perform the reach, if the result of the big hit judgment is a loss, the progress of the story is prioritized, and no particular notification is made. As described above, in the ST mode, by providing the story section and the battle reach section, different notification is performed, and the interest of the player's game is improved.

  The variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) to be referred to may be different between the story section in the ST mode and the battle reach section. That is, in the ST mode (ST gaming state), the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined with different selection probability depending on the effect mode (story section and battle reach section). Specifically, in the story section in ST mode, a variation pattern (for example, shortening variation) associated with a short variation time (for example, 2s) has a high probability such that the progression of a series of story effects is prioritized The variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) selected in is referred to, and in the battle reach section in ST mode, a variation pattern (for example, normal) associated with a relatively long variation time (for example, 6s) A variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) may be referred to in which variation) is selected with high probability. In addition, in the story section of ST mode, a variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) in which selection probabilities of variation patterns are different according to the number of times the special symbol game is executed may be referred to. In the reach section, a variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) may be referred to, in which the selection probability of the variation pattern differs according to the number of times the special symbol game is executed.

  The live bonus in the first special symbol is the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, the hit pattern 1 and 2 (substantially 9R), the hit pattern 3 (substantially 5R), the hit pattern 7 (substantially 8R), and the hit pattern 8 It is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with the jackpot gaming state corresponding to (substantially 4R), and is executed as an effect mode that impresses these jackpot gaming states. In this live bonus, a predetermined song (one of the song patterns A to C) corresponding to the type of a more detailed hit pattern (for example, hit patterns 1-1 to 46) is selected, and the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are selected. It is output. Further, in conjunction with the output of the selected predetermined music, an effect by the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 4 and an effect by the light emission mode of the lamp / LED 27 are executed. In the live bonus, when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is the hit pattern 1 to 3 at the end of the effect mode, it is informed that the specific second round game will be executed, and the hit pattern 7 Or, in the case of 8, it is informed that the specific second round game is not executed.

  During the first special symbol shows that it is a big hit gaming state according to the first special symbol, depending on the type of hit pattern (big hit symbol), live bonus, story bonus, and battle bonus production mode There is. During the first special symbol is executed when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal mode. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. 49, when the big hit symbol of a 1st special symbol is stop-displayed in time saving mode or ST mode, it is performed. After the end of the first special symbol hit, if it is V winning in the big hit gaming state, it shifts to ST mode, and if it is non V winning, it shifts to the time saving mode.

  The story bonus during the first special symbol is executed in conjunction with the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol corresponds to the hit pattern 4 (substantially 5R) and the hit pattern 9 (substantially 4R) It is an effect mode that is executed as an effect mode that impresses these jackpot gaming states. In this story bonus, a predetermined story effect corresponding to the type of hit pattern (a story effect relating to a series of story effects executed in the above-described story section, or an unrelated story effect) may be used. Is selected and executed by the effect executing means. In addition, in the story bonus, when the big hit symbol of the 1st special symbol is hitting pattern 4 in the final stage of the production feature, it is informed that specific second round game is executed, it is hitting pattern 9 In this case, it is informed that the specific second round game is not executed.

  The battle bonus during the first special symbol is the jackpot game condition in which the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol corresponds to the hit patterns 5 and 6 (substantially 5R) and the hit patterns 10 and 11 (substantially 0R). It is an effect mode executed as an effect mode that is interlocked and executed to impress these big hit gaming states. In this battle bonus, a predetermined battle effect (a battle effect relating to the battle effect performed in the above-described battle reach section, or an unrelated battle effect) may be generated according to the type of hit pattern. It is selected and executed by the effect executing means. In the battle bonus, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is the hit pattern 5 or 6 in the middle of the effect mode, the specific second round game is executed and the first round game is executed. It is notified that the game is to be performed, and in the case of the hit pattern 10 or 11, it is informed that the specific second round game and the first round game are not executed.

  During the second special symbol shows that it is a big hit gaming state according to the second special symbol, the type of hit pattern (big hit symbol) (in this embodiment, it is one of the hit pattern 12 According to the present invention, there is an effect mode of SP bonus. During the second special symbol is executed when the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving mode or ST mode. In addition, as described above, it may also be executed when the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal mode. After the end of the second special symbol hit, basically, since V winning is easy in all the big hit gaming state, it shifts to ST mode. Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 49, if it is a non-V prize in the big hit gaming state, it shifts to the time saving mode.

  The SP bonus in the second special symbol is executed in conjunction with the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol corresponds to the hit pattern 12 (substantially 16R), and this jackpot gaming state is impressed It is an effect mode executed as an effect mode. In this SP bonus, a specific second round game is basically executed, and it is informed that the first round game is executed the largest number of times as compared with other big hit gaming states. In addition, in the SP bonus, when the second special symbol is hit in the time saving mode, the effect mode for impressing the promotion from the time saving mode to the ST mode is executed, and the winning pattern for SP bonus is determined, and the ST mode If it becomes the second special symbol hit in the story section of, the effect pattern per related story for SP bonus is determined in which the effect mode that impresses "Ranso" in ST mode is determined, and the battle reach section in ST mode In the event that the second special symbol has been hit, an effect pattern per battle for SP bonus is determined in which an effect mode that impresses a big hit in ST mode is executed.

  In addition, even if it is a case where illustration and explanation are not carried out between each production mode, it shall be possible to shift with transition of a game state etc., and it is not limited to the range illustrated and described.

[Specs of gaming machines]
Next, specifications regarding the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting a special symbol is 1 / 297.89 (220/65536) at a low probability (non-probability changing gaming state), at a high probability (probable changing gaming state ) Is 1 / 122.96 (533/65536). The first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in order of priority given to the lottery with the second special symbol. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), the ST gaming status in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 180 times as the number of games (number of times of variation of special symbol) is implemented.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the big hit symbol "probable variation 1" of the first special symbol, the big winning opening opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) becomes the hit pattern 1, and the number of rounds of round game is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds easy to win for the winning prize 9R) is given, and a live bonus is executed as the effect mode of the big hit gaming state, and it is "live bonus 9R success" as the effect content. The probability (rush rate) to be “certainly variable 1” as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 46/200 (hit patterns 1-1 to 46).

The first special symbol of the big hit design "probable variation 2", the hit pattern 2 will be given the number of rounds 16R (of which the actual number of rounds 9R) is granted, live bonus is executed as the production mode, live bonus 9R as the production content It is "successful". The rush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 2" of the first special symbol is set to 1/200.
The first special symbol of the big hit design "probable variation 3" is hit pattern 3 and is given the number of rounds 16R (of which the actual number of rounds 5R) is given, the live bonus is executed as the effect mode, and the content of the effect is "live bonus 5R It is "successful". The rush rate of the big hit symbol "probability 3" of the first special symbol is set to 18/200 (hit patterns 3-1 to 18).

  The first special symbol of the big hit design "probable variation 4", the hit pattern 4 will be given the number of rounds 16R (of which the actual number of rounds 5R) is given, the story bonus is executed as a production mode, the content of the story "story bonus 5R It is "successful". The rush rate of the big hit symbol "probability 4" of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (hit patterns 4-1 to 17).

  The first special symbol of the big hit symbol "probable variation 5" is the hit pattern 5 and is given the number of rounds 16R (of which the actual number of rounds 5R) is given, the battle bonus is executed as the effect mode, and the effect content is "battle bonus 5R It is "successful". The rush rate of the big hit symbol "probability 5" of the first special symbol is set to 20/200 (hit pattern 5-1 to 20).

  The first special symbol of the big hit design "probable variation 6", the hit pattern 6 will be, the number of rounds 16R (of which the actual number of rounds 5R) will be granted, the battle bonus will be executed as the production mode, as the content of the production It is "successful". The rush rate of the big hit symbol "probability 6" of the first special symbol is set to 2/200 (hit patterns 6-1, 2).

  The first special symbol of the big hit symbol "time-shortening 1" is hit pattern 7 and the round number 16R (of which the actual round number 8R) is given, the live bonus is executed as the effect mode, the effect content is "live bonus 8R It is a failure. The rush rate of the big hit symbol "time reduction 1" of the first special symbol is set to 16/200 (hit patterns 7-1 to 16).

  The first special symbol of the big hit symbol "time 2" is hit pattern 8 and is given the number of rounds 16R (of which the actual number of rounds 4R) is given, a live bonus is executed as the effect mode, and the content of the effect is "live bonus 4R It is a failure. The rush rate of the big hit symbol "time reduction 2" of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (hit patterns 8 to 17).

  In the big hit symbol "time 3" of the first special symbol, it becomes hit pattern 9, and the number of rounds 16R (of which the actual number of rounds 4R) is given, the story bonus is executed as the effect mode, and the effect content is "story bonus 4R It is a failure. The rush rate of the big hit symbol "time 3" of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (hit patterns 9 to 17).

  The first special symbol of the big hit "time 4" or "time 5", the hit pattern 10 or 11 is given, the number of rounds 16R (of which the actual number of rounds 0R) is given, the battle bonus is executed as the effect mode, the effect The contents are "Battle bonus 0R failure". The rush rate of the big hit symbol "time 4" or "time 5" of the first special symbol is set to 23/200 (hit pattern 10-1-23 or hit pattern 11-1-23).

  The second special symbol big hit symbol "probable variation 1", the hit pattern 12 will be round number 16R (of which the actual number of rounds 16R) is given, SP bonus is executed as the effect mode, as the effect content "SP bonus 16R It is ". The rush rate of the big hit symbol "probability 1" of the second special symbol is set to 1/1 (that is, 100%).

  The special winning opening count number is set to count up to nine in each of the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 as the upper limit winning number per round. Time-saving performance (specification of time-saving gaming state) is set so that the time-saving gaming state continues up to 100 times or 4 times during high probability (while in probability variation gaming state) or in non probability variation gaming state . The number of winning balls is three per one winning opening to the first starting opening 32, one per winning combination to the second starting opening 33, and one winning to the general winning opening 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D. There are 10 per hit, and 14 per winning to the large winning opening (the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37) are set.

  The hit probability of a normal symbol is set to 0 at low probability and 1/1 at high probability. The number of symbols per hit is set to one.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening in one round will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 51, a plurality of opening and closing patterns A to C are defined as the opening and closing pattern (one round opening and closing pattern) of one round in the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37. The first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are simply referred to as a large winning opening unless it is necessary to distinguish them. The open / close patterns A to C shown in FIG. 51 are merely an example, and a specific time or the like defining the open / close pattern may be other than illustrated.

  The open / close pattern A is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues over 27.222 s. The open / close pattern A is defined as a round section from the time when it is first opened to the time when it is finally closed. The round section is defined as the time from the first opening to the final closing as in the other opening and closing patterns as well. In the section where the open state is 27.222 s, the open state of the special winning opening is relatively long open. That is, in the opening and closing pattern A, long opening is generated once, and the total opening time of the opening and closing pattern A is 27.222 s.

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the closed state is 2.898 s after the open state is initially 0.102 s, and then the open state continues over 27.222 s. In the section where the open state is 0.102 s, the open state of the special winning opening is a relatively short open state. That is, in the open / close pattern B, after the short open has occurred once, the open state is generated once through the closed state, and the total open time of the open / close pattern B is 27.324 s. It should be noted that in the open state where the short opening is made, winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening becomes extremely difficult, while in the open state where the long opening is coming, winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening is sufficiently possible and facilitated ing. Such short circuit opening is the same as in the opening and closing pattern C described later.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern in which the open state is only for 0.102 s. That is, the opening and closing pattern C is such that short circuit opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening and closing pattern C is 0.102 s.

  As described above, the substantial round game in the big hit gaming state corresponds to the round game when the opening and closing control is performed based on the opening and closing pattern A or B described above. And the round game at the time of opening and closing control based on the opening and closing pattern C is a non-substantially round game that does not correspond to a substantially round game.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, an operation pattern of the displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A will be described.

  The displacing member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open / close state of the second big winning opening 37. As shown in FIG. 52, the actuation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member actuation pattern) basically closes the specific region 38A after the first 0.102 s operation period in which the specific region 38A is in the open state. There are 2.898 s of non-operating periods, and then it is defined as an operating pattern that continues up to a maximum of 29.222 s. The total actuation time of the displacement member actuation pattern is 32.222s. Since the open state of the specific area 38A becomes relatively short in the operation period of 0.102s, the V winning to the specific area 38A becomes extremely difficult. On the other hand, since the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively long, the V winning to the specific area 38A is relatively easy because the operating period which is 29.222s at the longest is relatively long. In addition, about the operation period which becomes the longest 29.222 s, in the 1 round when the 2nd big winning opening 37 is opened and closed, for example, the 2nd winning opening 37 is closed by the large winning opening count number reaching the upper limit winning number When the predetermined monitoring processing time for residual balls, which will be described later, is passed, the displacement member 39 is inactivated and the specific area 38A is closed even before the maximum defined length of 29.222s has elapsed. Can be

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 53, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 12 are defined as the special winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). Hit patterns 1 and 2 occur during a live bonus (live bonus 9R success), and the number of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “prescribed round number”) defined for the rounds that are generally in an open state is 16R, and the winning prize slot It is a hit pattern that is defined as 9R the actual number of rounds that can be won. In addition, the interval between rounds is a section where the big winning opening is closed until the big winning opening is first opened in the next round after the big winning opening is finally closed in one round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as a pattern of the interval between rounds, an interval pattern a in which the time (closing time) to be in the closed state is 1200 ms and an interval pattern b in which the time is 102 ms are defined. In hit patterns 1 and 2, the interval between all rounds is interval pattern b, and the second large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern B at 10 R and the first large opening 36 opens and closes at 1 R to 8 R It is defined to be pattern A. That is, the hit patterns 1 and 2 have the substantial round numbers of 1R to 8R and 9R of 10R, and only the 10R is executed as a round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern that occurs on a live bonus (live bonus 5R success) and in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 5R. In hit pattern 3, the interval between all rounds is interval pattern b, and the second large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern B at 10 R, and the first large winning opening 36 is the opening and closing pattern A at 1 R to 4 R It is prescribed to become. That is, in the hit pattern 3, the substantial number of rounds is 1st to 4th and 5th rounds of 10R, and only the 10Rth is executed as a round in which V winning on the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern that occurs on a story bonus (success in the story bonus 5R), and in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 5R. In the hit pattern 4, the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern b, and the second large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern B at the 10Rth, and the first large winning opening 36 has the opening and closing pattern A at the 1R to 4R eyes. It is prescribed to become. That is, in the hit pattern 4, the substantial number of rounds is 1st to 4th and 5th rounds of 10R, and only the 10Rth is executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

  Hit patterns 5 and 6 occur on battle bonus (battle bonus 5R success), and are the hit patterns in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 5R. In hit patterns 5 and 6, the inter-round interval between each of the first to tenth R is an interval pattern a, the other inter-round interval is an interval pattern b, and the second large winning opening 37 is The opening / closing pattern B is defined, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern A at the 11th to 14th eyes. That is, the hit patterns 5 and 6 are five rounds of the 10Rth to 14Rth in the actual round number, and only the 10R is executed as a round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern that occurs on a live bonus (live bonus 8R failure) and in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 8R. The hit pattern 7 is defined such that the interval between rounds is the interval pattern b, and the first large winning opening 36 has the open / close pattern A at the first to eighth R's. That is, the hit pattern 7 is eight rounds, the first to eighth rounds of the actual round number, and the round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

  The hit pattern 8 is a hit pattern that occurs on a live bonus (live bonus 4R failure) and in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 4R. The hit pattern 8 is defined such that the interval between rounds is the interval pattern b, and the first large winning opening 36 has the open / close pattern A at the 1st to 4th eyes. That is, the hit pattern 8 is four rounds having the first to fourth actual rounds, and the round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

  The hit pattern 9 is a hit pattern that occurs on a story bonus (story bonus 4R failure) and in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 4R. The hit pattern 9 is defined such that the interval between rounds is the interval pattern b, and the first large winning opening 36 has the open / close pattern A at the 1st to 4th eyes. That is, the hit pattern 9 is four rounds having the first to fourth actual rounds, and the round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

  Hit patterns 10 and 11 are hit patterns that occur on battle bonus (battle bonus 0R failure) and in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 0R. In hit patterns 10 and 11, the inter-round interval between each of the first to tenth R's is the interval pattern a, and the other inter-round interval is the interval pattern b, and all of the first to sixteenth eyes are the first The special winning opening 36 is defined to be the opening and closing pattern C. That is, hit patterns 10 and 11 have 0R rounds as the actual number of rounds, and a round in which the V winning on specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

  The hit pattern 12 is a hit pattern that occurs on an SP bonus (live bonus 16R), and in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is also specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 12, the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern b, and the second large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern B at 10 R, and the first large winning opening at 1 R to 9 R and 11 to 16 R 36 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern A. That is, in the hit pattern 12, the actual number of rounds is 16 rounds, which is the same number as the specified number of rounds, and only the 10Rth is executed as a round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy.

  In addition, in winning patterns 1 to 6 and 12, a round (specific second round game) in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is easy to execute is performed only for the 10Rth, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The specific second round game may be executed in the other rounds (1st to 9th eyes, 11th to 16th eyes). Also, in these hit patterns, a plurality of specific second round games may be executed. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned hit patterns including the hit patterns, the second large winning opening 37 is opened, but a round (usually the second round game) in which it is difficult to win a V prize on the specific area 38A. It may be Further, in FIG. 53, as an interval between rounds, a portion where the interval pattern a is defined may be defined as the interval pattern b, and a portion where the interval pattern b is defined may be defined as the interval pattern a. In other words, depending on the presentation mode in the big hit game state production mode (the first special symbol is being hit, a live bonus, a story bonus, a battle bonus, or the second special symbol is being hit, an SP bonus). It can be performed.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. In addition, although lottery value (random number value) information for determining predetermined matters based on lottery values (random number values) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range is defined in the table, these lottery Value information is synonymous with a so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, "random number value" may be simply referred to as "random number".

<Sub presentation contents determination table>
54 and 55 are diagrams showing a part of the sub effect content determination table. The sub effect content determination table is a table to be referred to in the effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 83 described later) of the sub CPU 71 described later, and for each effect mode (or each game state) Result (Clash), current gaming state (non-probability variation, non-permanence, non-probability variation, time-saving, probability variation, time-saving), variation pattern designating command type, various sub-rendering selection random number range (lottery value), etc. The type of the effect pattern to be determined (sub-effect content) is defined according to the parameter. The sub effect content determination table shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 is a sub effect content determination table in order to explain the item prefetching effect (see FIGS. 43 to 48 and FIGS. 111 to 113 described later) in this embodiment. A part of the item pre-reading effect to be specified is extracted and shown, and the pre-reading contents of the item pre-reading effect and the other contents of the effect are not limited to this. The item pre-reading effect is an effect for notifying of the degree of expectation of whether or not it is determined to be a big hit by displaying the item (for example, plates A to D described later).

In the sub effect contents determination table shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, effect patterns of item prefetching effects 1 to 24 which are item effect contents are defined, and 1 based on their selection probabilities (random range for sub effect selection). The presentation pattern of is to be determined. Further, in the item prefetching effects 1 to 24, which are the item effect contents, the plate A, the plate B, the plate C, and the plate D are defined as a plurality of items, and the number (number of sheets) of each plate is defined. ing. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, the pseudo continuation effect mentioned later as a plurality of expectation degree types, the serif effect mentioned later, and the item preview content 1-24 which are item effect contents are mentioned later A cut-in effect and other promotion (reverse) effects to be described later are defined, and each degree of expectation (a stage showing the degree of expectation) is specified. Here, the plate A corresponds to the pseudo-series effect as the expectation degree type, the plate B corresponds to the speech effect as the expectation degree type, and the plate C corresponds to the cut-in effect as the expectation degree type Correspondingly, the plate D corresponds to other promotion (reverse) effects as the expected degree type. The expectation degree type refers to an effect itself or an alert of different types of expectation in individual effects constituting a part of an item prefetching effect (more specifically, an effect to be performed in an item use effect process to be described later) This indicates the stage of the degree of expectation, and by combining these degrees of expectation, the degree of expectation of whether or not it is determined to be a big hit as a whole of the item pre-reading effect will be determined.

<Performing effect determination table>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a hit effect pattern determination table. The hit effect pattern determination table is a table to be referred to in a hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 91 described later) of the sub CPU 71 described later, and is performed according to the lottery value for each hit pattern type. The type of pattern is defined. In the hit effect pattern determination table, music patterns A to C constituting a live bonus, story patterns D and E constituting a story bonus, and battle patterns F to G constituting a battle bonus are defined as types of hit effect patterns. ing. The lottery value defines lottery value information when the random number range is 32768, and the lottery rate when the lottery value is 32768 is 32768/32768, that is, 100%. However, the hit effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 shows an example, and the specified lottery value information (lottery rate) is not limited to this.

  The music pattern A further includes a music pattern A (success) constituting a live bonus 9R success, a music pattern A (reverse) constituting a live bonus 5R success, a music pattern constituting a live bonus 8R failure and a live bonus 4R failure There is a hit presentation pattern of A (failure). That is, when the music pattern A (success) or the music pattern A (reverse) is determined as the hit effect pattern, it is basically determined that the transition to the ST mode (special game state) is made after the big hit game state ends. . On the other hand, when the music pattern A (failure) is determined as the hit effect pattern, basically, it is decided to shift to the time saving mode without shifting to the ST mode after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  The music pattern B further includes a music pattern B (success) constituting a live bonus 9R success, a music pattern B (reverse) constituting a live bonus 5R success, a music pattern constituting a live bonus 8R failure and a live bonus 4R failure. There is a hit presentation pattern of B (failure). That is, when the music pattern B (success) or the music pattern B (reverse) is determined as the hit effect pattern, it is basically determined that the transition to the ST mode (special game state) is made after the big hit game state ends. . On the other hand, when the music pattern B (failure) is determined as the hit effect pattern, basically, it is decided that the mode is shifted to the time saving mode without shifting to the ST mode after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  The music pattern C is one kind of music pattern C (decided), and when the music pattern C (decided) is decided as a hit effect pattern, basically the ST mode (special game state) after the end of the big hit gaming state It is decided to shift to). The music patterns A to C are music patterns for which different music is to be output, and the degree of expectation for deciding to shift to the ST mode (special game state) is different depending on the type of the music to be output. It has become.

  The music pattern A (success) is associated with the hit patterns 1-1 to 8 (that is, eight hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failed) is that the hit patterns 7-1 to 12 (i.e., 12 hits). (Match pattern). Here, the hit pattern 1 is a hit pattern in which a specific second round game of 1 R minutes (10 R) is executed after 8 R minutes (1 to 8 R) of the first round game is executed, and the hit pattern 7 is It is a hit pattern in which a specific second round game is not executed after the first round game of 8R minutes (1 to 8R) is executed. That is, in the case where the first round game of 8R minutes (1 to 8R) is executed when the music pattern A is determined, the expectation that the specific second round game is executed is 40 by 8/20. It becomes%.

  Also, the music pattern A (reversed) is associated with the hit patterns 3-1 to 6 (ie, six hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failed) is assigned to the hit patterns 8-1 to 9 (ie, 9). Pattern is associated with each hit pattern). Here, the hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern in which a specific second round game of 1R minutes (10R) is executed after the first round game of 4R minutes (1 to 4R) is executed, and the hit pattern 8 is It is a hit pattern in which the specific second round game is not executed after the first round game of 4R minutes (1 to 4R) is executed. That is, when the music pattern A is determined, when the first round game of 4R minutes (1 to 4R) is executed, the expectation that the specific second round game is executed is 40 on 6/15. It becomes%.

  The music pattern B (success) is associated with the hit patterns 1-9 to 14 (that is, six hit patterns), and the music pattern B (failure) is assigned to the hit patterns 7-13 to 16 (that is, four hits). (Match pattern). That is, when the music pattern B is determined, when the first round game of 8R minutes (1 to 8R) is executed, the expectation that the specific second round game is executed is 60/10. It becomes%.

  Also, the music pattern B (reversed) is associated with the hit patterns 3-7 to 18 (ie, 12 hit patterns), and the music pattern B (failed) is updated to the hit patterns 8-10 to 17 (ie, 8 Pattern is associated with each hit pattern). That is, when the music pattern B is determined, the expectation for the specific second round game to be executed when the first round game of 4R minutes (1 to 4R) is executed is 60/12/20. It becomes%.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the music pattern B is selected, the specific second when the music pattern B is selected than the expectation (40%) at which the specific second round game is executed. The expectation (60%) at which the two round game is executed is configured to be higher. By being configured in this manner, it is possible to change the degree of expectation among the pieces of music, and it is possible to further enhance the player's sense of expectation in the live bonus (specific game state).

  In addition, for example, in the music pattern A, when the first round game of 4R minutes (1 to 4R) is executed, the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed (that is, hit pattern 3 or hit pattern 8 8 R (1 degree) than the expectation that the music pattern A (reverse) is selected when either the music pattern A (reverse) or the music pattern A (failure) is selected, as determined. Music pattern A (success) when the degree of expectation that a specific second round game is to be executed when the first round game of ~ 8R is executed (that is, when the hit pattern 1 or the hit pattern 7 is determined) And, either of the music pattern B (failure) may be selected so that the expectation for selection of the music pattern A (success) occupied becomes higher.

Specifically, the music pattern A (reverse) is associated with the hit pattern 3 (ie, 18 hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failed) is associated with the hit pattern 8 (ie, 17 hit patterns). The music pattern A (success) may be associated with the hit pattern 1 (i.e., 46 hit patterns), and the song pattern A (failure) may be associated with the hit pattern 7 (i.e., 16 hit patterns). In this case, the degree of expectation (for example, the music pattern A (reversed)) occupying when either the music pattern A (reversed) or the music pattern A (failed) is selected (for example, 18 + 17 = 35/200) 18/35), if either the music pattern A (success) or the music pattern A (failure) is selected (for example, 46 + 16 = 62/200), the music pattern A (success) is expected to be selected The degree (e.g. 46/62) can be raised. By this configuration, the second common portion (for example, B melody of the second section described later) of the music pattern A is output after a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section described later) has elapsed. And, since the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed becomes relatively high, it is possible to diversify the role of the predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section described later), and the big hit gaming state ( The player's expectation in the specific gaming state can be further enhanced.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing by main CPU]
FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 are flowcharts showing main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main processing is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 57, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs disable setting processing of the watchdog timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S11.

  At S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  At S12, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the power failure is detected. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is detected, and the process proceeds to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is not detected and the processing is performed at S13. Move.

  In S13, the main CPU 61 performs sub control reception acceptance wait processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S14.

  At S14, the main CPU 61 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  At S15, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, it transfers the process to S30 (see FIG. 58), and when it is determined that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, the process proceeds to S16. Transfer the process.

  At S16, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is a power failure detection flag, the process proceeds to S17, and when it is determined that there is no power failure detection flag, the process proceeds to S30 (see FIG. 58). .

  In S17, the main CPU 61 performs damage check of the work area and performs processing of calculating a work damage check value. When this process ends, the process moves to S18.

  In S18, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, it transfers the process to S19, and if it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value, it transfers the process to S30. .

  At S19, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set 7FFEH to the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S20.

  In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  At S21, the main CPU 61 carries out a process of setting and displaying a probability change state display notification at power recovery. Specifically, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, the main CPU 61 causes a display to be displayed to notify that the winning probability of the big hit is the high probability state. When this process ends, the process moves to S22. Note that the display to be notified may be configured to end at the first start of fluctuation after power-on or at the end of fluctuation.

  At S22, the main CPU 61 performs processing for transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits to the sub control circuit 70 a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption. When this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S24, and returns to the address before power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area.

  As shown in FIG. 57, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting 8000H in the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, the main CPU 61 performs processing for acquiring an initial value of random numbers related to hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  At S32, the main CPU 61 performs all work area clear processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an initial value of random numbers related to hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S34, the main CPU 61 performs an initialization process of the work area at the time of initialization of the RAM. When this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S35, the main CPU 61 performs processing to transmit a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub control circuit 70. Further, in the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 executes initialization based on the received command. When this process ends, the process moves to S36.

  In S36, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  At S37, the main CPU 61 performs interrupt disable processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of inhibiting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  At S38, the main CPU 61 performs initial value random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  At S39, the main CPU 61 performs interrupt permission processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, the main CPU 61 performs processing for updating the effect condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  At S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process proceeds to S42 and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 If not, the process moves to S37.

  In S42, the main CPU 61 performs processing of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  At S43, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 is a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and a special winning opening for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening to be opened when a big hit occurs. Open time timer, security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that there is a fraudulent act, etc. Execute processing to update the timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  At S44, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol control processing. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a random number for collision determination and a random number for symbol determination in accordance with detection signals from the first starting opening switch 320 and the second starting opening switch 330. Then, with reference to the big hit determination table (not shown) stored in the main ROM 62, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is won, and processing of storing the result of the determination in the main RAM 63 is performed. In addition, about the special symbol control processing of S44, it mentions later using FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  At S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines which of the lost symbol and the hit symbol to be based on the contact probability of the normal symbol (refer to FIG. 50) according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 350. Perform processing to store the result. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination indicating the hit symbol is stored, and when the non-winning is selected, the result of the determination indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the judgment indicating the hit symbol is stored, the blade member 34 opens, for example, three times in 1.3 seconds, or opens four times in 1.4 seconds, or opens six times in 1.8 seconds. Do. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the wing members 34 are opened, and when the wing members 34 are in the open state, the game ball easily wins the second starting opening 33. Main CPU 61 extracts the normal symbol determination random number value and the normal symbol determination random number value according to the detection signal from passage gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random number values in main ROM 62 Based on the normal symbol winning table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won, and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determination random value and the normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 62 It is also possible to determine which one of the lost symbol and the hit symbol to be based on the symbol). When this process ends, the process moves to S46.

  At S46, the main CPU 61 performs symbol display device control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 controls the control signal for driving the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the ordinary symbol control process. Perform processing to store in The main CPU 61 transmits a control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 changes and displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 variably displays and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S47.

  At S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 generates data relating to a game information signal to be transmitted to the table computer or the hall computer 100, and stores the data in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S48.

  At S48, the main CPU 61 performs symbol holding number data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks the special symbol related switch check process and the normal symbol related switch check process (S91 and S92 in FIG. 61) in the timer interrupt process described later (first start opening switch 320, second detected in FIG. 61) First based on the detection signal from the start opening switch 330 and the passage gate switch 350, and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 63 updated according to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. A control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 is stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S49.

  At S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting control signals stored in the main RAM 63 in the above-described steps from each port. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and an LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED, the first big winning opening shutter 36A and the second big winning A solenoid power supply for solenoid drive is performed to open and close the mouth shutter 37A and open and close the blade member 34. When this process ends, the process moves to S50.

  At S50, the main CPU 61 performs a winning opening related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning opening related command. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the game processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by main CPU 61]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps. Even when the main CPU 61 is executing the main processing, the main processing may be interrupted to execute timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is a process performed in response to a clock pulse generated every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes an interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs register save processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. When this process ends, the process moves to S61.

  At S61, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. Although the details will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing predetermined processing (special symbol control processing, etc.) on condition that activation of timer interruption processing is performed a predetermined number of times (three times). The timer update process of S61 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  At S62, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data, and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the main CPU 61 A system reset signal is output. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters a system reset state. When this process ends, the process moves to S63.

  At S63, the main CPU 61 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a random number counter for collision determination, a random number counter for collision symbol determination, and a random number counter for presentation condition determination. In addition, since the random number counter for hit determination and the random number counter for hit symbol determination loses fairness when the update timing of the counter value is indeterminate, the timing determined every 2 ms in order to secure this. To make updates on When this process ends, the process moves to S64.

  At S64, the main CPU 61 performs switch input processing. Although the details will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each winning area or the like has detected a winning. For example, when a winning is detected, the main CPU 61 sets a bit corresponding to the winning area determined to have a winning to “1 (ON)”. The switch input process of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S65.

  At S65, the main CPU 61 performs payout control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 plays the game balls in the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C and 40D. If there is a winning, the payout request command corresponding to each is sent to the payout / firing control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out from the payout device 83 a winning ball corresponding to a winning area in which the bit is “1 (ON)” along with the winning of the gaming ball, and the set command Is sent to the payout / emission control circuit 82. When this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area triggered by the command set is controlled to "0 (OFF)". When this process ends, the process moves to S66.

  At S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. When this process ends, the process moves to S67.

  At S67, the main CPU 61 performs register recovery processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process ends, this timer interrupt processing routine ends.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer update process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 60, at S70, the main CPU 61 adds one to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of times of execution (activation) of timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, when the number of times of execution (activation) of the timer interrupt processing reaches a predetermined condition (three times), the predetermined processing (special symbol control processing or the like) is executed. When this process ends, the process moves to S71.

  At S71, the main CPU 61 subtracts one from the value of the waiting time timer. The waiting time timer is a timer for measuring various execution waiting times. When this process ends, the process moves to S72.

  At S72, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0". The residual ball monitoring timer includes a ball passage from the first large winning opening 36 to the first large winning opening count switch 360 and a ball passage from the second large winning opening 37 to the second large winning opening count switch 370. It is a timer for measuring the residual ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the residual ball which remains in. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0", the process proceeds to S77, and if the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0". , Shift the processing to S73. When the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0” and the round game is not in progress, an error may be notified when the big winning hole count switch detects a game ball.

  At S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts one from the value of the residual ball monitoring timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S74.

  At S74, the main CPU 61 carries out processing to determine again whether the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S77, and when the main ball 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0". , Shift the processing to S75.

  At S75, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the specific area 38A is open. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the specific area 38A is not open, the process proceeds to S77, and when it is determined that the specific area 38A is open, the process proceeds to S76.

  At S76, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting specific area closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data for closing the specific area 38A, and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on a control signal based on this data. Thus, the displacement member 39 is driven to close the specific area 38A. When this process ends, the process moves to S77. As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0” after the second large winning opening 37 has ended long opening (a section with an open state of 27.222 s) and becoming a closed state. Then, the displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, whereby the specific area 38A is switched from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific area 38A is in the closed state through an open state of about 28.320s, which is slightly shorter than 29.222s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.

  In S77, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. The discharge monitoring timer is a timer for counting the discharge ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the discharge balls discharged in the second large winning opening 37. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S80, and when the value of the discharge monitoring timer is determined not to be “0”, S78. Transfer the process to In the present embodiment, a smaller value (shorter time) is set to the residual ball monitoring timer than the discharge monitoring timer, but it may be the same or a large value (long time).

  At S78, the main CPU 61 subtracts one from the value of the discharge monitoring timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S79.

  In S79, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine again whether the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends this timer update processing routine, and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. The process moves to S80.

  In S80, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is "10". The special winning opening open frequency counter is a counter used to identify the 10R eyes that the second special winning opening 37 opens and closes. Therefore, the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter does not count the number of times the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are actually in the open state, and one is added for each round. is there. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is not "10", the process proceeds to S82, and it is determined that the value of the special winning opening opening frequency counter is "10". If it does, the process moves to S81.

  In S81, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not a control status flag described later is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening open process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing, the timer update processing routine is ended, and the control status flag indicates the special winning opening opening processing. If it is determined that the value is not (04H), the process proceeds to S82.

  In S82, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter. The second large winning opening winning combination counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the second large winning opening 37 detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370. The discharge ball counter is a counter for counting the number of discharge balls of the game ball detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the second big winning opening winning combination counter and the value of the discharge ball counter are the same. In this process, when the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is not larger than the value of the discharging ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends this timer update processing routine, and the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is If the value is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S83. The value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from the detection of the game ball by the second large winning opening count switch 370 to the detection by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. It corresponds to time. Therefore, if it is determined in this process that the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the second large winning by the ball clogging inside the second winning opening 37 or so-called goto action It is assumed that only the winning opening count switch 370 is detected.

  At S83, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The ejection error command corresponds to a command for notifying that the ejection has not been normally performed. The ejection error command is transmitted in the command transmission control process in the timer interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S84.

  In S84, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the second large winning opening winning combination counter to the discharged ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process ends, the timer update processing routine ends. Note that the discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing switch input processing executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is performed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 61, in S90, the main CPU 61 performs a fraud detection switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor (not shown) capable of detecting radio waves, a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibration, etc. If this process ends, the process moves to S91. In addition, when it is in the state which one of the above-mentioned sensors detected, error notification may be performed, and even if, for example, the big winning opening count switch detects the winning of the gaming ball, the winning is invalidated. You may do it.

  At S91, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol related switch check processing. The special symbol related switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S92.

  At S92, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input of the passage gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected, and when it is determined that there is an input, the number of reservations is an upper limit (for example, If it is determined that the upper limit is set, the process ends. If it is determined that it is not the upper limit, processing for outputting a detection signal is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S93.

  At S93, the main CPU 61 performs prize ball related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting opening switch 320, and the second starting opening switch 330 have been input. If it is determined that there is an input of the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B, processing is performed to add 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter, and the first starting opening switch 320 or the second starting If it is determined that there is an input from the mouth switch 330, processing is performed to add one to the value of the corresponding starting opening winning counter. When this process ends, the switch input processing routine ends.

[Special symbol related switch check process]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol related switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 62, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs a first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S101.

  In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S102.

  In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a first big winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S103.

  In S103, the main CPU 61 performs a second big winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the special symbol related switch check processing routine ends.

[First start port switch check process]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process performed by the main CPU 61. The first start port switch check process is performed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 63, in S110, the main CPU 61 determines the processing based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 320 to determine whether or not the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 32 has been detected. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 320 is “1 (ON)”, and the first starting opening If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process proceeds to S111, and if the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the first starting opening End the switch check processing routine.

  In S111, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is four or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of reservations is four or more. If it is determined that the number of reservations is 4 or more, the first start port switch check processing routine is ended, and if it is determined that the number of reservations is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S112.

  At S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of holdings of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S113.

  At S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value for the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter A process of extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter and storing the same in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) Judgment result based on the hit random number for judgment is derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and various kinds acquired by the game ball winning in the first starting opening 32 during fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol The random number value is sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When this process ends, the process moves to S114.

  At S114, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol fluctuation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S115.

  At S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether to perform a winning effect based on random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S116.

  In S116, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command includes information indicating a hit determination random number and information indicating a hit symbol determination random number. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that the game ball has been won or the result of the hit lottery result. It will be. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, changing the display mode of the holding ball to be displayed, when it is determined that the effect is a winning effect in the process of S115. This enables so-called "pre-reading effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory before the change execution. When this process ends, the first start port switch check process routine ends.

[Second start port switch check process]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The second start port switch check process is performed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 64, in S120, the main CPU 61 determines the processing based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330 to determine whether or not the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 33 has been detected. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and the second starting opening If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process proceeds to S121, and if the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the second starting opening End the switch check processing routine.

  In S121, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is four or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of reservations is four or more. If it is determined that the number of reservations is 4 or more, the second start port switch check processing routine is ended, and if it is determined that the number of reservations is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S122.

  At S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of pending of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  At S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value for the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter A process of extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter and storing the same in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) Judgment result based on the hit random number for judgment is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various kinds acquired by the game ball winning in the second starting opening 33 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol The random number value is sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). When this process ends, the process moves to S124.

  At S124, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting second special symbol fluctuation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting second special symbol fluctuation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S125.

  In S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether to perform a winning effect based on random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S126.

  In S126, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process ends, the second start port switch check process routine ends.

[First big winning opening switch check process]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a first big winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first big winning opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 65, in S130, main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the gaming ball to first large winning opening 36 has been detected based on the detection signal from first large winning opening count switch 360. Do the process. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the gaming ball to the first big winning opening 36 has been detected, the process proceeds to S131, and the winning of the gaming ball to the first big winning opening 36 is detected. If it is determined that the process is not performed, the first big winning opening switch check processing routine is ended.

  In S131, the main CPU 61 performs processing for adding one to the value of the first large winning opening winning combination counter. The first large winning opening winning combination counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit winning number per round has been reached. When this process ends, the process moves to S132.

  In S132, the main CPU 61 sets a first big winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The first big winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 wins the game ball to the first big winning opening 36. Become aware. As a result, for example, the total number of payouts (the number of payout balls) displayed during the additional bonus is additionally displayed. When this process is ended, the first winning opening switch check processing routine is ended.

[Second big winning opening switch check process]
FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing a second big winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The second big winning opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 66, in S140, main CPU 61 determines whether or not winning of the game ball to second large winning opening 37 has been detected based on a detection signal from second large winning opening count switch 370. Do the process. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the gaming ball to the second big winning opening 37 has been detected, the process proceeds to S141, and the winning of the gaming ball to the second big winning opening 37 is detected. If it is determined that the process is not performed, the process proceeds to S143.

  In S141, the main CPU 61 performs processing of adding one to the value of the second large winning opening winning combination counter. The second large winning opening winning combination counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit winning number per round has been reached. If this process ends, the process moves to S142.

  In S142, the main CPU 61 sets a second large winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The second large winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 wins the game ball to the second large winning opening 37. Become aware. Also in this case, for example, the total number of payouts (the number of payout balls) displayed during the bonus on bonus is additionally displayed. When this process ends, the process moves to S143.

  In S143, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the V winning of the gaming ball in the specific area 38A has been detected based on the detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the V winning of the gaming ball in the specific area 38A is detected, the process proceeds to S144, and it is determined that the V winning of the gaming ball in the specific area 38A is not detected. In the case, the process moves to S152.

  At S144, the main CPU 61 performs processing of adding one to the value of the discharge ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S145.

  In S145, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is "10". The special winning opening open frequency counter is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is not "10", the process proceeds to S152, and it is determined that the value of the special winning opening opening frequency counter is "10". If it has, the process moves to S146.

  In S146, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not a control status flag described later is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening open process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing, the process proceeds to S149, and the control status flag is the value indicating the special winning opening opening processing (04H If it is not determined, the process proceeds to S147.

    In S147, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control status flag described later is a value (05H) indicating the big winning opening reopening release waiting time management process or a value indicating the hit end interval management process (06H). I do. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is "05H" or "06H", it transfers the process to S148 and determines that the control status flag is neither "05H" nor "06H". The process moves to S152.

  In S148, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than “0”. The discharge monitoring timer is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than “0”, the process proceeds to S149, and the value of the discharge monitoring timer is determined not to be larger than “0”. The process moves to S152. In this process, when it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than "0", it is determined that an incorrect prize has occurred, and an error is notified by transmitting an error command to the sub control circuit 70. You may do it.

  In S149, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the specific area passage flag is “01H”. The specific area passing flag is an internal flag that is set to “01H” when the V winning of the gaming ball is detected by the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area passing flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S152, and when the value of the specific area passing flag is not “01H”. , Shift the process to S150.

  At S150, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set "01H" to the value of the specific area passage flag. The value "01H" of the specific area passage flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the probability variation gaming state is determined after the end of the jackpot gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S151.

  In S151, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a specific area passage command. The specific area passing command is a command indicating that the gaming ball has passed (V winning) with respect to the specific area 38A. The specific area passing command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the auxiliary control circuit 70, whereby the auxiliary control circuit 70 recognizes the V winning in the specific area 38A. If this process ends, the process moves to S152.

  In S152, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether passage of the gaming ball to the non-specific area 38B has been detected based on a detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that passage of the gaming ball to the nonspecific area 38B is detected, the process proceeds to S153 and it is determined that passage of the gaming ball to the nonspecific area 38B is not detected. In the case, the process moves to S154.

  At S153, the main CPU 61 performs processing of adding one to the value of the discharge ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S154.

  In S154, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter. That is, the game ball is not detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370, and the main CPU 61 determines whether the game ball is detected only in the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. judge. In this process, when the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is not smaller than the value of the discharging ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends the second big winning opening switch check processing routine, and the second big winning opening If the value of the winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S155.

  At S155, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The ejection error command is as described above. When this process ends, the process moves to S156.

  In S156, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set the value of the second big winning opening winning counter to the discharged ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process is ended, the second winning opening switch check processing routine is ended. Note that the discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S156.

[Special symbol control process]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol control process is executed in the following steps. In FIG. 67, numerical values shown laterally from S161 to S168 indicate control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control state flags in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value according to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game is advanced.

  As shown in FIG. 67, in the first S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads a control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S161.

  In addition, in S161 to S168 described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processing in each step based on the value of the control state flag. The control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in S161 to S168 to be performed. In addition to that, the main CPU 61 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Note that before the predetermined timing is reached, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

  At S161, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol storage check processing. The details of step S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S162.

  At S162, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol variation time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flag to the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management when the control status flag is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management and the variation time has elapsed. Set and set waiting time (for example, 600 ms) in the waiting time timer. That is, after the waiting time after determination has elapsed, the process of S163 is set to be performed. The details of this S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S163.

  At S163, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol display time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the control condition flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management, and if a wait time after confirmation has elapsed, it is a big hit or not. In the case of a big hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the process of S164 is set to be performed. On the other hand, when it is not a big hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S168. The details of this S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S164.

  At S164, the main CPU 61 executes hit start interval management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management, and the first big prize read from the main ROM 62 when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. Data for opening the mouth shutter 36A and the second large winning opening shutter 37A and data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the processing of S49 of FIG. 58, the main CPU 61 controls the data and the displacement member 39 for opening the first large winning opening shutter 36A and the second large winning opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63. The data for opening is read out, and control signals based on these data are supplied to the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A and the displacement member solenoid 390. Thereby, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37. The details of this S164 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S165.

  At S165, the main CPU 61 executes waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before big winning opening reopening, and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval (interval pattern a, b) has elapsed, The special winning opening open frequency counter is updated and stored so as to increase by “1”. The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the open upper limit time (for example, 27.222s of the open / close pattern A) in the big winning opening open time timer. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S166. In this process, the main CPU 61 also performs a process for controlling the opening and closing of the displacement member 39. The details of this S165 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S166.

  At S166, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening open process. In this process, when the control status flag is the value (04H) indicating that the big winning opening is open, the main CPU 61 has passed the open upper limit time under the condition that the big winning opening winning counter is “9” or more ( It is determined whether any of the conditions of the special winning opening open time timer is “0” is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates the variable located in the main RAM 63 in order to close the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter satisfies the condition that the special winning opening opening frequency is equal to or greater than the maximum value (which is the final round). The main CPU 61 sets the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag in the final round, while the value (05H) indicates the waiting time management before the big winning opening reopening while it is not the final round. Is set in the control status flag. The details of this S166 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S167.

  At S167, the main CPU 61 executes hit end interval management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 controls the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to the flag. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S168. The details of this S167 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S168.

  At S168, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol game end processing. In this process, when the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game, the main CPU 61 executes the process at the end of the special symbol game (for example, 1 indicating the end of one game from the external terminal board 80). A game end signal or a process for outputting a big hit signal indicating a big hit game state is executed), and a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check is set. That is, it is set to execute the process of S161. The details of this S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is ended, the special symbol control processing routine is ended.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is a loss when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state, the control status flags should be set to (00H), (01H), (02H), (07H) in order. Thus, the processing of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 67 is performed at a predetermined timing. Further, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state, and the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the control status flag is set in order of (00H), (01H), (02H), as shown in FIG. , And the processing of S162 and S163 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state is started. Furthermore, when the main CPU 61 is in the big hit gaming state, the control status flags are set in order of (03H), (04H), (05H) to specify the processing of S164, S166, and S165 shown in FIG. It will execute at the timing of and will execute the big hit gaming state. It should be noted that, when the termination condition of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied, the processing of S165 and S167 to S168 shown in FIG. 67 is executed at a predetermined timing by setting (04H), (06H) and (07H) in order. And end the jackpot gaming state.

[Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol storage check process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 68, at S170, main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the process proceeds to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, it ends the special symbol storage check processing routine.

  In S171, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine the presence or absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is no start memory for the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start memory If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process moves to S172. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is start storage, the process proceeds to S173.

  At S172, the main CPU 61 performs a demonstration display process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 63. Furthermore, the state where the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area where the random value for hitting determination is stored) becomes "0" for a predetermined time (for example, 30s) If maintained, set a value to allow execution of the demo display as a demo display permission value. Then, when the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demonstration display command. The demonstration display command stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a demonstration display command. Thus, the demonstration display is performed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is ended, the special symbol memory check processing routine is ended.

  In S173, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not start storage corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". In this process, main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data of second special symbol start storage area (0) to second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start storage corresponding to second special symbol is "0". That is, when it is determined that data is not stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the processing is shifted to S174. If the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, if it is determined that data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S175 Transfer the process to

  In S174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol changes as the change state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuated as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S176, the main CPU 61 executes processing for setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S177.

  At S177, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol storage transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 executes the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), respectively. Execute processing to shift (store) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3), and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area Execute processing to shift (store) each of the data from (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) Do. When this process ends, the process moves to S178.

  At S178, the main CPU 61 executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects one big hit from a plurality of big hit determination tables (not shown) having different numbers of big hit determination values (big hit determination values) depending on whether or not the gaming state flag indicates the probable variation gaming state. Select a judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating a probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and the gaming status flag is not a value indicating a probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability changing gaming state with less is referred to. As described above, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating a probable variation gaming state, that is, when the gaming state is a probable variation gaming state as a special gaming state which is easily shifted to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), The probability of transition is improved as compared to the non-probable variation gaming state as a non-special gaming state which is less likely to shift to the specific gaming state than the probability variation gaming state as the special gaming state.

  In addition, the special game state is a definite change / time short game state, and the non special game state is basically a non definite change / non time short game state, but in the present embodiment, the non special game state is a non probability change game state and It also includes the time-saving game state.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted when winning of the game ball, and it is for the hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Refer to the random number value and the selected big hit judgment table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the hit determination random number value and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to make the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Note that the jackpot probability of winning in the first starting opening 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning in the second starting opening 33. The jackpot probability of winning in the first starting opening 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning in the second starting opening 33.

  Thus, in the process of S178, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S179.

  At S179, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines a big hit symbol when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and performs a process of determining a lost symbol when it is lost. The details of this S179 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S180.

  At S180, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 is a variation pattern for determining different variation patterns based on the special symbol determined in the process of S179, the result of the jackpot determination in the process of S178, and the value of the probability variation counter. Select a decision table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, in the ST gaming state and the normal gaming state, different variation pattern determination tables are provided. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. Note that this process is the same during the ST gaming state.

  Data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed in the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a fluctuation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received fluctuation pattern designation command. If this process ends, the process moves to S181.

  At S181, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for the present variation display. When this process ends, the process moves to S182.

  Then, in S182, the main CPU 61 executes processing to clear the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display of this time. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check processing routine ends.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 69, in S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the game is a big hit, it shifts the process to S191. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S198.

  In S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the fluctuation state number of the jackpot determined in S190 is a value (01H) indicating that it is the fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S192 when the fluctuation state number is a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is a fluctuation. On the other hand, when the fluctuation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the first special symbol, that is, the main CPU 61 has a value (02H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the second special symbol In the case, the process moves to S194.

  In S192, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random symbol value for determining the hit symbol extracted from the big hit symbol determining counter and the big hit determination table (shown in the first special symbol big hit symbol distribution in FIG. A process is performed to determine symbols 1) to 6) and symbols corresponding to any of 1 to 5 from 1 to 5). If this process ends, the process moves to S193.

  In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the big hit symbol of the determined first special symbol and a command set of the big hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and causes the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed based on the data of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S196.

  At S194, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects the big hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the random symbol value for determining the hit symbol extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the big hit determination table (shown in the second special symbol big hit symbol distribution in FIG. Perform processing to determine the symbol corresponding to the definite variation 1). If this process ends, the process moves to S195.

  In S195, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the jackpot symbol of the determined second special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and causes the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S196.

  In S196, the main CPU 61 performs hit start interval display time data set processing corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S197.

  In S197, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening open number related data setting process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the number of times of opening of the special winning opening related data relating to the number of times of opening of the first special winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37, ie 5 or processing of setting data corresponding to the definite variation 1 due to the second special symbol in the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, this special symbol determination processing routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines in S190 that it is not a big hit, that is, it is a loss in S198, it performs a data set of a lost symbol and a command set of the lost symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the special symbol, and causes the special symbol to be stopped and displayed based on the data of the lost symbol of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designating command. Under the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the stop-of-loss display mode. When this processing is ended, this special symbol determination processing routine is ended.

[Special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the processing is shifted to S211. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, it ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

  At S211, the main CPU 61 determines whether the waiting time timer is “0”. When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S212. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol variation time management processing routine is ended.

  In S212, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management to the special symbol control state flag, and shifts the processing to S213.

  At S213, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S214.

  In S214, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. When this process is ended, the special symbol variation time management processing routine is ended.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the special symbol display time management process routine is ended.

  In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

  In S222, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that a big hit has occurred, the process proceeds to step S223. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S224.

  At S223, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time short) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S234.

  At S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is “0”. The time saving number counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games (number of symbol variations) in the time saving gaming state. When the value of the time saving number counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S228. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S225.

  At S225, the main CPU 61 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the time saving number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  At S226, the main CPU 61 determines again whether the value of the time reduction number counter is “0”. When the value of the time saving number counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S227. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S228.

  At S227, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a time saving end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a time saving end command indicating the end of the time saving game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the gaming state so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the time saving game state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S232.

  At S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the probability variation number counter is “0”. The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games (number of symbol variations) in the probability variation gaming state. The main CPU 61 shifts the processing to step S233 when the value of the probability variation number counter is “0”. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S229.

  In S229, the main CPU 61 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the probability variation number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S230.

  In S230, the main CPU 61 determines again whether the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. The main CPU 61 shifts the processing to step S231 when the value of the probability variation number counter is “0”. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S233.

  At S231, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set a definite variation end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) in the main RAM 63 a definite variation end command indicating the end of the probable variation gaming state. Then, the definite variation end command is supplied as a command indicating the gaming state from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the subsidiary CPU 71 of the subsidiary control circuit 70, so that the subsidiary control circuit 70 recognizes the termination of the probable variation gaming state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S232.

  At S232, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time short) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S233.

  In S233, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a value (07H) indicating the end processing of the special symbol game as the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, the special symbol display time management processing routine is ended.

  In S234, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S235. In the present embodiment, as an example, the hit start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol is when the jackpot symbol is "certain 1" to "certain 4" or "time 1 to 3". Is 10000 ms and 50000 ms in the case of the other big hit symbols, and the hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 3000 ms when the big hit symbol is "certainly variable 1".

  At S235, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the start of the big hit gaming state. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state and indicating a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern in the big hit gaming state by the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S236.

  At S236, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S237.

  In S237, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management processing in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, the special symbol display time management processing routine is ended.

[Perform start interval management process]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit start interval management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 72, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to S241. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, it ends the hit start interval management process routine.

  At S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is “0”. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S 242. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the hit start interval management processing routine is ended.

  In S242, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set (store) the special winning opening open frequency counter upper limit value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and shifts the processing to S243.

  In S243, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the special winning opening open number counter, and shifts the process to S244.

  In S244, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening opening / closing pattern corresponding to the type of big hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 53 corresponding to the jackpot symbol determined in step S244. If this process ends, the process moves to S245.

  In S245, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening open display command in this case is data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S246.

  In S246, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open process in the control state flag in the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S247.

  In S247, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S248.

  At S248, the main CPU 61 clears the value of the discharged ball counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S249.

  In S249, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set as 27.222 s, for example, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is “probable variation 1”, for example, according to the value (round number) of the special winning opening open frequency counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S250.

  In S250, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable located in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37. The variables stored in this way drive the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37, Become. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends.

[Wait time management process before the big winning opening reopening]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the waiting time question management process before the special winning opening reopening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time question management process before the special winning opening reopening is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before big winning opening reopening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the special winning opening before reopening waiting time management process, the process proceeds to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening, the main winning opening pre-opening question management process routine ends.

  In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is “0”. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S262. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time question management processing routine before the big winning opening reopening.

  In S262, the main CPU 61 performs processing for adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S263.

  In S263, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) the special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening open display command in this case is data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the auxiliary control circuit 70 as a special winning opening open display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S264.

  In S264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S265.

  In S265, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S266.

  At S266, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the discharged ball counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S267.

  In S267, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S268.

  In S268, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is ended, the waiting time question management process routine before the big winning opening reopening is ended.

[A big winning opening open processing]
FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the special winning opening open processing executed by the main CPU 61. The special winning opening open processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a process for opening a special winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing, the main winning opening opening processing routine is ended.

  At S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening winning counter is "9" or more. In this processing, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is “9” or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S272. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is not “10” or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274.

  In S272, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening / closing process corresponding to the set opening / closing pattern for each round in the type of the big hit and the current round, and shifts the process to S273.

  In S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening open processing routine.

  In S274, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variable stored in this manner is for closing the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. If this process ends, the process moves to S275.

  At S275, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the residual ball monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 1098 ms is set as the predetermined value. If this process ends, the process moves to S276.

  In S276, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the closed special winning opening is the second large winning opening 37 or not. When the main CPU 61 determines that the closed special winning opening is the second large winning opening 37, the process proceeds to S277. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the closed special winning opening is not the second large winning opening 37, that is, the first special winning opening 36, the process proceeds to S278.

  At S277, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set a predetermined value in the discharge monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 1998 ms is set as the predetermined value. If this process ends, the process moves to S278.

  In S278, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or more than the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening frequency (the number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the special winning opening opening frequency (round number), and the value of the special winning opening frequency counter It is determined whether or not the upper limit value of the number of times of opening of the special winning opening is equal to or more. Here, the upper limit of the number of times of opening the special winning opening is 16 times (16R). When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or more than the upper limit value of the winning opening opening frequency, the process proceeds to S282. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is not equal to or more than the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening frequency, the process proceeds to S279.

  In S279, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63 based on the hit pattern and the number of rounds. That is, based on the hit pattern and the current number of rounds, the time corresponding to the interval pattern a or b is set (see FIG. 53). The inter-round interval display time may be set to a time different from the time corresponding to the interval patterns a and b. If this process ends, the process moves to S280.

  In S280, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value (05H) indicating the waiting time before opening reopening request management process in the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S281.

  In S281, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process ends, the special winning opening open processing routine is ended.

  On the other hand, in S282, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S283. In the present embodiment, as an example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the first special symbol is 20000 ms when the big hit symbol is "certain 1" to "certain 6", "time 1" to " In the case of time saving 5 ", it is 10000 ms, and the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 20000 ms if it is a big hit in the non-probable variation gaming state, when the big hit symbol is" probable variation 1 " If it is a big hit in the game state, it is 5000 ms. As described above, in the present embodiment, the so-called first hit (the first big hit serving as a trigger for transitioning from the indeterminate gaming state to the indeterminate gaming state), the hit end interval display time at the end is the consecutive villain hit (probable variation gaming state) The jackpot is to be longer than the hit end interval display time at the end of the jackpot) when the probability change gaming state continues.

  In S283, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value (06H) indicating the end-of-hit interval management processing in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S284.

  In S284, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit gaming state. When this process ends, the special winning opening open processing routine is ended.

[Percent End Interval Management Process]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the hit / end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in the following steps.

  At S290, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control status flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the process proceeds to S291. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, it ends the hit end interval management process routine.

  At S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S292. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the hit end interval management processing routine is ended.

  At S292, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 to the special symbol control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S293.

  In S293, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 is "01H". If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is "01H", the process proceeds to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is not "01H", the process proceeds to S297.

  At S294, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “02H” to the gaming state flag of the main RAM 63. The game state flag "02H" indicates the probability variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state. When this process ends, the process moves to S295.

  At S295, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “180” as the number of times of ST to the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S296.

  In S296, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “00H” to the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S299.

  In S297, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting "01H" in the gaming state flag of the main RAM 63. "01H" of the gaming state flag indicates the non-probability changing gaming state and the time saving gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S298.

  At S 298, the main CPU 61 executes processing to set “4” or “100” as the number of time reductions to the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S299. When "4" is set as the number of time saving, the big hit symbol is "time saving 2" to "time saving 4" in the non probability variation gaming state and the non time saving gaming state, and the time saving gaming state is otherwise In the case of transitioning to "100," "100" is set as the number of time saving.

  In S299, the main CPU 61 sets a gaming state command, and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command is a command including information indicating the type of the hit gaming state ended, in addition to the gaming state to be controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, and information indicating the remaining number of times as time reduction. The remaining number of shortings is also referred to as the remaining shorting, as described later, and means the number of shortings of “4” or “100” set in the process of S298. That is, the remaining number of time saving times (remaining time short number) does not mean the time saving number remaining at any time of the time saving mode, but only indicates the time saving number remaining at the start time of the time saving mode. A game state command including such information such as the number of remaining times is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the special symbol game end processing executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in S300, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control status flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the special symbol game end process routine is ended.

  In S301, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol game end processing according to the set opening / closing pattern for each round in the type of the big hit and the current round, and shifts the processing to S302. In the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 61 executes a process for outputting a 1-game end signal or a big hit signal from the external terminal board 80 to the hall computer 100. In S302, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special symbol game end processing routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 93. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processing such as display control processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This main processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in S310, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for initialization in response to power on. If this process ends, the process moves to S311.

  In S311, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the random number values (such as the effect determination random number counter value and the stop symbol determination random number counter value) stored in the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S312.

  In S312, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although the details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S313. The command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81.

  In S313, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for performing display in the display area 4 A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. The display control circuit 76 including VDP (Video Display Processor) processes various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, performance image data, etc. based on data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71. It is read from the ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 4 A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the process moves to S314.

  In S314, the sub CPU 71 performs voice control processing to control the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the voice control circuit 77. When this process ends, the process moves to S315.

  In S315, the sub CPU 71 executes lamp control processing for controlling the light emission (lighting / flickering) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. If this process ends, the process moves to S316.

  In S316, the sub CPU 71 performs the movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 executes control processing for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B. When this process ends, the process moves to S311, and thereafter, the processes of S311 to S316 are repeated.

  On the other hand, even when the sub CPU 71 is executing the main processing, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main processing and execute the command reception interrupt processing or the timer interrupt processing. The command reception interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG. 78, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving a program under execution stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S321.

  In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIGS. 80 and 81. When this process ends, the process moves to S322.

  In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S320 to each register. When this process ends, the command reception interrupt processing routine ends.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S331.

  In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating (adding / subtracting) the value of the timer set for effect control. If this process ends, the process moves to S332.

  In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting the presence or absence of the operation of the pressing operation button 9A. That is, when the predetermined effect is performed, the effect content is changed based on the determination result in this process when the effect content changes depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the pressing operation button 9A when the predetermined effect is performed. Control will be performed.

  In S333, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S330 to each register. When this process ends, the timer interrupt processing routine ends.

Command analysis processing
80 and 81 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in S390, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has been received, the process proceeds to S391. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing routine.

  In S391, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command, and performs processing according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. The sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S392 when the reading of the data of the received command is completed.

  In S392, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command is received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S393. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S394.

  In S393, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including the variation display mode of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern designation command. When the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the variation display mode of the decorative symbol, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. This effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  The determination of the effect pattern may be performed based on the received fluctuation pattern designation command as described above, or may be performed based on the received start winning command. Further, each information included in these commands may be integrated.

  In S394, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S395. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S396.

  In S395, the sub CPU 71 performs stop symbol determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. The sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73 when the stop decoration symbol is determined. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  The decorative symbols to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numerals “1” to “7”, and a predetermined number (for example, three (3 When the digits) are aligned with the same decorative symbol (number), it is decided to shift to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, although the decorative design corresponding to the loss is a loose eye other than these, a specific number (for example, two) of them is stopped and displayed with the same decorative design (number) and becomes the rest (for example, 1) One that is stopped and displayed with different decorative symbols (numbers) is called reach loser eyes. However, even if it is a balak eye, it may be possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state even when a specific balak eye that suggests a specific meaning (for example, "753" meaning 7553 or the like) is stopped and displayed. .

  In S396, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S397. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S398.

  In S397, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S398, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S 399. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S401.

  In S399, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. The hit effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S400.

  In S400, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit start presentation process. The hit start effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S401, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening winning command has been received as the command read out in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening winning command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S402. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening winning command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S403.

  In S402, the sub CPU 71 executes a winning ball counter addition process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 is in the jackpot gaming state (or when it is in a row) according to the number of gaming balls that have won in the big winning opening (the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37). Performs a process of counting the number of winning balls in all the jackpot gaming states (which have been transferred during the series) and displaying the counted number of winning balls. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S403, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a specific area passage command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passing command is received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S404. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passage command is not received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S405.

  In S404, the sub CPU 71 executes V winning notification processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data indicating that V prize winning in the big hit gaming state, that is, transition to the ST mode after the big hit gaming state ends. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S405, the sub CPU 71 determines whether an inter-round display command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S407.

  In S406, the sub CPU 71 executes an inter-round effect process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing such as setting effect data according to the interval display time between rounds, for example. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends. In the hit effect pattern determination process described later with reference to FIG. 91, a live bonus is determined as a hit effect pattern, and when the live bonus is executed, execution of the live bonus is prioritized, and the interval display between rounds The effect data according to the time is not set.

  In S407, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening open display command has been received as the command read in S391. If it is determined that the special winning opening open display command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S409. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening open display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S410 in FIG.

  In S408, the sub CPU 71 executes effect processing during a round. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data for displaying the remaining number of possible winnings and the winning opening opening time in the round. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S409 of FIG. 81, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit end display command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S410. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S411.

  In S410, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. The hit / termination effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S411, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a game state command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S412. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S413.

  In S412, the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode change processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the effect mode flag to "03H" if the received gaming state command is a command indicating a probable change / short game state, and is a command indicating a non-probable change / short game state Yes, if the remaining number of time saving is 100 times, the value of the effect mode flag is set to "02H" and it is a command indicating non-probability change / time saving gaming state, and if the remaining number of time saving is 4 If the command indicates "01H", and the command indicates other, "00H" is set to the value of the effect mode flag. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S413, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving end command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S 414. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S415.

  In S414, the sub CPU 71 executes the time saving mode end process. In this processing, for example, the sub CPU 71 sets processing such as setting a special effect content determination table (not shown) which makes it possible to easily select an effect pattern having a relatively high degree of expectation for a predetermined number of games after the time saving mode ends. Do. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S415, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the definite variation end command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the definite variation end command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S416. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the definite variation end command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S417.

  In S416, the sub CPU 71 executes ST mode end processing. In this process, for example, the sub CPU 71 sets a special effect content determination table (not shown) which makes it easy to select an effect pattern having a relatively high expectation for a predetermined number of games after the ST mode ends. Do. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S417, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the discharge error command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S418. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S419.

  In S418, the sub CPU 71 executes a discharge error notification process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for informing the occurrence of an error in the second big winning opening 37. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S419, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

[Demonstration pattern determination processing]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing effect pattern determination processing performed by the sub CPU 71. The effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an effect pattern as the effect content, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in S430, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the effect mode flag is "03H". The effect mode flag is an internal flag that indicates the type of effect mode. In the present embodiment, the effect mode flag has a value corresponding to the normal mode "00H", a value corresponding to the short mode "01H", a value corresponding to the long mode "02H", a value corresponding to the ST mode It becomes "03H". The background image and the contents of the effect are different according to the value of such effect mode flag. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "03H", the process proceeds to S431. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "03H", the process proceeds to S432.

  In S431, the sub CPU 71 executes processing in the ST mode. The processing in the ST mode will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S441.

  In S432, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether an item prefetching effect flag indicating that item prefetching rendering is being performed is ON. If it is determined that the item pre-reading effect flag is on (ON), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if it is determined that the item prefetching effect flag is not on (ON), the process proceeds to S434.

  In S433, the sub CPU 71 executes item pre-reading effect processing. This item pre-reading effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S441.

  In S434, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the effect mode flag is "02H". If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "02H", the process proceeds to S435. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "02H", the process proceeds to S436.

  In S435, the sub CPU 71 executes in-long mode effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a long mode middle sub effect content determination table (not shown), and the result (big hit) of the big hit determination, the type of fluctuation pattern specification command, and the random range for sub effect selection (lottery value) A process of determining an effect pattern is performed on the basis of and the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S439.

  In S436, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the effect mode flag is "01H". If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "01H", the process proceeds to S437. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "01H" (when the value of the effect mode flag is "00H"), the process proceeds to S438.

  In S437, the sub CPU 71 executes effect pattern determination processing during the short mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the short mode middle sub effect contents determination table (not shown), and the result (big hit) of the big hit judgment, the type of fluctuation pattern designating command, and the random number range for the sub effect selection (lottery value) A process of determining an effect pattern is performed on the basis of and the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S439.

  In S438, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect pattern determination process during the normal mode. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the sub effect content determination table (for normal mode) shown partially in FIG. 54, and the result of the big hit determination (coincidence), the type of fluctuation pattern designation command, and the sub effect Based on the selection random number range (lottery value) and the like, processing for determining an effect pattern is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S439.

  In S439, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the determined effect pattern is an item prefetch effect in the process of any of S435, S437, and S438 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the determined effect pattern is an item prefetch effect, the process proceeds to S440. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determined effect pattern is not an item prefetch effect, the process proceeds to S441.

  In S440, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting (ON) an item prefetch effect in-progress flag in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S441.

  In S441, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting effect data according to the determined type of effect pattern. When this process ends, the effect pattern determination process routine ends.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern designation command is received, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the item prefetch effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the prize effect determination process of S115 of the first start opening switch check process shown in FIG. 63 or S125 of the second start opening switch check process shown in FIG. If it is determined, the item pre-reading effect may be performed. That is, the main CPU 61 may control whether or not to execute the item pre-reading effect. In this case, the variation pattern specification command may include information on whether or not "prereading effect" by the main CPU 61 is included, or the sub CPU 71 may be related to whether or not "preread effect" included in the received start winning command. Information may be held, and the effect pattern may be determined with reference to the held information.

  In addition, the main CPU 61 may determine the contents of the effect of the item pre-reading effect (for example, the number of plates A to D and the expected degree of each expected degree). In this case, a variation pattern may be defined for each effect content of item pre-reading effect, and the sub CPU 71 may perform item pre-reading effect based on the contents of the variation pattern designating command corresponding to the determined variation pattern. When the variation pattern of is selected, the effect content of the item prefetching effect is determined separately, and the variation pattern specification command including the information of the determined effect content is transmitted, whereby the sub CPU 71 performs the item prefetching effect You may do it. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute the item prefetching effect, and determines the content of the effect of the item prefetching effect, whether the main CPU 61 executes the item prefetching effect or not And the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the item prefetch effect, and any of the modes in which the effect content of the item prefetch effect is determined. A mode is also included.

  Further, regardless of whether the main subject of determination is the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71, whether or not to execute the item pre-reading effect, and the contents of the item pre-reading effect when performing the item pre-reading effect are different lottery It may be determined by the same or by simultaneous lottery. That is, whether or not to execute the item prefetching effect, and the contents of the item prefetching effect for performing the item prefetching effect may be determined by a plurality of processes, or may be determined by one process. .

[Process in ST mode]
FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing processing in ST mode executed by the sub CPU 71. The processing in the ST mode is processing for determining an effect pattern as the effect content in the ST mode, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in S450, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the in-ST management counter is “51”. The in-ST management counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol game has been executed in the ST mode. If it is determined that the value of the in-ST management counter is “51”, the process proceeds to S451. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the in-ST management counter is not “51”, the process proceeds to S452.

  In S451, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting (turning on) the during-ST battle effect control flag indicating that it is a battle reach section in the ST mode in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S452.

  In S452, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the battle effect control flag during ST is on (ON). If it is determined that the battle effect control flag during ST is ON (ON), the process proceeds to S453. On the other hand, when it is determined that the battle effect control flag during ST is not ON (ON), the processing is shifted to S454.

  In S453, the sub CPU 71 refers to the sub battle contents determination table for ST battle rendition not shown, and shows the result of the big hit judgment (hit), the type of fluctuation pattern designation command, and the sub effect selection random number range (lottery value) A process of determining an effect pattern is performed on the basis of and the like. When this process ends, the in-ST mode processing routine ends.

  In S454, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the in-ST management counter is “0”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the first special symbol game (first game) in the ST mode. If it is determined that the value of the in-ST management counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S455. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the in-ST management counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S457.

  In S455, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a story introduction effect pattern according to the value of the ST consecutive row counter. The ST continuous play counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the jackpot gaming state (for example, during the second special symbol) is continuous in the ST mode except for the so-called first hit. In the present embodiment, a series of story effects in the story section of the ST mode is to be advanced in accordance with the number of consecutive hits (the value of the ST consecutive row counter) in the ST mode. The story introduction effect pattern is an effect pattern for setting, at the beginning of the series of story effects, effect data for which an effect (for example, a title display etc.) at the time of introduction of the series of stories is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S456.

  In S456, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "1" as the initial value of the number of sets. In the story section of ST mode, in the story section of ST mode, a set of 5 game times is used as a set, and a set of story effects are currently executed among a series of story effects executed over a total of 10 sets? Is data indicative of When this process ends, the process moves to S462.

  In S457, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the in-ST management counter is “1”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the second special symbol game (second game) in the ST mode, and is the first special symbol game in which the first set of story effects is started. If it is determined that the value of the in-ST management counter is “1”, the process proceeds to S460. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the in-ST management counter is not “1”, the process proceeds to S458.

  In S458, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the management counter in ST is “5 × number of sets (but less than“ 9 ”) + 1”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the management counter in ST is “5 × 1 + 1 = 6” (start of second set), “5 × 2 + 1 = 11” (start of third set), “5 × 3 + 1 = 16”. (Start of the 4th set), “5 × 4 + 1 = 21” (start of the 5th set), “5 × 5 + 1 = 26” (start of the 6th set), “5 × 6 + 1 = 31” (the seventh set Start), “5 × 7 + 1 = 36” (start of eighth set), “5 × 8 + 1 = 41” (start of ninth set), or “5 × 9 + 1 = 46” (start of tenth set) It is determined whether or not. If it is determined that the values of the in-ST management counter are these values, the process proceeds to S459. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the in-ST management counter is not these values, the process proceeds to S461.

  In S459, the sub CPU 71 performs update processing of the number of sets in which the number of sets is incremented by one. If this process ends, the process moves to S460.

  In S460, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a story effect pattern according to the number of sets (“1” to “9”) and the value of the ST middle row counter. By performing such processing, a series of story effects will be advanced in the story section of the ST mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S461.

  In S461, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the change causes a big hit. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol variation pattern in the symbol variation at this time is to display the big hit symbol in the end. If it is determined that the change causes a big hit, the process proceeds to S463. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change does not result in a big hit, the process moves to S462.

  In S462, the sub CPU 71 performs the updating process of the in-ST management counter which adds one to the value of the in-ST management counter. When this process ends, the in-ST mode processing routine ends.

  In S463, the sub CPU 71 executes a story effect pattern change process during ST. The story effect pattern change process during ST will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the in-ST mode processing routine ends.

[ST during story production pattern change processing]
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing in-ST story effect pattern change processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The during-ST story effect pattern change process is a process for changing the effect pattern as the effect content when a big hit occurs in the story section of the ST mode, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in S470, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to calculate the remaining effect time of the basic effect time of one set from the value of the management counter in ST. Here, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination in the story section in ST mode (ST gaming state) is a loss is basically determined to be 2 s (2000 ms). ing. That is, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the first variation pattern corresponding to the first variation time (2 s) is configured to be determined with high probability. . Further, the basic effect time for one set (five special symbol games) in the story section of the ST mode is set to be 10 s (10000 ms). That is, a story effect corresponding to the value of the number of sets is advanced as a basic effect time (10 s) as a time obtained by multiplying the first fluctuation time (2 s) by a predetermined number of games (5 times corresponding to one set) .

  When the value of the in-ST management counter indicates the first game in one set (for example, the in-ST management counter has a value of “1”, “6”), the sub-CPU 71 determines 10s (10s-0s) Is calculated as the remaining effect time, and when it indicates the second game in one set (for example, the value of the management counter during ST is “2”, “7”), 8s (10s-2s) is remaining effect time If it is the third game in one set (for example, the value of the management counter in ST is "3", "8"), 6s (10s-4s) is calculated as the remaining effect time. If the fourth game in one set (for example, the value of the management counter in ST indicates "4", "9"), 4s (10s-6s) is calculated as the remaining presentation time, and 5 in one set Game eyes ( Eg to "5" value in ST management counter, when it indicates a "10") calculates 2s the (10s-8s) as the remaining effect time. That is, the sub CPU 71 calculates the remaining effect time with respect to the basic effect time according to the number of remaining games in one set. When this process ends, the process moves to S471.

  In S470, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to calculate the remaining effect time of the basic effect time of one set from the value of the management counter in ST, but the present invention is not limited to this. An in-set counter may be provided to count the number of games (or the number of effects), and processing may be performed to calculate (select) the remaining effect time of the basic effect time for one set from the value of the in-set counter. For example, when the value of the in-set counter indicates the first game in one set (for example, the value of the in-set counter is “1”), the sub CPU 71 calculates (selects) 10s as the remaining effect time If the second game in one set (for example, the value of the in-set counter indicates “2”), 8s is calculated (selected) as the remaining presentation time, and the third game in one set (for example, When the value of the in-set counter indicates “3”, 6s is calculated (selected) as the remaining effect time, and the fourth game in one set (for example, the in-set counter has a value of “4”) When it is shown, 4s is calculated (selected) as the remaining presentation time, and when it is the one showing the fifth game in one set (for example, the value of the in-set counter is “5”), 2s It may be calculated (selected) as the remaining effect time.

  In S471, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 is the same as the fluctuation time determined in the fluctuation. For example, if the remaining rendering time is 6 s (6000 ms) and the variation time is also 6 s (6000 ms), the sub CPU 71 determines that the remaining rendering time and the variation time are the same. If it is determined that the remaining presentation time and the fluctuation time are the same, the process proceeds to S472. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining presentation time and the fluctuation time are not the same, the processing is shifted to S473.

  In S472, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the jackpot notification effect data at the end of the set. The jackpot notification presentation data at the end of the set is presentation data for notifying transition to the jackpot gaming state in synchronization with the end of the set currently being executed in the story section of the ST mode. In this way, when the remaining presentation time and the variation time are the same, the story presentation in the set is normally executed until the current running set ends, and a big hit occurs at the end of the current running set It is announced. In addition, that big hit was achieved by the combination pattern of the decorative symbols at the end of the set without setting the big hit notification use data at the end of the set (that is, not giving notice of having become a big hit by the dedicated effect) May be announced. When this process ends, the in-ST story effect pattern change processing routine ends.

  In S473, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 is longer than the fluctuation time determined in the fluctuation. For example, if the remaining effect time is 8s (8000 ms) and the change time is 6s (6000 ms), the sub CPU 71 determines that the remaining effect time is longer than the change time. If it is determined that the remaining effect time is longer than the fluctuation time, the process proceeds to S474. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining presentation time is not longer than the fluctuation time (the remaining presentation time is shorter than the fluctuation time), the processing is shifted to S475.

  In S474, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of advancing the story effect pattern determined so that the remaining effect time and the change time become the same. For example, when the remaining presentation time is 8 s (8000 ms) and the variation time is 6 s (6000 ms), 8 s (8000 ms) in the case of executing the story presentation in the set as usual until the current running set ends. Although necessary, the sub CPU 71 advances the story presentation in the set so that the story presentation in the remaining set is completed in 6s (6000 ms), and the end of the remaining presentation time and the end of the fluctuation time are Control to synchronize. In addition, after progressing the story effect in the set, similarly to the process of S 472, the effect data for the big hit at the end of the set is set, and it is notified that the big hit is made at the end of the currently running set. Alternatively, different effect data may be set. Moreover, it may be possible to notify that it has been a big hit by combining the decorative symbols at the end of the set without notifying that it has been a big hit. When this process ends, the in-ST story effect pattern change processing routine ends.

  In S475, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of calculating the effect available time by subtracting the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 from the fluctuation time. That is, when the remaining presentation time is shorter than the fluctuation time, the sub CPU 71 is a predetermined set after the current running set, and is a big hit at the end of the set, and the story presentation is ended. In the effect end target set, the effect available time for synchronizing the end of the effect end target set and the end of the fluctuation time is calculated. If this process ends, the process moves to S476.

  In S476, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the effect available time calculated in the process of S475 is longer than the basic effect time (10 s (10000 ms)). For example, if the remaining rendering time is 4s (4000ms) and the fluctuation time is 30s (30000ms), the rendering available time is calculated to be 26s (26000ms). In this case, the sub CPU 71 calculates the rendering available time (26s). ) Is determined to be longer than the basic effect time (10 s). If it is determined that the effect available time is longer than the basic effect time, the process proceeds to S477. On the other hand, when it is determined that the available production time is not longer than the basic presentation time (ie, the available production time is shorter than the basic presentation time), the process proceeds to S478.

  In S477, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting special effect data during ST which suggests that a big hit will be made in the effect end target set. In the present embodiment, when the effectable time is longer than the basic effect time, the effect end target set is a set of the current execution set and after. In this case, as the so-called premier effect, it is decided to execute a suggested effect (special effect mode) of the big hit based on the special effect data during ST. The process of S477 may be performed without performing the process of S476. That is, even when the effect termination target set is the next set of the currently-running set, it is also possible to execute the jackpot suggestion effect (special effect mode) based on the special effect data in ST. A specific screen display example (example of presentation) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 102 to 110.

  In S478, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a set of story effect patterns following the determined story effect pattern such that the available time and the end time of the effect end target set are the same. For example, when the playable time is 6 s (6000 ms), the sub CPU 71 causes the sub CPU 71 to set the story effect in the next set, which is the end target set, because the set following the current set is the end target set. By determining the story effect pattern to be ended in 6s (6000 ms), control is performed such that the end of the effectable time and the end of the effect of the effect end target set are synchronized. In addition, after executing the story effect in the effect end target set, similarly to the process of S 472, the effect data for the big hit notification at the end of the set is set to notify that the jackpot has become a big hit at the end of the effect end object set. Alternatively, different effect data may be set. Moreover, it may be possible to notify that it has been a big hit by the combination pattern of the decorative symbols at the end of the set to which the effect is to be ended without notifying that it has become a big hit. When this process ends, the in-ST story effect pattern change processing routine ends.

[Item pre-reading effect processing]
FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing an item pre-reading effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The item pre-reading effect process is a process when an item pre-reading effect is determined as the effect pattern in the normal mode or the time saving mode, and is performed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 85, in S480, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not it is the start of the fluctuation. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol variation pattern in the present symbol variation is the special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designating command for which the item prefetch effect is determined. If it is determined that the change is started, the process proceeds to S481. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change is not the case, the process proceeds to S482.

  In S481, the sub CPU 71 executes an item use effect process that basically performs effects for using all the plates after obtaining all the plates as the items in the variation. The item use effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the item pre-reading effect processing routine ends.

  In S482, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not there is an acquisition plate. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not any one of the plate A, the plate B, the plate C, and the plate D corresponding to the item prefetching effect (see FIGS. 54 and 55) which has been determined is one or more. Do. If it is determined that there is an acquisition plate, the process proceeds to S483. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no acquisition plate, the item pre-reading effect processing routine is ended.

  In S 482, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the special symbol variation pattern is a shortening variation. If it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is a shortening variation, the item prefetching effect processing routine is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is not the shortening variation, the processing is shifted to S484.

  In S 484, the sub CPU 71 executes an item acquisition effect process to determine whether or not the player is to acquire the plate as an item in advance before the change. The item acquisition effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the item pre-reading effect processing routine ends.

  Thus, in the item pre-reading effect, there may be a case where an item (for example, a plate) is obtained before the change, or there may be a case where all items (for example, a plate) are obtained in the change. , If a reduced fluctuation (for example, a shortened fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is 2000 ms) is determined as the special symbol fluctuation pattern, since the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the normal fluctuation (for example, the normal fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is 4000 ms) The item acquisition effect process is not performed, and the item (for example, the plate) is not acquired in advance (that is, the advance notification effect in the item acquisition effect process described later is not performed). By configuring in this way, even in the case of executing item pre-reading effect, it is possible to prevent the balance of the effect from being broken from the relationship with the fluctuation time (in particular, shortening fluctuation). In addition, in the predetermined symbol variation before the change, the normal variation was determined as a special symbol variation pattern, but according to the number of pending (for example, according to the number of pending being 3 or more) Even when it is changed, similarly, in the process of S 482, it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is the shortening variation, and the item acquisition effect process is not performed.

[Item use effect processing]
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the item use presentation process executed by the sub CPU 71. The item use rendering process is a process for basically performing rendering using all the plates after acquiring all the plates as the items in the variation, and is performed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in S490, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not there is an acquired plate. That is, the sub CPU 71 does not acquire all plates even by the item acquisition effect process described later, and the plate A, plate B, and plate C corresponding to the item prefetching effect (see FIGS. 54 and 55) which has been determined. , And whether or not one of the plates D is one or more. If it is determined that there is an acquired plate, the process proceeds to S491. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no acquisition plate, the process proceeds to S492.

  In S491, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting plate acquisition effect data for acquiring all the remaining plates. For example, “Item prefetch effect 15” (see FIGS. 54 and 55) has been determined, and there are one plate A, one plate B, one plate C, and one plate D as the remaining plates. In this case, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for performing an effect of sequentially acquiring the plates A to D at the start of the fluctuation. If this process ends, the process moves to S492.

  In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-series effect. Basically, the decorative symbol starts its fluctuation in response to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol and stops its fluctuation in response to the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, but the pseudo-series effect is during the fluctuation of the special symbol It is an effect that makes it possible to perform temporary stop and re-variation only on the decorative symbol as if pseudo-pattern variations have been performed pseudo-simulatively. The number of times of temporary stop and re-variation of this decorative symbol is the number of pseudo stations (the number of pseudo stations), and the greater the number of pseudo stations, the higher the expectation that is a big hit. In addition, for example, when the determined effect pattern is "item prefetch effect 15", in more detail, "item prefetch effect 15" (pseudo series effect data = pseudo run number 0 times)-"item prefetch effect" It is possible to determine one of “15” (pseudo-series effect data = the number of pseudo-stations four times). That is, even in the case of the same “item prefetching effect 15” in the representation of the effect pattern, there are effect patterns having different numbers of pseudo-runs (0 to 4 times). However, from the viewpoint of achieving consistency of the effects, when the number of pseudo stations is zero, the effect pattern of the item pre-reading effect in which the number of plates A is one or more is not determined. As described above, in S492, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect pattern having the number of pseudo-runs of 1 or more is determined. If it is determined that there is a pseudo series effect, the process proceeds to S493. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no pseudo-series effect, the process proceeds to S496.

  In S493, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the plate A has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate A has been acquired, the process proceeds to S494. On the other hand, when it is determined that the plate A has not been acquired, the processing is shifted to S495.

  In S494, the sub CPU 71 executes a plate A use presentation process. The plate A use presentation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S496.

  In S495, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set pseudo-series effect data predetermined by the effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 controls so as to perform the pseudo-series effect according to the predetermined number of pseudo-trains (0 to 4). If this process ends, the process moves to S496.

  In S 496, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether there is a speech effect. The speech effect is an effect of displaying a speech of a predetermined character on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display 4 while the special symbol is fluctuating, and displays the jackpot expectation different depending on the color of the speech. It is a thing. As an example, it is assumed that the expectation that is a big hit in the order of serif (white), serif (yellow), serif (green) and serif (red) is high. In addition, for example, when the determined effect pattern is "item prefetch effect 15", more specifically, "item prefetch effect 15" (no speech effect data = no speech effect), "item prefetch effect 15" It is possible to determine any one of (serif effect data = serif (white)) to “item prefetch effect 15” (serif effect data = serif (red)). That is, even in the case of the same "item pre-reading effect 15" in the representation of the effect pattern, there will be effect patterns having different presence and color of the speech effect. However, from the viewpoint of achieving consistency of the effects, when there is no speech effect, the effect pattern of the item pre-reading effect in which the number of plates B is one or more is not determined. Thus, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an effect pattern having a speech effect is determined. If it is determined that there is a speech effect, the process proceeds to S497. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no speech effect, the process proceeds to S500.

  In S497, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the plate B has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate B has been acquired, the process proceeds to S498. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S499.

  In S498, the sub CPU 71 executes plate B use presentation processing. This plate B use presentation process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S500.

  In S499, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set speech effect data predetermined by the effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs control so that the speech effect according to the color of the predetermined speech effect is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S500.

  In S500, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not there is a cut-in effect. The cut-in effect is an effect in which a predetermined character is cut-in and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display 4 while the special symbol is changing, and if the cut-in color is different from the expectation that is a big hit Let it be displayed. As an example, it is assumed that the degree of expectation of being a big hit is high in the order of cut-in (white), cut-in (yellow), cut-in (green), and cut-in (red). In addition, for example, when the determined effect pattern is "item prefetch effect 15", more specifically, "item prefetch effect 15" (no cut-in effect data = no cut-in effect), "item prefetch effect" It is possible to determine one of “15” (cut-in effect data = cut-in (white)) to “item prefetch effect 15” (cut-in effect data = cut-in (red)). That is, even in the case of the same "item prefetch effect 15" in the representation of the effect pattern, there will be effect patterns having different presence / absence and color of cut-in effect. However, from the viewpoint of achieving consistency of effects, when there is no cut-in effect, the effect pattern of the item pre-reading effect in which the number of plates C is one or more is not determined. Thus, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an effect pattern having a cut-in effect has been determined. If it is determined that there is a cut-in effect, the process moves to S501. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no cut-in effect, the process proceeds to S504.

  In S501, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the plate C has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate C has been acquired, the process moves to S502. On the other hand, when it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the processing is shifted to S503.

  In S502, the sub CPU 71 executes a plate C use presentation process. This plate C use presentation process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S504.

  In S503, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting cut-in effect data predetermined by the effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs control such that a cut-in effect corresponding to a predetermined color of the cut-in effect is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S504.

  In S504, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the plate D has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, when it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the processing is shifted to S506.

  In S505, the sub CPU 71 executes a plate D use presentation process. The plate D has a higher probability of being acquired relatively when the result (hit) of the big hit judgment is a hit than in the case of a loss (see FIGS. 54 and 55). The degree of expectation that is a big hit is high only by acquiring. In this process, if the result (hit) of the big hit judgment is the hit, and the big hit symbol is “probability 1” to “probability 6”, the sub CPU 71 determines a hit production pattern to be described later with reference to FIG. 91. In the case where the plate D is carried over such that the plate D is used in the process, it is possible to carry out the process of carrying the plate D over. Further, in other cases, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting special effect change data. The special effect change data is the direct or indirect effect of the plate D on the effect data set in the process of S494 (FIG. 87), S495, S498 (FIG. 88), S499, S502 (FIG. 89) or S503. This is data for changing the effect to be performed so that the degree of expectation is higher. For example, even if it is determined that there is a cut-in effect and it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the special effect change data determines that the cut-in effect data predetermined by the effect pattern is S502 (see FIG. Change in the same way as in 89). At that time, an effect of using the plate D directly may be performed, or an effect of converting the plate D into the plate C and using it may be performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S506.

  In addition, the aspect of the change of the presentation based on special presentation change data is not restricted to the aspect mentioned above. As an example, it may be possible to adopt an aspect in which the effect is changed so as to be notified that the jackpot has become a big hit by the variable display mode and the stop display mode different from the normal decorative symbol change display mode and the stop display mode. For example, in a predetermined effect mode (including the effect mode in the item fluctuation of the item pre-reading effect), first, reach the state, from there the effect occurs (develops) before the decorative symbol is completely stopped display, it is a super reach state After that, when it is a big hit, the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and when it is not a big hit, it is configured to be stopped and displayed at a reach losing eye. In the case of a big hit in the variation, the special effect change data is set (ie, the plate D has been acquired), and in the case of being originally, a predetermined effect In the embodiment, the place where the combination of the decoration symbols is stopped and displayed in a specific display manner is determined that the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed at a reach losing eye, and thereafter After performing the effect of starting the normal fluctuation of the next simulated game, the effect of using the plate D is performed, and the effect is changed so that the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. Good. Furthermore, as another example, when there is a plurality of super reach states having different degrees of expectation, the degree of expectation is more on the basis that special effect change data is set (that is, that plate D is acquired). The presentation may be changed to generate a high super reach state.

  In S506, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the number of obtained plates. In addition, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of clearing (off) the flag during item pre-reading effect. When this process ends, the item use effect processing routine ends.

[Plate A use effect processing]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing plate A use presentation processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The plate A use effect process is a process for causing the obtained plate A to act to perform a pseudo-series effect in the variation, and is performed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in S510, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the number of pseudo stations is larger than the number of plates A acquired. For example, if the number of pseudo stations is three and the number of plates A acquired is two, the sub CPU 71 determines that the number of pseudo stations is larger than the number of plates A acquired. If it is determined that the number of pseudo stations is greater than the number of plates A obtained, the process proceeds to S511. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of pseudo stations is not greater than the number of plates A obtained (the number of pseudo stations is equal to or less than the number of plates A obtained), the process proceeds to S512.

  In S511, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data of pseudo continuous temporary stop. In addition, the screen display example (example of presentation) of the effect of pseudo continuous temporary stop is later mentioned using FIGS. 111-113. When this process ends, the process moves to S513.

  In S512, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data for normal temporary stop, effect data for using plate A, and effect data for pseudo continuous temporary stop. In addition, the screen display example (example of presentation) of the effect of normal temporary stop and plate A use is later mentioned using FIGS. 111-113. When this process ends, the process moves to S513.

  In S513, the sub CPU 71 performs update processing of the number of pseudo stations in which the number of pseudo stations is decremented by one. When this process ends, the process moves to S514.

  In S514, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the number of pseudo runs is "0". If it is determined that the number of pseudo stations is “0”, the plate A use effect processing routine is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of pseudo stations is not "0", the process proceeds to S510.

[Process for using plate B]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing plate B use presentation processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The plate B use effect process is a process for causing the acquired plate B to act to execute the speech effect in the variation, and is performed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in S520, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for temporarily setting speech effect data having a lower degree of expectation than the predetermined speech effect data according to the number of plates B. For example, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the predetermined serif effect data is a serif (red) and the number of the plate B is one, the serif (green) which is a serif effect data having a low expectation for one plate B. Temporarily set. Further, for example, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the predetermined serif effect data is a serif (red) and the number of the plates B is two, the sub CPU 71 is a serif that is a serif effect data having a low expectation for two plates B Temporarily set yellow). When this process ends, the process moves to S521.

  In S521, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the temporarily set speech effect data with a low degree of expectation, presentation data for using the plate B, and the original speech effect data. By setting these effect data, if the number of plates B is one in the above example, an effect corresponding to the word effect data of the words (green) is executed first, and then the plate B The effect corresponding to the effect data using one image is executed and it is informed that the expectation of the speech effect is high, and finally the effect corresponding to the speech effect data of the speech (red) is performed. Further, in the above-described example, when the number of plates B is two, an effect corresponding to the speech effect data of the speech (yellow) is first executed, and next, it corresponds to the effect data in which two plates B are used It is informed that the effect to be performed is performed and the expectation of the speech effect is high, and finally the effect corresponding to the speech data of the speech (red color) is performed. That is, the expectation of the speech effect can be produced as if the plate B acts to improve it. When this process ends, the plate B use effect processing routine ends.

[Process using plate C effect]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a plate C use presentation process executed by the sub CPU 71. The plate C use effect process is a process for causing the obtained plate C to act and performing a cut-in effect in the variation, and is performed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in S530, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for temporarily setting cut-in effect data having a lower degree of expectation than the predetermined cut-in effect data according to the number of plates C. For example, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the cut-in effect data determined in advance is cut-in (red) and the number of plates C is one, the cut is the cut-in effect data having a low expectation for one plate C. Temporarily set in (green). Further, for example, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the cut-in effect data determined in advance is cut-in (red) and the number of plates C is two, the cut-in effect data having a low expectation for two plates C Temporarily set a certain cut-in (yellow). When this process ends, the process moves to S531.

  In S521, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the temporarily set cut-in effect data with a low degree of expectation, effect data for using the plate C, and the original cut-in effect data. By setting these effect data, if the number of plates C is one in the above example, an effect corresponding to the cut-in effect data of cut-in (green) is executed first, and then The effect corresponding to the effect data using one plate C is executed to notify that the expectation of the cut-in effect is high, and finally the effect corresponding to the cut-in effect data of the cut-in (red) is executed Ru. In the above example, when the number of plates C is two, the effect corresponding to the cut-in effect data of cut-in (yellow) is executed first, and then the effect corresponding to the effect data using two plates C It is informed that the effect to be performed is performed and the expectation of the cut-in effect is high, and finally the effect corresponding to the cut-in effect data of the cut-in (red) is performed. That is, the expectation of the cut-in effect can be performed as if the plate C acts to improve it. When this process ends, the plate C use effect processing routine ends.

[Item acquisition effect processing]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the item acquisition effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The item acquisition effect process is a process for executing an effect of causing the player to acquire a plate as an item before the change, and is performed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in S540, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the plate A has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate A is obtained, the process proceeds to S541. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S544. In S541, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of executing a plate A display lottery that determines whether or not to display the effect image indicating that the plate A has been acquired, in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the process moves to S542.

  In S542, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the plate A display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate A display lottery is won, the process proceeds to S543. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A display lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to S544.

  In S543, the sub CPU 71 performs update processing of the number of plates A by subtracting one from the number of plates A. If there are a plurality of plates A, it may be determined whether to display one by one by the above-mentioned plate A display lottery, or it may be determined whether to display a plurality of the number of plates A. It may be In the latter case, the number of plates A is reduced in this process. When this process ends, the process moves to S544.

  In S544, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the plate B has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate B has been acquired, the process proceeds to S545. On the other hand, when it is determined that the plate B has not been acquired, the processing is shifted to S548.

  In S545, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of performing a plate B display lottery to determine whether or not to display the effect image indicating that the plate B has been acquired, in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S546.

  In S546, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the plate B display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate B display lottery is won, the process proceeds to S547. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B display lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to S548.

  In S547, the sub CPU 71 performs the updating process of the number of plates B in which the number of plates B is decremented by one. If there are a plurality of plates B, it may be determined whether to display one by one by the above-mentioned plate B display lottery, and it may be determined whether to display a plurality of the number of plates B. It may be In the latter case, the number of plates B is subtracted in this process. If this process ends, the process moves to S548.

  In S548, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the plate C has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate C has been acquired, the process proceeds to S549. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S552.

  In S549, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of performing a plate C display lottery to determine whether or not to display the effect image indicating that the plate C has been acquired, in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S550.

  In S550, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the plate C display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate C display lottery is won, the process proceeds to S551. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C display lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to S552.

  In S551, the sub CPU 71 performs the updating process of the number of plates C in which the number of plates C is decremented by one. If there are a plurality of plates C, it may be determined whether to display one by one by the above-mentioned plate C display lottery, or it may be determined whether to display a plurality of the number of plates C. It may be In the latter case, the number of plates C is subtracted in this process. If this process ends, the process moves to S552. In S552, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the plate D has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process proceeds to S553. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S556.

  In S553, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of executing a plate D display lottery to determine whether or not to display the effect image indicating that the plate D has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the process moves to S554.

  In S554, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the plate D display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate D display lottery is won, the process proceeds to S555. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D display lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to S556.

  In S555, the sub CPU 71 performs update processing of the number of plates D in which the number of plates D is reduced by one. If there are a plurality of plates D, it may be determined whether to display one by one by the above-mentioned plate D display lottery, or it may be determined whether to display a plurality of plates D. It may be In the latter case, the number of plates D is subtracted in this process. When this process ends, the process moves to S556.

  In S556, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting plate display effect data according to the plate that has won the display lottery (S541, S545, S549, S553). By the plate display effect data, the number of the target plate selected in each of the display lottery described above is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 as a effect image. When this process ends, the item acquisition effect processing routine ends.

  Here, as an example in the case of acquiring a plate (item) by the item acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 91, it is determined that the item use effect process shown in FIG. In this case (the case where the special symbol game after three games is the variation), and the case in which each of the plates A to D is obtained is described as an example.

  In the special symbol game of the first game (two games before the change), for example, when winning the plate A display lottery and the plate D display lottery, a rendering image showing that one plate A is obtained, and An effect image indicating that one plate D has been acquired is displayed on the display area 4 A of the liquid crystal display device 4. Next, in the special symbol game of the second game (one game before the change), for example, when the plate B display lottery is won, an effect image indicating that one plate B is obtained is the liquid crystal display device 4 Is displayed in the display area 4A. Then, in the special symbol game of the third game (the variation), one plate C is acquired for the remaining plates C which are not shown to be acquired by the item acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 91. Is displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 (see S491 in FIG. 86), and an item prefetching effect using these plates (items) is performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, before the change is started, the advance notification effect (for example, obtaining the plates A to D) for notifying the type of the item (for example, the plates A to D) in the item prefetching effect It is comprised so that it may be determined whether the presentation image which shows that it is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform preread effects more rich in change (effect based on start memory before execution of fluctuation) when giving a big hit notice (notice of transition to a specific gaming state). .

[Perform production pattern determination processing]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit effect pattern determination process is a process for determining a hit effect pattern which is an effect pattern in the big hit gaming state, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 91, in S560, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the hit effect pattern flag indicates the hit pattern 12. Here, the hit effect pattern flag is an internal flag indicating the hit patterns 1 to 12 (see FIG. 50), and the hit effect pattern flags “01H” to “0CH” are set corresponding to each of the hit patterns 1 to 12. Be done. In addition, the hit effect pattern flag may be set according to the information of the big hit symbol included in the received symbol specification command, and may be set according to the same information included in the received hit start display command. It may be That is, in this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the type of the jackpot to be started is the hit pattern 12 (the jackpot symbol “probable variation 1” of the second special symbol). If it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag indicates the hit pattern 12, the process proceeds to S561. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag does not indicate the hit pattern 12, the process proceeds to S566.

  In S561, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the ST mode is in progress. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the value of the effect mode flag described above is "03H". If it is determined that the ST mode is in effect, the process moves to S563. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ST mode is not in progress, the process moves to S562.

  In S562, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining an promotion pattern for promotion for SP bonus. Since the hit effect pattern flag indicates the hit pattern 12 and the ST mode is not in progress, it is basically the case that the big hit symbol "Probability 1" of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving mode. The promotion bonus effect pattern for SP bonus indicating the transition (promotion) to the ST mode through the SP bonus in the second special symbol per time from the short time mode is determined. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is ended.

  In S563, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the in-ST management counter is "50" or less. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a big hit (whether a big hit has continued) was made in the story section of the ST mode. If it is determined that the value of the in-ST management counter is “50” or less, the process proceeds to S564. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the in-ST management counter is not “50” or less, the process proceeds to S565.

  In S564, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining an effect pattern per related story for the SP bonus, in accordance with the value of the ST serial counter and the value of the in-ST management counter. In the present embodiment, a series of story effects in the story section of the ST mode is to be advanced according to the number of consecutive jackpots in the ST mode (the value of the ST consecutive loin counter). A series of story effects being performed are also inherited when transitioning from the story section in ST mode to the SP bonus in the second special symbol. Therefore, the related story per SP bonus for the SP bonus according to the number of consecutive hits in ST mode (the value of ST consecutive counter) and the progress of the story in the story section of ST mode (the value of the management counter in ST) It is decided to determine the presentation pattern. In addition, the screen display example (example of presentation) of the effect pattern per related story for SP bonus will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is ended.

  In S565, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining an effect pattern per battle for SP bonus. The production pattern per battle for SP bonus is a hit presentation pattern determined when a big hit occurs in the battle reach section in ST mode, and one character (for example, allied characters) in the battle reach section in ST mode and the other It is a hit effect pattern for executing an effect related to a battle scene of a character of (for example, an enemy character) in the SP bonus. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is ended.

  In S566, the sub CPU 71 refers to the hit rendering pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) and performs processing for determining a hit rendering pattern in accordance with the type of the hit pattern indicated by the hit rendering pattern flag. Note that, as described above, when determining a hit effect pattern according to the type of a more detailed hit pattern (for example, hit pattern 1-1 to 46), define a hit effect pattern flag in more detail. Alternatively, the hit presentation pattern may be determined according to the hit presentation pattern flag and other information indicating a more detailed hit pattern. If this process ends, the process moves to S567.

  In S567, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the plate D has been acquired. More specifically, in the plate D use effect process of S505 of the item use effect process shown in FIG. 86, it is determined whether the number of plates D carried over is one or more. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process proceeds to S568. On the other hand, when it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the hit effect pattern determination processing routine is ended.

  In S568, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of changing a hit effect pattern so as to be a promoted (reversed) pattern according to the type of the hit pattern determined. For example, when the live bonus (live bonus 9R success) is determined as the hit effect pattern, if the plate D is acquired, the live bonus (live bonus 4R failure) is temporarily set as the effect pattern. And processing for setting effect data corresponding to the temporarily set live bonus (live bonus 4R failure), effect data for using plate D, and effect data corresponding to the live bonus (live bonus 9R success). By setting these effect data, in the live bonus, the effect corresponding to the effect data corresponding to the live bonus (live bonus 4R failure) is executed first, and then, in the first branch section described later, The effect corresponding to the effect data of use of the plate D is executed to notify that the live bonus is promoted (reversed), and thereafter the effect corresponding to the effect data corresponding to the live bonus (success in live bonus 9R) is executed In order to change the hit production pattern. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is ended.

[Perform start presentation processing]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a hit start effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit start effect processing is processing for starting effects in the big hit gaming state based on the determined hit effect pattern, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in S570, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether a music pattern (see FIG. 56) is determined as a hit effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether to start the live bonus in the first special symbol hit. If it is determined that the music pattern is determined as the hit effect pattern, the process proceeds to S571. On the other hand, when it is determined that the music pattern is not determined as the hit effect pattern, the process proceeds to S572.

  In S571, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a valid period timer according to the start time of an initial section to be described later of the determined music pattern. That is, when the music pattern is determined as the hit effect pattern, the sub CPU 71 performs control to start the effect by the music pattern from a predetermined time before the start of the big hit gaming state. For example, when the hit start interval time is 10000 ms, 4000 ms is set as the valid period timer. In addition, about the presentation example of a music pattern, and the example of a screen display, it mentions later using FIG. 94, FIG. 53, FIG. 55 and FIG. When this process ends, the hit start effect processing routine ends.

  In S572, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a valid period timer corresponding to the time corresponding to the hit start interval time. That is, when the music pattern is not determined as the hit effect pattern, the sub CPU 71 performs control to start the effect according to the hit effect pattern in synchronization with the start of the big hit gaming state. For example, when the hit start interval time is 10000 ms, 10000 ms is set as the valid period timer. When this process ends, the hit start effect processing routine ends.

[Per win end production processing]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the hit / termination effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit / termination effect process is a process for ending the effect in the big hit gaming state based on the determined hit effect pattern, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 93, in S580, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the hit effect pattern flag indicates a probability change. That is, the sub CPU 71 finishes the type of big hit that ends with the hit patterns 1 to 6 (the big hit symbols “probable change 1” to “probable change 6” of the first special symbol) or the hit pattern 12 (big hit symbols “secondary symbol 1 for the second special symbol ") Is determined. If it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag indicates a probability change, the process proceeds to S581. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag does not indicate a definite change, the process proceeds to S585.

  In S581, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the ST continuous play counter is "1" or more. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the big hit (in which the big hit has continued) in the ST mode. If it is determined that the value of the ST row counter is “1” or more, the process proceeds to S582. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ST tandem counter is not “1” or more (“0”), the process proceeds to S583.

  In S 582, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process of the ST interline counter, which adds 1 to the value of the ST interline counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S584.

  In S583, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "1" as an initial value of the ST tandem counter. As a result, the first series of story effects are performed in the story section of ST mode after the so-called first hit. If this process ends, the process moves to S584.

  In the present embodiment, the number of consecutive units excluding the so-called first hit is counted using the ST consecutive unit counter, but it is also possible to separately count the number of consecutive units including the first hit. . In this case, it is possible to separately provide a continuous counter for counting the number of consecutive starts including the first hit, and from the value of the ST continuous counter (for example, add 1 to the value of the ST continuous counter). The number of consecutive times including the first hit may be counted. By counting the number of consecutive times including the first hit in this manner, the count result may be displayed separately from the series of story effects. For example, when the first series of story effects described above are being performed, the game is displayed regardless of the contents of the effect by displaying “Big wins 2 consecutive” as the display of the number of consecutive nights including the first hit. It is possible to make the player roughly grasp the number of game media acquired.

  In S584, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "0" as an initial value of the management counter during ST. Thus, the number of games in the so-called ST mode story section is managed from the beginning. If this process ends, the process moves to S585.

  In S585, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether a music pattern (see FIG. 56) is determined as a hit effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the end time of the live bonus in the first special symbol hit. If it is determined that the music pattern is determined as the hit effect pattern, the hit end effect processing routine is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the music pattern is not determined as the hit effect pattern, the process proceeds to S586.

  In S586, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data at the end of the bonus according to the type of the hit effect pattern. Here, when the hit effect pattern is a music pattern, when the effect corresponding to the music pattern started in the hit start effect process (see FIG. 92) is not finished, the effect is preferentially executed. It is assumed that the effect data at the end of the bonus is not set. That is, the effect corresponding to the music pattern is not overwritten on the effect at the end of the bonus. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

  Although illustration is omitted, in this hit end effect processing, the sub CPU 71 operates the return button 24 to return a card (for example, a pre-paid card) from the card unit 84 at the end of so-called first hit. Processing for setting a forcible card removal notification effect data to execute a forcible card removal notification for prompting the player. This card removal notification may be executed along with the effect corresponding to the effect data at the end of the bonus, and at the end of the so-called first hit, it is executed instead of the effect corresponding to the effect data at the end of the bonus It may be In addition, it is also possible to execute the card removal notification even when the hit effect pattern is a music pattern and the effect of the music pattern is not finished at the end of the so-called first hit.

  Next, various effects in the present embodiment will be described using examples of effects and screen display examples with reference to FIGS. 94 to 113.

[Example of live bonus presentation]
FIG. 93 and FIG. 94 are diagrams showing an example of presentation of a live bonus. FIGS. 93 and 94 show an example of effects in the case of the music pattern A as an example of the live bonus.

  The upper part of FIG. 94 shows an example of the effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 1 and the music pattern A (success) of the live bonus is selected as the hit effect pattern. In the music pattern A (success), the music pattern A continues in the initial section (6s) where the intro portion in the music pattern A is output, the first section (22s) in which the A melody part in the music pattern A is output The first branch section (7s) which first shows whether or not the second section (22s) where the B melody part in the music pattern A is outputted, and the second which shows whether the music pattern A continues or not It consists of a branch section (9s) and a third section (25s) in which the chorus portion in the music pattern A is output to suggest that the specific second round game is executed. Note that the output time shown in parentheses in each section (including the fourth section and the fifth section described later) is an example, and the average digestion time of each round (for each long release or short release), between rounds It is assumed that the time corresponding to the interval and the tune and the like of the music corresponding to the music pattern can be set as appropriate.

  In the music pattern A (successful), an intro portion which is an initial common portion of the predetermined music is output from a predetermined time before the big hit gaming state starts, and then, the predetermined music is synchronized in synchronization with the start of the big hit gaming state A melody part which is the first common part is output, and then it is shown whether or not output of a predetermined music is continued in a predetermined branch period (first branch section) started from the end of the third R Next, the B melody part, which is the second common part of the predetermined music, is output from the middle of the 4th R, and then, in the specific branching period (the second branching period) starting from the beginning of the 7th R, It is indicated whether or not the output of the music piece continues, and then, from the middle of the 8th R, the chorus part which is a specific part of the predetermined music piece is output.

  The lower part of FIG. 94 shows an example of an effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 7 and the music pattern A (failed) of the live bonus is selected as the hit effect pattern. The music pattern A (failure) includes the above-mentioned initial section (6s), the above-mentioned first section (22s), the above-mentioned first branch section (7s), the above-mentioned second section (22s) and the above-mentioned A second branch section (9s) and a fourth section (13s) in which the chorus portion in the music pattern A is not output and it is suggested that the specific second round game is not executed are formed.

  In the music pattern A (failed) when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 7, an intro portion which is an initial common portion of the predetermined music is output from a predetermined time before the big hit gaming state starts, and then the big hit gaming state The A melody portion which is the first common portion of the predetermined music is output so as to synchronize with the start, and then, in the predetermined branching period (first branching period) starting from the end of the third R, It is indicated whether or not the output continues, and then, from the middle of the 4th R, the B melody part which is the second common part of the predetermined music is output, and then, a specific branch started from the beginning of the 7R In the period (the second branch section), it is indicated whether or not the output of the predetermined music continues, and then, from the middle of the eighth R, the chorus portion which is the specific part of the predetermined music is not output. Indicates that the round game is not executed That.

  The upper part of FIG. 95 shows an example of the effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 3 and the music pattern A (reverse) of the live bonus is selected as the hit effect pattern. As for the music pattern A (reversed), a predetermined second round game is produced by outputting a predetermined sound as the above-mentioned initial section (6s), the above-mentioned first section (22s), the above-mentioned first branch section (7s) It consists of a fifth section (13s) which is suggested to be implemented. The predetermined sound output in the fifth section may be a chorus portion in the music pattern A (that is, the third section and the fifth section may be the same), and the other in the music pattern A It may be a part (e.g., a C melody part), or it may be a specific sound effect associated with a predetermined music piece indicating that it has been reversed (that a specific second round game is to be performed). In addition, after this particular sound effect is output, a portion of the chorus portion or another portion may be output.

  In the music pattern A (reverse), an intro portion which is an initial common portion of a predetermined music is output from a predetermined time before the big hit gaming state starts, and then, the predetermined music is synchronized to start the big hit gaming state. A melody part which is the first common part is output, and then it is shown whether or not output of a predetermined music is continued in a predetermined branch period (first branch section) started from the end of the third R Next, a predetermined sound which is a specific part of a predetermined music is output from the middle of the fourth R.

  The lower part of FIG. 94 shows an example of an effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 8 and the music pattern A (failed) of the live bonus is selected as the hit effect pattern. The music pattern A (failure) is composed of the above-mentioned initial section (6s), the above-mentioned first section (22s), the above-mentioned first branch section (7s), and the above-mentioned fourth section (13s) There is.

  In the music pattern A (failed) when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 8, an intro portion which is an initial common portion of the predetermined music is output from a predetermined time before the big hit gaming state starts, and then the big hit gaming state The A melody portion which is the first common portion of the predetermined music is output so as to synchronize with the start, and then, in the predetermined branching period (first branching period) starting from the end of the third R, It is indicated whether or not the output continues, and next, it is indicated that the specific second round game is not executed from outputting the predetermined sound which is the specific part of the predetermined music from the middle of the 4th R.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even in the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 3 in which the specific second round game is executed, and in the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 8 in which the specific second round game is not executed, predetermined music The first common portion (for example, A melody of the first section) (for example, music corresponding to the music pattern A) is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, first branch section) is allowed to elapse. And, in the big hit game state of hitting pattern 3, after the passage of this specified branching period, the specified part of the specified music which suggests that the specified 2nd round game is executed (for example, reversal of the 5th section) Output. By configuring in this manner, the player's sense of expectation in the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined time when output of a specific part of a predetermined music piece is started (for example, an initial section is started 1R before execution of the specific second round game is started) By configuring the output of a predetermined music (for example, the output of the intro of the initial section) to be started from the waiting time before the start of the eyes, there is no need to monitor the round game, and the control load increases. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in any of the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 3, the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 8, the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 1 and the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 7 predetermined music (eg, The first common portion (for example, A melody of the first section) of the music according to the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is allowed to elapse. Here, in the big hit gaming state of hitting pattern 3, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, reverse of the fifth section) which suggests that a specific second round game is to be executed after the lapse of this predetermined branching period. In the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 1 and the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 7, the second common part (for example, B melody of the second section) of the predetermined music is further output, and a specific branching period (For example, the second branch section) is made to elapse. And, in the big hit gaming state of hitting pattern 1, after a lapse of this specific branching period, the specific part of the predetermined music (for example, the rust of the 3rd section) which suggests that the specific 2nd round game is executed Output. By configuring in this manner, the player's sense of expectation in the specific gaming state can be further enhanced.

  The music pattern B (success) and the music pattern C (decided) basically have the same configuration as the music pattern A (success), and the music pattern B (reverse) is basically the music pattern A (reverse) The music pattern B (failure) basically takes the same configuration as the music pattern A (failure), but the output time differs in part or all of the output time of each section defined It may be configured such that some of the defined sections are not provided.

  In addition, for example, in the first branch section and / or the second branch section, an effect that urges the pressing operation of the pressing operation button 9A may be performed, and based on the pressing operation button 9A having been operated a predetermined number of times, The portion of the predetermined music corresponding to the section following the section may be output earlier than when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated a predetermined number of times.

[Example of screen display at normal time]
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of screen display at normal time. The normal time here means the time of execution of the effect mode such as the normal mode or the time saving mode. As shown in the figure, basically, on the screen of the display area 4A at the normal time, basically, a plurality of decorative symbols 700, the first reserved number information 701 corresponding to the start storage of the first special symbol, and the second special The second hold number information 702 corresponding to the start storage of the symbol is displayed.

  The plurality of decorative symbols 700 are, for example, three columns, and the numeral symbols of "1" to "7" are displayed in a variable display mode or a stop display mode in each column. The plurality of decorative symbols 700 are variably displayed and stopped in conjunction with the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol. When changing from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state, the plurality of decorative symbols 700 basically become the stop display mode in a state where they are all aligned with the same numeric symbol from the state of the variable display mode. The stop display mode of the decorative symbol 700 other than these is basically lost.

  The first hold number information 701 and the second hold number information 702 are displayed by hold marks according to the hold number corresponding to the start storage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. The pending marks indicating the first pending number information 701 and the second pending number information 702 are additionally displayed up to four in accordance with the winning of the game balls to the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, respectively. The reserve mark indicating the first reserve number information 701 and the second reserve number information 702 is used when the decorative symbol starts fluctuating display with the special symbol based on the start storage of the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. It disappears from the right end side and disappears. If both the first holding number information 701 and the second holding number information 702 are displayed, the starting memory of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting memory of the first special symbol. 2 The pending mark of the pending number information 702 is erased prior to the pending mark of the first pending number information 701.

  Although not shown in the drawings, different display images, background images and the like are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in various effect modes according to the contents of the effect. Of course, the same display image, background image or the like may be displayed even in different effect modes.

[Display Example of Music Pattern A]
FIG. 97 and FIG. 98 are diagrams showing examples of screen display of the music pattern A. In the initial section, the first to fifth sections, the first branch section and the second branch section described above, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is interlocked with the output of the music from the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c. The effect image is also displayed. Although the effect image corresponding to the initial section is omitted in FIGS. 97 and 98, for example, it is assumed that an effect image such as a title display in which the song name is displayed according to the intro portion is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 97, in the first section of the music pattern A, a predetermined character sings the A melody part in conjunction with the output of the A melody part which is the first common part of the predetermined music The effect image is displayed, and in the first branch section of the music pattern A, the effect image indicating whether or not the output of the predetermined music is continued is displayed.

  Then, if the hit pattern is hit pattern 8, an effect image indicating that the specific second round game is not performed is displayed in the fourth section of music pattern A, and the hit pattern is hit pattern 3 In this case, in conjunction with the output of the predetermined sound that is the specific part of the predetermined music, an effect image indicating that the specific second round game is to be performed is displayed.

  When the hit pattern is hit pattern 1 or 7, as shown in FIG. 98, the predetermined character is interlocked with the output of the B melody portion which is the second common portion of the predetermined music. An effect image for singing the B melody portion is displayed, and in the second branch section of the music pattern A, an effect image indicating whether or not output of a predetermined music is continued is displayed.

  Then, if the hit pattern is hit pattern 7, an effect image indicating that the specific second round game is not executed is displayed in the fourth section of the music pattern A, and the hit pattern is hit pattern 1 In this case, in conjunction with the output of the chorus part which is a specific part of the predetermined music, an effect image indicating that a specific second round game is to be performed is displayed.

[Example of screen display of story section in ST mode]
FIG. 99 and FIG. 100 show examples of screen display of a story section in ST mode. As shown in FIG. 99, on the screen of the display area 4A in the story section in ST mode, the first hold count information 701 and the second hold count information 702 are displayed, and a story corresponding to the current number of sets. This set story display area 703 (first image display means) for displaying an image (first image) and a scheduled set for displaying a window image (second image) suggesting a story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time on A window display area 704 (second image display means) is provided. The decorative symbol 700 may be variably displayed superimposed on the set story display area 703 with a predetermined degree of transparency, and reduced to the set story display area 703, the scheduled set window display area 704, or other areas. It may be displayed in a variable manner. Alternatively, the decorative symbol 700 may not be displayed in the story section in the ST mode.

  As described above, in the story section of the ST mode, a series of story effects are to be performed according to the value of the current number of sets and the value of the ST middle row counter. For example, as shown in FIG. 100, when the value of the ST serial counter is “1”, the story effect of “the first story” which is the first story effect of the series of story effects is currently It is performed according to the value of the number of sets, and when the value of the ST serial counter is "2", "the second story" which is a story effect following the "first story" in the series of story effects The story effect of is performed according to the value of the current number of sets. At this time, story images 703a and 703b corresponding to the current number of sets are displayed in the set story display area 703, and window images 704a and 704b suggesting a story corresponding to the number of sets from next time on are scheduled set window display areas 704. Will be displayed.

  Also, for example, when the number of sets is updated to the next number of sets (one is added), a story image corresponding to the story suggested by the window image 704 a (704 b) is displayed in the set story display area 703. While being displayed, a plurality of window images displayed in the scheduled set window display area 704 slide in the left direction, and an update of the number of sets (that is, progress of a story effect) is notified. In FIG. 100, a white window image, a hatched window image, and a black window image displayed in the scheduled set window display area 704 are respectively shown as different window images (that is, different stories). In the form of

[Example screen display effect pattern per related story for SP bonus]
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example screen display of an effect pattern per related story for SP bonus. In this embodiment, in the story section of ST mode, a series of story effects are to be performed according to the value of the current number of sets and the value of the ST serial counter, and the big hit in the story section of ST mode When it becomes, the related pattern per related story for SP bonus related to the series of story effects is determined (see FIG. 91).

  The upper part of FIG. 101 shows an example screen display example of an effect pattern per related story for SP bonus when the value of the ST in-line counter is “1” and the value of the in-ST management counter is less than “26”. ing. In this screen display example, as an effect pattern per related story for the SP bonus related to the in-ST story effect pattern when the value of the ST in-line counter is "1", the value of the ST in-line counter is "1". The story outline of a series of story effects according to the story effect pattern during ST is displayed. That is, in this screen display example, a summary of stories in a series of story effects is displayed as the related story effects.

  The lower part of FIG. 101 shows a screen display example of the effect pattern per related story for SP bonus when the value of the ST in-line counter is “1” and the value of the in-ST management counter is “26” or more. ing. In this screen display example, as an effect pattern per related story for the SP bonus related to the in-ST story effect pattern when the value of the ST in-line counter is "1", the value of the ST in-line counter is "1". In the case of ST, the main scene of the story of a series of story effects by the story effect pattern during ST and the explanation (corresponding story) of the main scene are displayed. Note that, when displaying this name scene, a window image (second image) displayed in the above-described scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) is used. That is, in this screen display example, a story corresponding to a window image (second image) and a window image (second image) is displayed as the related story effect. Note that only the window image (second image) may be displayed as the related story effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when transitioning from the story section in ST mode to the SP bonus in the second special symbol, a series of SP bonus in the second special symbol per ST by the story effect pattern in ST is performed. The related story presentation is performed according to the presentation pattern per related story for SP bonus related to the story presentation. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately progress the story presentation without increasing the control load and the amount of information stored in the storage area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the related story presentation by the presentation pattern per SP story for the SP bonus corresponds to the progress degree of the story (for example, the value of the management counter during ST) in the series of story presentation by the story presentation pattern during ST. It is configured to be displayed. By configuring in this manner, a series of story effects performed in a predetermined section (for example, a story section in ST mode) in the special gaming state, and a specific gaming state (for example, SP bonus) in the special gaming state when it is a big hit While being able to give relevancy to the related story rendition to be performed in b), it is possible to perform an appropriate related story rendition in consideration of the time of the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, as the progress of the story in the series of story effects, when the value of the management counter in ST is less than “26” is the case where the progress of the story is small, the summary of the story in the series of story effects Is displayed, and when the value of the management counter during ST is “26” or more, the story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image) on the assumption that the progress degree is high in the story. Although it is supposed to be displayed, it is not limited to this.

  For example, according to the value of the management counter during ST (or the value of the set number counter), the display contents of the summary of the story in the related story presentation may be further varied. In this case, for a series of story effects, the summary may be displayed for other parts than the part already performed in the story section of ST mode, and the parts already performed in the story section of ST mode may be summarized. The other parts may be displayed as they are, which should have been made by a series of story effects. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display a summary of the story according to the progress of the story in the series of story effects. According to the present embodiment, when a series of story effects progress according to the number of consecutive hits (for example, the value of the ST continuous play counter) in the special game state (for example, ST mode), the next series The related story presentation in the specific gaming state (for example, the SP bonus) can be performed with the presentation contents of the story presentation and the presentation contents that do not generate a habit.

  Also, for example, according to the value of the management counter in ST (or the value of the set number counter), display contents of the story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image) are further displayed. It may be different. In this case, for a series of story effects, a story corresponding to a window image (second image) and a window image (second image) according to other parts than the part already performed in the story section in ST mode. It is also possible to display the window image (second image) corresponding to that portion and the story corresponding to the window image (second image) for the portion already performed in the story section in ST mode, For the other parts, the story that should have been performed by a series of story effects may be displayed as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display a window image (second image) and a story corresponding to the window image (second image) according to the progress degree of the story in the series of story effects. According to the present embodiment, when a series of story effects progress according to the number of consecutive hits (for example, the value of the ST continuous play counter) in the special game state (for example, ST mode), the next series While it is possible to perform related story effects in a specific gaming state (for example, SP bonus) with the effect contents of the story effect and the effect contents that do not produce a habit, the window image (second image) Since the related story effect is used, the effect image data can be reduced to secure more storage area.

[Example screen display of story effect pattern during ST]
102 to 110 are diagrams showing screen display examples of the story effect pattern in ST. FIGS. 102 to 110 show the contents of effects in the basic effect time (10 s) corresponding to one set (five special symbol games) in the story section of the ST mode. Display area 4A, set story display area 703 (first image display means), and scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) are the same as or similar to those shown in FIG. Therefore, the reference numerals are omitted in FIGS. 102 to 110. Moreover, about the 1st pending | holding number information 701 and the 2nd pending | holding number information 702, the description is abbreviate | omitted in FIGS. 102-110 for the facilities of description.

  In FIG. 102, in any of the first change to fifth change games, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a loss and the first corresponding to the first change time (for example, 2s) as a change pattern It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern in ST in predetermined one set in case the fluctuation pattern (For example, the fluctuation pattern which shows shortening fluctuation | variation) is determined. The remaining effect time is calculated based on the above-mentioned basic effect time (10 s) and the value of the in-ST management counter (or the value of the in-set counter) (see FIG. 84). / 5 to 5/5) indicates the number of games in one set. The same applies to FIGS. 103 to 110. In FIG. 102, since the remaining presentation time and the fluctuation time are synchronized, a series of story presentation in a predetermined set is to proceed based on the basic presentation time.

  In FIG. 103, in the first change and second change games, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a loss, and the above-described first change pattern corresponding to the above-described first change time is a change pattern. In the third fluctuation, the result of the big hit judgment (lottery result) is the hit, and a second fluctuation time (for example, 6s) longer than the above-mentioned first fluctuation time (for example, 2s) as the fluctuation pattern It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern in ST in one predetermined set in case the 2nd fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern which shows normal reach) corresponding to is determined. In FIG. 103, since the remaining rendering time and the fluctuation time are synchronized, a series of story effects in a predetermined set progress based on the basic effect time, and based on the jackpot notification effect data at the end of the predetermined set The jackpot announcement is to be performed.

  In FIG. 104, in the first variation game, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a loss, and the above-mentioned first variation pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned first variation time is determined as the variation pattern, 2 In the fluctuation, the result of the big hit judgment (lottery result) is the hit, and a second change time (for example, 6s) longer than the above-mentioned first change time (for example, 2s) as the change pattern It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern in ST in predetermined one set in case the 2 fluctuation patterns (for example, the fluctuation pattern which shows normal reach A) are determined. In FIG. 104, since the remaining presentation time is longer than the variation time, the second (2) of the in-set presentation (a part corresponding to the predetermined one set in a series of story effects) in the predetermined one set / 5) For the part corresponding to the fifth to fifth times (5/5), the in-set presentation is advanced so that the remaining presentation time and the fluctuation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining part of the in-set effect is advanced so that the remaining part of the in-set effect which is originally performed for 8 s as the remaining effect time ends in 6 s. In addition, the aspect which advances the remaining part of the in-set performance can take various aspects. For example, if the image data (video data) pertaining to the remaining part of the in-set effect is reproduced for 8 seconds, the control changes the reproduction speed (ie, performs fast-forward reproduction) so that the reproduction time is 6s. The control may be performed to change the frame rate (that is, to perform thinning-out reproduction). Further, these changed image data (video data) may be stored in advance. The same applies to FIGS. 106 and 110.

  In FIGS. 105 and 106, in the first to third games, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a loss, and the above-described first corresponding to the above-mentioned first fluctuation time as a fluctuation pattern The variation pattern is determined, and in the fourth variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is the hit, and a second variation time (for example, 2s) longer than the above-mentioned first variation time (for example, 2s) as the variation pattern , 10s) (for example, a fluctuation pattern indicating normal reach B), during the ST in the next one set (next set) following the predetermined one set and the predetermined one set, when it is determined It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of a story production pattern. In FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, since the variation time is longer than the remaining presentation time, the in-set presentation in a predetermined set is performed as the basic presentation time, and a series of story effects are advanced. Here, the presentation enabled time is calculated based on the second variation time (for example, 10s) and the remaining presentation time (for example, 4s which is the remaining presentation time for the fourth variation) (see FIG. 84). In the screen display examples shown in FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the effectable time is 6s. Further, since the effect available time is 6 seconds, the effect end target set is the next set. Then, for the in-set effects in the next set, the first (1/5) to the fifth in-set (5/5) of the in-set effects in the next set (parts corresponding to the next set in the series of story effects) For the part corresponding to), the in-set presentation is advanced so that the presentation available time and the fluctuation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining part of the in-set effect is advanced so that the remaining part of the in-set effect which is originally performed for 10 s as the remaining effect time ends in 6 s.

  In FIGS. 107 to 110, in the first to third games, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a loss, and the above-described first corresponding to the above-mentioned first fluctuation time as a fluctuation pattern The fluctuation pattern is determined, and in the fourth fluctuation, the result of the big hit judgment (lottery result) is the hit, and a second fluctuation time (for example, 2s) longer than the first fluctuation time (for example 2s) described above as the fluctuation pattern. , 30 s) (for example, a fluctuation pattern indicating super reach) is determined, the predetermined one set, the next one set following the predetermined one set, the subsequent one set It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display example of the story production pattern in ST in 1 set after 2 sets and 1 set (after 3 sets after 3 sets) following 1 set after 2 sets . In FIG. 107 to FIG. 110, since the variation time is longer than the remaining presentation time, the in-set presentation in a predetermined set is performed as the basic presentation time, and a series of story effects are advanced. Also, in the screen display example shown in FIGS. 107 to 110, since the presentation enabled time is 26 s, the presentation end target set is three sets later, and the basic presentation time is also set for the next set and the in-set presentation after the second set. The series of story renditions will proceed. Then, for the in-set effects after 3 sets, the first (1/5) to 5th in-set (5 parts of the in-set effects (part corresponding to 3 sets in a series of story effects) after 3 sets For the part corresponding to / 5), the in-set presentation is advanced so that the presentation available time and the fluctuation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining part of the in-set effect is advanced so that the remaining part of the in-set effect which is originally performed for 10 s as the remaining effect time ends in 6 s.

  Also, in FIG. 107 to FIG. 110, among the in-set effects in one predetermined set, from the part corresponding to the fifth (5/5) in the set, the effects end over the in-set effects in the next set and after two sets A window image indicating an in-set effect after 3 sets which is an object set is displayed in the scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) in a special effect mode based on the special effect data in ST. It has become. Specifically, a window image that suggests an in-set effect after three sets, which is an end target set, is displayed by highlighting, which is a display mode different from a normal mode. Note that the display mode different from the normal mode is not limited to this, and the outer frame of the window image may be a display mode different from the normal mode, and a translucent image showing a big hit in the window image ( For example, the letter V may be displayed. Further, the special effect mode based on the special effect data in ST is not limited to the one in which the window image is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, and a story image to be displayed in the set story display area 703 (first image display means) is It may be displayed in a display mode different from normal.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of games (for example, five times) is used as a set in a predetermined section (for example, a story section in ST mode) in the special gaming state, a series of story effects are advanced. The time set by multiplying the first variation time (for example, 2s) by the predetermined number of games (five times corresponding to one set) is the basic effect time (for example, 10s), and the number of sets is based on this basic effect time Advance the corresponding story. Then, if the variation pattern determined in the case of a big hit is a second variation pattern corresponding to a second variation time (for example, 30 s) longer than the first variation time, within one set The remaining effect time is calculated according to the number of games in the game and the basic effect time, and if the second variation time is longer than the remaining effect time, the effect end target set after the next set is special By suggesting by the presentation mode (for example, a presentation mode in which a window image suggesting an in-set presentation of the presentation end target set is displayed in a display mode different from normal), a specific gaming state (for example, SP) Is configured to notify transition to a bonus).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to generally synchronize the production time of a series of story effects executed over a plurality of games and the fluctuation time of the identification symbol with a simple configuration with one set as one unit. Even if it is decided that a big hit will be made, a series of story effects will be made to progress as far as possible without making a drop and the interest for the player will be improved. It is possible to give notice of transition to the state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second variation time period of the part corresponding to the number of sets indicated by the special effect mode in the series of story effects (for example, effect within the set of effect end object sets) It is configured to advance the story in sync with the end. By configuring in this way, it is possible to synchronize a plurality of sets of presentation time in a series of story effects and the variation time of the identification symbol, and it is possible to perform a series of story effects and a big hit advance in a more comfortable manner It becomes.

  Also, in the present embodiment, a window image (second image) corresponding to the number of sets indicated as a target suggested by a special rendering mode in a series of story effects is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. It is configured. By configuring in this manner, a big hit notice (transition to a specific gaming state) in which the interest is further improved by using a window image (second image) that suggests a story corresponding to the number of sets after the next time It is possible to give notice).

[Example of screen display of item pre-reading effect]
FIG. 111 to FIG. 113 are diagrams showing examples of screen display of item prefetch effect. The upper left of FIG. 111 shows an image display example in the case where the effect image showing that the plate A is obtained is displayed in the display area 4A before the change, and the upper right of FIG. Shows an example of an image display when the effect image showing that the plate B is obtained is displayed in the display area 4A, and the plate C is obtained at the lower left of FIG. 111 before the change. In the lower right part of FIG. 111, an effect image showing that the plate D has been acquired is displayed in the display area 4A at the lower right of FIG. 111. The example of an image display in the case of being displayed is shown.

  In the effect image showing that the plate A has been acquired, it is shown that the expectation degree type associated with the plate A together with the image of the plate A is a pseudo continuous effect, and that the plate B is acquired. The effect image shows that the expectation type associated with the plate B together with the image of the plate B is a serif effect, and in the effect image showing that the plate C is obtained, the plate C together with the image of the plate C In the effect image showing that the expected degree type associated with the image is the cut-in effect and showing that the plate D is acquired, the expected degree is obtained by acquiring the plate D together with the image of the plate D It is shown to be high. As described above, before the change, the type of acquired plate (item) is associated with the plate (item) according to the processing result of the item acquisition rendering process (see FIG. 90). It will be notified with the type.

  FIG. 112 shows the case where the number of pseudo runs is “1” (that is, the pseudo run is performed once) in the item prefetching rendering (more specifically, the item use rendering process shown in FIGS. 86 to 89) It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of. (A) of FIG. 112 shows the variation start of the decorative symbol 700, (b) shows the effect display corresponding to the effect data of the temporary temporary stop, (c) shows the use of the plate A (D) shows the effect display corresponding to the effect data of the pseudo continuous temporary stop. (E) shows the decorative symbol 700 from the pseudo continuous temporary stop. Shows the re-variation start which starts a variation again, and (f) shows that the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the reach state.

  In the said fluctuation | variation of the item pre-reading effect | presentation shown in FIG. 112, as shown to (a), the fluctuation | variation display of the decorative symbol 700 is started by a normal fluctuation | variation aspect first. Here, for example, when the plate A has been acquired and it has not been notified that the plate A has been acquired before the change, an effect image similar to the effect image shown in the upper left of FIG. 111 is used. It is informed that the plate A has been acquired (see S491 in FIG. 86). Next, when one plate A is obtained, as shown in (b), only one plate A is more than the expected degree (one pseudo ream) predetermined as the expected degree of the pseudo ream After the effect display of the normal temporary stop (showing the pseudo run 0 times) with a low degree of expectation is performed, as shown in (c), the effect display of use of the plate A is performed, and based on the plate A, As shown in d) and (e), the effect display of the pseudo continuous temporary stop and the re-variation start is performed according to the predetermined degree of expectation (single pseudo link). And as shown to (f), it will be in a reach state and it will be alert | reported whether it will be a big hit finally. On the other hand, when the plate A is not obtained, as shown in (d) and (e), the effect of the pseudo continuous temporary stop and the re-variation start according to the predetermined degree of expectation (one pseudo ream) Display is done. And as shown to (f), it will be in a reach state and it will be alert | reported whether it will be a big hit finally.

  FIG. 113 shows the case where the number of pseudo runs is “3” (ie, pseudo run is performed 3 times) in the item prefetching rendering (more specifically, the item use rendering process shown in FIGS. 86 to 89). It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display in case 2 sheets of plate A are acquired. Since (a) to (f) in FIG. 113 are the same as those shown in FIG. 112, the display contents of the screen are omitted in FIG.

  Also in the variation of the item prefetching effect shown in FIG. 113, first, as shown in (a), the variation display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the normal variation mode. Here, since the number of pseudo stations is "3" and the number of plates A is 2, the plate for the first pseudo run is used so that plate A is used in the latter half of the simulation in the latter half of the fluctuation. A is not used. Therefore, the effect display of (d) pseudo continuous temporary stop and (e) re-variation start is performed, and the first pseudo continuous ends. Next, the number of pseudo stations becomes “2” and the number of plates A is 2, so (b) normal temporary stop, (c) plate A use, (d) pseudo continuous temporary stop and (e) re-variation The effect display of the start is performed, and the second pseudo run ends. Next, since the number of pseudo stations becomes “1” and the number of plates A is 2, (b) normal temporary stop, (c) plate A use, (d) pseudo continuous temporary stop and (e) re-variation The effect display of the start is performed, the third pseudo link is ended, the effect display of the (f) reach is performed, and it is notified whether or not it will be a big hit in the end.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of predetermined items (for example, plate A) specified in the item pre-reading effect is 0, the predetermined degree of expectation corresponding to the predetermined item (for example, pseudo-series) A predetermined effect (for example, (d) pseudo continuous temporary stop and (e) effect display for starting re-variation start) in which an expected degree predetermined in advance as the expected degree of the effect (for example, the number of pseudo stations) is notified And the number of predetermined items (for example, plate A) specified in the item prefetching effect is one or more, the expected degree of the predetermined expected degree type (for example, pseudo-series effect) corresponding to the predetermined item (For example, after an expectation degree lower by a predetermined item number than an expectation degree predetermined as a pseudo run number) is informed (for example, (b) effect display of normal temporary stop is performed), a predetermined Based on item (Eg, (c) based on display of effect of use of plate A) a predetermined expected degree is notified (eg, (d) pseudo continuous temporary stop and (e) re-variation start The effect display is performed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a more varied jackpot notice (notice of transition to a specific gaming state).

[Modification of this embodiment]
Next, a modified example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each modification below, each processing in this embodiment shall be performed similarly except the case where it shows especially.

<Performing Effect Determination Table (Modified Example)>
FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a hit rendering pattern determination table of the present modification. In the hit effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56, the type of the hit effect pattern determined in accordance with the lottery value is defined for each hit pattern type, but the hit effect pattern determination shown in FIG. 114 is performed. In the table (modification), it is further defined that the type of winning effect pattern to be determined in accordance with the winning rate. The determination of the winning percentage may be performed by the main CPU 61, or may be performed by the sub CPU 71.

  The winning rate is, for example, a game winning in the first start opening 32, the second start opening 33, the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37, or the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D in a predetermined period. It can be determined from the number of gaming balls that have won in a predetermined number of balls or a combination thereof. In addition, the predetermined period is, for example, a fixed period in the non-probability change / non-short play state, a fixed period in the non-probability change / time short play state, a fixed period in the probability change / time short play state, or a fixed period in the big hit play state (specific game state) Or, any of predetermined periods can be set as a combination thereof. In this modification, as an example of the winning rate, the number of gaming balls that have won the first large winning opening 36 / required for a specific first round game (for example, the first R) in the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) We will determine the winning rate from time. For example, if the number of gaming balls that have won in the first large winning opening 36 is nine, and the time taken for a specific first round game in the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) is 18 seconds, the winnings per 1s The rate will be 50%. Here, although it is possible to set the threshold of the winning percentage appropriately, in this modification, the threshold of 50% of the winning percentage is taken as an example of the threshold. In the hit effect pattern determination table (modification) shown in FIG. 114, the description of a hit effect pattern corresponding to the story bonus and a hit effect pattern corresponding to the battle bonus are omitted for the convenience of description. .

  As shown in FIG. 114, in the hit effect pattern determination table (modification), as the type of hit pattern, the music pattern A (Succeeding in live bonus 9R success) as in the hit effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. A music pattern A (reverse) constituting a live bonus 5R success, a music pattern A (failure) constituting a live bonus 8R failure and a live bonus 4R failure are defined. In addition, with regard to the music pattern A (successful), the music pattern A (successful) long selected when the winning ratio is less than the threshold and the music pattern A (successful) short selected when the winning ratio is equal to or higher than the threshold Is defined. In addition, with regard to the music pattern A (reverse), the music pattern A (reverse) long selected when the winning ratio is less than the threshold and the music pattern A (reverse) selected when the winning ratio is equal to or higher than the threshold Is defined. In addition, for the music pattern A (failed), the music pattern A (failed) selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold and the music pattern A (failed) selected when the winning rate is equal to or higher than the threshold Is defined. Here, "long" indicates a hit presentation pattern in which the presentation time (for example, the time when the music pattern A is output) is set to a relatively long time, and "short" indicates the presentation time Shows a hit effect pattern set in a relatively short time. That is, in this modification, the music pattern A (success) long and the music pattern A (success) short both constitute live bonus 9 R success, but the time when the music corresponding to the music pattern A is output in the live bonus It is a hit presentation pattern that is configured to be different.

  Similarly, for the music pattern B (successful), the music pattern B (successful) selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold and the music pattern B (successful) selected when the win rate is equal to or higher than the threshold A short is defined, and for the music pattern B (reversed), a music pattern B (reversed) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold, and a music pattern B selected when the winning rate is equal to or higher than the threshold Reversed) Short is defined, and for the music pattern B (failed), the music pattern B (failed) selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold and the music pattern selected when the winning rate is equal to or higher than the threshold B (failed) short is defined. Similarly, with regard to the music pattern C (fixed), the music pattern C (fixed) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold, and the music pattern C selected when the winning rate is equal to or higher than the threshold Confirmed) short is specified.

  Here, the winning rate can be an indicator of whether or not the player is actively firing the game ball using the launcher 26 (that is, whether or not the player is actively playing the game). Therefore, when the player is aggressive in playing the game, for example, the music pattern A (success) short is selected as the hit effect pattern, and when the player is not aggressive in playing, for example, By configuring the music pattern A (success) long to be selected as the hit effect pattern, effects of the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) matching the player's gaming tendency (game progression speed) are performed It is possible to synchronize the end of the output of the music according to the music pattern and the end of the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) more easily.

  In addition, various methods can be used as a method of varying the output time in the same hit presentation pattern (for example, music pattern A (success)). For example, music pattern A (successful) long constitutes each section as shown in the upper part of FIG. 94, and music pattern A (successful) short is an effect corresponding to one or a plurality of sections among the respective sections. The time may be shortened, or a section which is not output may be defined. Further, as a method of shortening the rendering time, the tempo of the music corresponding to the music pattern may be increased, or the arranged music may be output.

  Further, various timings can be taken as the timing for determining the winning rate. For example, in the above-described example, the winning percentage in the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) may be determined immediately before the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) where the live bonus is to be performed this time. In this case, the winning percentage to be determined will be updated each time the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) is reached. In addition, the winning rate from the time of power on of the gaming machine or return from a predetermined error (for example, a door open error indicating that the front frame 3 or the protective glass 7 is opened, a backup error of the work RAM 73, etc.) An average value may be calculated. In this case, the winning percentage to be determined is cleared when the game machine is turned off or when a predetermined error occurs.

  Also, in the above-described example, when calculating the winning rate, the number of gaming balls that have won the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37 / gaming balls fired in the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) The winning percentage may be determined from the number of players. Also in this case, it is possible to appropriately determine whether the player is aggressive in the game.

<Story production table group>
FIG. 115 is a conceptual diagram showing a story effect table group of this modification. In the present embodiment, when a series of story effects are performed in the story section of the ST mode and the transition from the story section of the ST mode to the SP bonus, related story effects related to the series of story effects are performed in the SP bonus. Although this embodiment is to be performed, in this modification, in all of the effect modes (playing state), effects related to a specific story are performed, and the story is advanced in units of specific stories.

  For example, when the specific story is the first story, in the normal mode, the presentation pattern determination table is determined with reference to the first-story corresponding normal mode in-play pattern determination table corresponding to the first story. Thereby, in the normal mode, an effect pattern or the like corresponding to an effect introducing a character appearing in the first story can be determined. Further, in the short mode in the short time mode, the effect pattern is determined with reference to the first pattern corresponding short pattern in the short mode corresponding to the first story. Further, in the long mode in the short time mode, the first pattern corresponding long pattern in the first story corresponding to the first story is referred to, and the effect pattern is determined. Thereby, in the time saving mode, it is possible to determine an effect pattern or the like corresponding to an effect in which a background image related to the first story is displayed. In addition, in the first special symbol hit, the hit presentation pattern is determined with reference to the first story corresponding hit presentation pattern determination table corresponding to the first story. Thereby, in the live bonus, it is possible to select the music pattern related to the first story, in the story bonus it is possible to select the story pattern related to the first story, and in the battle bonus, the battle related to the first story Make the pattern selectable. In addition, in the second special symbol hit, the hit effect pattern is determined with reference to the hit pattern determination table for the first story corresponding SP bonus corresponding to the first story. Thereby, in the SP bonus, the first story is related to the first story according to whether the effect mode before transition is the time-shortening mode, the story section of the ST mode, or the battle reach section of the ST mode. The hit presentation pattern can be selected. Also, in ST mode, referring to the presentation pattern determination table in the first story corresponding ST mode corresponding to the first story, it is related to the first story according to whether it is a story section or a battle reach section It is possible to select the effect pattern to be played. The same is true when the particular story is the second story or the third story.

  Note that from the first effect control state in which effects related to the first story are performed (that is, states in which each effect pattern is selected from the first story effect table group), effects related to the second story are performed. Effects related to the third story are performed from the second effect control state, the transition condition to the second effect control state, which is the state to be displayed (that is, the state where each effect pattern is selected from the second story effect table group) Various conditions can be adopted for the transition condition to the third effect control state, which is a state (that is, a state in which each effect pattern is selected from the third story effect table group). As an example, for example, when it becomes a big hit in the normal mode of the first effect control state, and when it becomes V winning in the first special symbol hit of the first effect control state, the first effect also in the ST mode to shift to thereafter The control state is continued, and the transition to the second effect control state is performed with the termination of the ST mode as a transition condition. In the case of non-V winning in the first special symbol of the first effect control state, the first effect control state is continued also in the time reduction mode to shift thereafter, the end of the time reduction mode as the transition condition , Shift to the second effect control state. Alternatively, it may be possible to shift to the second effect control state, with the non-V winning being achieved in the first special symbol hitting of the first effect control state as the transition condition. That is, at the end of a specific gaming state (for example, during the first special symbol), a special gaming state (for example, ST mode), or a time saving game state (for example, time saving mode), which are advantageous gaming states for the player. It can be configured to shift the effect control state (first to third effect control states). By configuring in this manner, even when the state advantageous to the player is ended, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by advancing the specific story.

  In addition, as another example, it becomes a big hit in the normal mode of the first effect control state, and shifts to the second effect control state as a transition condition that V prize is achieved in the first special symbol hit of the first effect control state. If the player is in a non-V prize in the first special symbol hit state of the first effect control state, the first effect control state is continued also in the time shortening mode to shift thereafter. Alternatively, the transition to the second effect control state may be performed with the transition condition being a big hit in the normal mode of the first effect control state. That is, each effect control state (first to third effects) at the time of transition of a specific gaming state (for example, during the first special symbol) which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, or a special gaming state (for example, ST mode). It can be configured to shift the control state). By configuring in this way, when transitioning to a state advantageous to the player, a specific story will be advanced, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

  In addition, various conditions can be taken also about the initialization conditions which shift a production control state to an initial control state (for example, the 1st production control state). For example, it may be set as the initialization condition that the game machine has been turned off or the predetermined error occurrence described above has occurred, and the demonstration display in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is for a predetermined time or more (for example, 30 minutes or more) The continued condition may be an initialization condition.

<Main fluctuation time determination table (modification)>
FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a main variation time determination table of the present modification. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 performs processing in the ST mode (see FIG. 83) and story presentation pattern change processing in the ST (see FIG. 84), whereby the main CPU 61 determines in the story section of the ST mode. Although the variation pattern (the end timing of the variation time of the identification symbol) and the end of the in-set effect in the series of story effects are synchronized, the main CPU 61 further ends the in-set effect in this modification. The variation pattern (the end timing of the variation time of the identification symbol) to be synchronized is determined. In the present embodiment, the detailed description of the main fluctuation time determination table is omitted, but a main fluctuation time determination table similar to that shown in FIG. A main change time determination table may be adopted.

  In the main variation time determination table (modification) shown in FIG. 116, the result of the big hit determination (coincidence), the current gaming state (non-probability change, non-probability change, non-probability change, reduction time, probability change, reduction time) random numbers for reach determination According to various parameters such as range (0 to 250) and effect selection random number range (0 to 99), the kind of fluctuation pattern to be determined is specified, and the gaming state is the probability variation / time saving gaming state ( In the case of ST gaming state), whether the number of games is "1 to 50 times" (is it a story section of ST mode) or "51 to 180 times" (a battle reach section in ST mode) Different types of fluctuation patterns are defined depending on the Further, when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit, the type of variation pattern different according to the value of the in-set counter is further defined. In the present embodiment, the in-set counter is provided in the work RAM 73 and is counted by the sub CPU 71. However, in the present modification, the in-set counter is also provided in the main RAM 63, It is assumed that the main CPU 61 counts the number of games in the set. In addition, the count of the number of games in the case of definite variation / short time gaming condition (ST gaming condition) may be obtained from the value of the probability variation number counter, and further, an ST during management counter is also provided in the main RAM 63 and the main CPU 61 The number of games may be counted.

  The reach determination random number range determines the reach variation randomization time for determining reach variation randomization time, or defines the reach random determination range in which the reach random variation time is not determined. The reach determination random number value is extracted from the reach determination counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the gaming ball wins the first start opening 32 or the second start opening 33 in each gaming state. Further, the effect selection random number range defines the range for effect determination random numbers corresponding to the reach determination random number range, the fluctuation time, and the effect content. The effect selection random number value is extracted from the effect selection counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the gaming ball wins the first start opening 32 or the second start opening 33 in each gaming state.

  In the hit effect pattern determination table (modification) shown in FIG. 116, for example, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss in the story section of ST mode, "02H" as the variation pattern with a selection rate of 96/100. Is selected, and "03H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern at a selectivity of 4/100. The fluctuation pattern “02H” is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 2000 ms (2 s) and the effect content is the shortening fluctuation A. Further, the fluctuation pattern “03H” is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 4000 ms (4 s) and the effect content is the shortening fluctuation B. Here, the fluctuation pattern "02H" corresponds to the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern corresponding to a specific fluctuation time (for example, 2s), and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode . However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the variation pattern “02H” may always be selected.

  Also, for example, if the result of the big hit determination is a hit in the story section of ST mode, if the value of the in-set counter is “1” (ie, if it is the first game in one set), "07H" is selected as the variation pattern with a selectivity of 96/100, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern with a 2/100 selectivity, and "05H" is selected as a variation pattern with a 2/100 selectivity. Be done. The fluctuation pattern “07H” is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 10000 ms (10 s) and the effect content is the special fluctuation A. Further, the variation pattern “04H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 20000 ms (20 s) and the effect content is Super Reach A. The fluctuation pattern "05H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 30000 ms (30 s) and the effect content is Super Reach B. Here, the fluctuation pattern “07H” corresponds to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, if the value of the in-set counter is “1”, the variation pattern “07H” may always be selected.

  Also, for example, if the result of the big hit determination is a hit in the story section of ST mode, and the value of the in-set counter is “2” (ie, if it is the second game in one set), "08H" is selected as the variation pattern with 96/100 selectivity, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern with 2/100 selectivity, and "05H" is selected as the variation pattern with 2/100 selectivity Be done. The variation pattern “08H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 8000 ms (8 s) and the effect content is the special variation B. Here, in the same manner as described above, the fluctuation pattern “08H” corresponds to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of ST mode. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, if the value of the in-set counter is “2”, the variation pattern “08H” may always be selected.

  Also, for example, if the result of the big hit determination is a hit in the story section of ST mode, if the value of the in-set counter is “3” (ie, it is the third game in one set), "09H" is selected as the variation pattern at 96/100 selectivity, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern at 2/100 selectivity, and "05H" is selected as the variation pattern at 2/100 selectivity Be done. The fluctuation pattern “09H” is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 6000 ms (6 s) and the effect content is the special fluctuation C. Here, in the same manner as described above, the variation pattern “09H” corresponds to the above-mentioned second variation pattern different from the above-mentioned first variation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of ST mode. ing. However, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit in the story section of the ST mode, if the value of the in-set counter is “3”, the variation pattern “09H” may always be selected.

  Also, for example, if the result of the big hit determination is a hit in the story section of the ST mode, and the value of the in-set counter is “4” (ie, if it is the fourth game in one set), "0AH" is selected as the variation pattern at a selectivity of 96/100, "04H" is selected as a variation pattern at a 2/100 selectivity, and "05H" is selected as a variation pattern at a 2/100 selectivity. Be done. The variation pattern “0AH” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 4000 ms (4 s) and the effect content is the special variation D. Here, as described above, the fluctuation pattern "0AH" corresponds to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of ST mode. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, if the value of the in-set counter is “4”, the variation pattern “0AH” may always be selected.

  Also, for example, in the case of a story section in ST mode, if the result of the big hit determination is a hit, and the value of the in-set counter is “5” (ie, it is the fifth game in one set), “0 BH” is selected as the variation pattern with a selectivity of 96/100, “04 H” is selected as the variation pattern with a 2/100 selectivity, and “05 H” is selected as a variation pattern with a 2/100 selectivity Be done. The variation pattern “0BH” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 2000 ms (2 s) and the effect content is the special variation E. Here, as described above, the variation pattern “0BH” corresponds to the above-described second variation pattern different from the above-described first variation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. ing. However, if the value of the in-set counter is “5” when the result of the big hit determination is a hit in the story section of the ST mode, the variation pattern “0BH” may always be selected.

  Thus, in the present modification, the second variation pattern is determined based on the value of the in-set counter, but as described above, the value of the in-set counter is “1”. In some cases, the above-mentioned remaining presentation time in one set is 10s, and in the case where the value of the in-set counter is "2," the above-mentioned remaining presentation time in one set is 8s; When the value of the counter is “3”, the above-mentioned remaining effect time in one set is 6 s, and when the value of the in-set counter is “4”, the above-mentioned remaining effect in one set The time is 4s, and when the value of the in-set counter is "5", the above-mentioned remaining effect time in one set is 2s. That is, in this modification, the fluctuation time that will be synchronized with the end of a predetermined effect (in-set effect) by determining the fluctuation pattern using the hit effect pattern determination table (modification) shown in FIG. 116. Are configured to determine a second variation pattern corresponding to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately synchronize the effect time of a predetermined effect (for example, effect in a set) in which a series of effects are executed over a plurality of games and the fluctuation time of the identification symbol. Become.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, the gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, A first variable winning device (e.g., one starting opening 32 and a second starting opening 33), which is provided in the gaming area and is variable between a first mode in which game media can be easily received and a second mode in which game media is difficult to be received. A specific area (for example, a first medium winning opening 36), a first mode which is provided in the game area and is easy to receive game media, and a second mode which is hard to receive game media and which game media can pass A second variable winning device (for example, the second large winning opening 37) having the specific area 38A) inside, and a specific gaming state (for example, the player) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start area , Big hit gaming state) Specific gaming state transition judging means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not the game status is determined on the condition that a determination result indicating that the specific gaming state is to be shifted is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means Specific gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling the specific gaming state and the specific gaming state after the specific gaming state is ended on condition that the game medium has passed the specific area in the specific gaming state Special gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling to a special gaming state (for example, probability variation / time saving gaming state) in which a determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is relatively easy to be obtained by the specific gaming state transition determining means And, in the specific gaming state, a predetermined number of times of the first round game to change the first variable winning device to the first aspect and the second aspect It is possible to execute a predetermined number of second round games in which the second variable winning device is varied between the first mode and the second mode in the specific game state and the first round game execution means (for example, the main CPU 61) capable of line A music pattern selection means (for example, a second round game execution means (for example, the main CPU 61) and a music pattern selection means (for example, for selecting a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns) A sub-CPU 71) and music output means (for example, a speaker 10) for outputting music in accordance with the music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means in the special gaming state, The second round game execution means, relative to the passage of game media to the specific area during the execution of the second round game It is possible to play a specific second round game to be facilitated, and the specific game state is the first round game of the first specified number of times (for example, four times of 1 to 4 R) by the first round game execution means. A first specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state according to a hit pattern 3) in which the second round game executing means executes the at least one specific second round game after the second game is executed, and A second specified gaming state (for example, hit pattern) in which the specified second round game is not performed by the second round game execution unit after the first specified number of times of the first round game is performed by the one round game execution unit 8), and the music pattern selection means is controlled to the first specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means. If the first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reversed)) can be selected and is controlled to the second specified gaming state by the specified gaming state control means, the second music pattern (for example, Music pattern A (failed) can be selected, and for the first music pattern, the first common portion (for example, A melody of the first section) of the predetermined music is output by the music output means A music pattern which is predetermined to output a specific portion of the predetermined music (for example, reverse rotation of the fifth section) after a branching period of the second music section (for example, the first branching section) has elapsed. In the music pattern, the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and the specific portion of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branching period has elapsed. A music pattern, and the music output unit is configured to select a predetermined time (for example, an initial segment) when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection unit. Output of the predetermined music is started during the waiting time before the start of the first R) when the first music is started, and the predetermined time is the time when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection unit; A game machine characterized in that it is a time when the output of the specific part of the predetermined music can be started before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, a gaming area provided in the gaming area) , The first start port 32, the second start port 33), the first mode which is provided in the game area and is easy to receive game media, and the second mode which is hard to receive game media, and the game media passes A variable winning device (for example, the special winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 117) having a possible specific area (for example, the specific area 38A) inside, and advantageous for the player on condition that gaming media has passed through the starting area Specific gaming state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (for example, big hit gaming state), and is made to transition to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state transition determination means Specific gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling the gaming state to the specific gaming state on the condition that the determination result of the purport is obtained, and that the game medium has passed the specific area in the specific gaming state On the condition, after the specific gaming state ends, the special gaming state (for example, the probability change / time saving gaming state) in which the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is relatively easy to be obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means Special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) to be controlled, and, in the specific game state, to change the first variable winning device to the first aspect and the second aspect, and the gaming medium to the specific area First round game execution means (for example, main CPU 61) capable of executing a first round game which makes it relatively difficult to pass a predetermined number of times, and the specific play In the state, while changing the second variable winning device to the first aspect and the second aspect, it is possible to execute the specific second round game a predetermined number of times, which relatively facilitates the passage of gaming media to the specific area A music pattern selection means (for example, a second round game execution means (for example, the main CPU 61) and a music pattern selection means for selecting a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when controlled to the specific game state by the specific game state control means A game machine comprising: a sub CPU 71) and music output means (for example, a speaker 10) for outputting music in accordance with the music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means in the special gaming state The game state is the first round game of the first specified number of times (for example, four times of 1 to 4 R) by the first round game execution means. A first specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state according to the hit pattern 3) in which the second round game executing means executes the specified second round game at least once after being executed, and the first A second specified gaming state (for example, hit pattern 8) in which the specified second round game is not performed by the second round game execution unit after the first specified number of times of the first round game is performed by the round game execution unit And the music pattern selection means is controlled to the first specific game state by the specific game state control means, the first music pattern (for example, the music pattern A). (Reversal)), and when it is controlled to the second specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means, the second music pattern (e.g. Music pattern A (failed) can be selected, and for the first music pattern, the first common portion (for example, A melody of the first section) of the predetermined music is output by the music output means A music pattern which is predetermined to output a specific portion of the predetermined music (for example, reverse rotation of the fifth section) after a branching period of the second music section (for example, the first branching section) has elapsed. In the music pattern, it is predetermined that the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output unit, and the specific portion of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branching period has elapsed. A music pattern, and the music output unit is configured to select a predetermined time (for example, even when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection unit). Starting the output of the predetermined music from the waiting time before the start of the first R where the initial section is started), and in the predetermined time, the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selecting means A game machine characterized in that it is a time when an output of the specific part of the predetermined music can be started before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even in the first specific gaming state in which the specific second round game is executed, and in the second specific gaming state in which the specific second round game is not executed, predetermined music (for example, The first common portion (for example, A melody of the first section) of the music according to the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is allowed to elapse. And, in the first specific gaming state, after the lapse of this predetermined branching period, it outputs a specific portion of the predetermined music (for example, reverse of the fifth section) which suggests that a specific second round game is to be executed. . By configuring in this manner, the player's sense of expectation in the specific gaming state can be enhanced.

  Moreover, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, an initial section) in which the output of the specific part of the predetermined music is started before the execution of the specific second round game is started By configuring the output of a predetermined music (for example, the output of the intro of the initial section) to be started from the waiting time before the start of the 1R first when the is started, it becomes unnecessary to monitor the round game The control load can be prevented from increasing.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific gaming state is a second specific number (for example, eight times of 1 to 8 R) which is greater than the first specific number by the first round game execution means. A third specified gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state according to a hit pattern 1) in which at least one specified second round game is executed by the second round game execution means after the one round game is executed A fourth specified gaming state in which the specified second round game is not performed by the second round game execution unit after the second specified number of times of the first round game has been performed by the first round game execution unit (e.g. , The big hit game state according to the hit pattern 7), and the music pattern selection means is controlled to the third specified game state by the specified game state control means In the case where it is possible to select a third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (success)) and control to the fourth specified gaming state by the specified gaming state control means, the fourth music pattern ( For example, the music pattern A (failed) can be selected, and the third music pattern is the first common portion of the predetermined music output by the music output means, and the predetermined branching period has elapsed. After that, the second common part of the predetermined music (for example, B melody of the second section) is further output, and after a specific branch period (for example, second branch section) has elapsed, the above-mentioned predetermined music It is a music pattern in which a specific part (for example, the third section of the chorus) is predetermined to be output, and the fourth music pattern is the first common part of the predetermined music by the music output means. output And the second common portion of the predetermined music is output after the predetermined branching period elapses, and the specific portion of the predetermined music is not output after the specific branching period elapses Is a predetermined music pattern, and the music output means starts from the predetermined time even when either of the third music pattern and the fourth music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. The output of the predetermined music is started, and the predetermined time is determined by the second round game execution means when the third music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. It is a time when it is possible to start output of the specific part of the predetermined music before execution is started.

  According to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in any of the first to fourth specific gaming states, the first common portion (for example, the first section) of the predetermined music (for example, the music corresponding to the music pattern A) A) M) is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is allowed to elapse. Here, in the first specific gaming state, after the lapse of the predetermined branching period, it outputs a specific portion (for example, reverse of the fifth section) of the predetermined music that suggests that the specific second round game is to be executed. In the third specific gaming state or the fourth gaming state, it further outputs the second common portion of the predetermined music (for example, B melody of the second section), and a specific branch period (for example, the second branch section) Let) pass. And, in the third specific gaming state, after the lapse of this specific branching period, it outputs a specific portion (for example, the rust of the third section) of the predetermined music that suggests that the specific second round game is to be executed. . By configuring in this manner, the player's sense of expectation in the specific gaming state can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern which is occupied when one of the first music pattern and the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means is selected. The degree of expectation in which the third music pattern is selected when the music pattern selection means selects any of the third music pattern and the fourth music pattern is higher than the degree of expectation. The gaming machine as described above, characterized in that it is configured as follows.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern is selected when one of the first music pattern and the second music pattern is selected (for example, 18 + 17 = 35/200). The third music pattern is selected if any of the third music pattern and the fourth music pattern is selected (for example, 46 + 16 = 62/200) than the expectation (for example, 18/35) By setting a high degree of expectation (for example, 46/62), the second common portion (for example, B section of the second section) of the predetermined music after the predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) has elapsed. When the) is output, the degree of expectation for the specific second round game to be executed is relatively high, so it is possible to diversify the role of a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section), In the gaming state Kick it is possible to further increase the player's expectation.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the predetermined music includes a first music and a second music, and a music pattern corresponding to the first music is selected by the music pattern selection unit. In the case where the music pattern corresponding to the second music is selected by the music pattern selection means, rather than the expectation for the second round game execution means to execute the specific second round game The gaming machine as described above, characterized in that the second round game execution means is configured to have a higher expectation for executing the specific second round game.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific second round game when the music pattern (for example, the music pattern A) corresponding to the first music (for example, the music corresponding to the music pattern A) is selected To the second music (for example, the music according to the music pattern B) than the degree of expectation that is performed (for example, the ratio in which the hit pattern 1 or 3 is determined when the music pattern A is selected) The degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed when the corresponding music pattern (for example, music pattern B) is selected (for example, when the music pattern B is selected, the hit pattern 1 or 3 is determined By configuring the ratio “high”, it is possible to change the degree of expectation among the pieces of music, and it is possible to further enhance the player's sense of expectation in the specific gaming state.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, the gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, A variable winning device (e.g., a first start port 32 and a second start port 33), which is provided in the game area and can be varied between a first mode in which game media can be easily received and a second mode in which game media is hard to receive. Large winning opening 36, second large winning opening 37), start storage information storage means (for example, main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start storage information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area (for example, main RAM 63) On the condition that the starting memory information is stored by the memory means, it is determined whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player by fluctuating the variable winning device Special A game state transition judging means (for example, the main CPU 61), an identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display portion 53, the second special symbol display portion 54) for variably displaying the identification information, and the specific game state transition judgment A variation pattern determination unit (for example, main CPU 61) for determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be variably displayed by the identification information display unit according to the determination result by the unit, and the specific game by the specific game state transition determination unit The game state is specified as specified on condition that the variation display of the identification information corresponding to the start memory information for which the determination result to shift to the state is obtained is stopped and displayed by the identification information display means Specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) to control the game state, and a plurality of types of items (for example, plate A ~ Each corresponds to a plurality of expected degree types (for example, pseudo-series effect, speech effect, cut-in effect, other promotion (reverse) effect), and by the item being displayed, the specific gaming state transition judging means Item effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 71) for executing an item effect (for example, item prefetch effect) for notifying an expectation degree of whether or not the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained An item effect control means (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the progress of the item effect executed by the effect execution means, the item effect control means changing the variation as to whether or not the item effect is to be performed When the item effect is performed according to the variation pattern determined by the pattern determination unit, the multiple Determine the item rendering content (for example, item prefetch rendering 1 to 24) to be executed from among a plurality of item rendering content in which the number of each of several types of items and the expectation of each of the plurality of expectation types are defined When the number of predetermined items (for example, plate B) defined in the determined item effect contents is 0, the expected degree of the predetermined expected degree type (for example, speech effect) corresponding to the predetermined item The item effect execution means is caused to execute a predetermined effect (for example, effect display based on the speech effect data) in which an expected degree (for example, speech (red)) determined in advance is notified as The process shown in step S499), and the number of the predetermined item defined in the determined item effect content is one or more, the predetermined item After the anticipation degree (for example, serif (green)) lower by the number of the predetermined item than the predetermined expectation degree is notified as the expectation degree of the predetermined expectation degree type corresponding to the predetermined item, A game machine characterized by causing the item effect executing means to execute the predetermined effect (for example, the process shown in S498 in FIG. 86) based on which the predetermined degree of expectation is notified.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to give a more varied jackpot notice (notice of transition to a specific gaming state).

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the item effect control means executes the item effect, a determination result indicating that the specific game state transition determination means causes transition to the specific game state is obtained. The item specified in the determined item effect contents before (for example, before the change) the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the start storage information that has become Item prior notification determination means (for example, item acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 90 by the sub CPU 71) for determining whether or not to notify the type of item, and the item advance notification determination means Having the item effect execution means execute the prior notification effect in which the type of the item is notified when it is determined The gaming machine according to the characterized.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when performing a big hit advance notice (notice of transition to a specific gaming state), it is possible to carry out a preread effect rich in change (effect based on start memory before execution of fluctuation). It becomes possible.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the variation pattern determining unit is configured to store the specific game when the predetermined number (for example, three pieces) or more of the starting memory information is stored by the starting memory information storing unit. When the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is not obtained by the state transition determination means, the specific variation time (for example, 2000 ms) is shorter than the normal variation time (for example, 4000 ms). When the specific fluctuation pattern (for example, the special symbol fluctuation pattern which performs shortening fluctuation) which is matched is decided, as for the aforementioned advance notification decision expedient, the aforementioned particular fluctuation pattern is decided by the aforementioned fluctuation pattern decision expedient For example, in the case where the determination result in S483 of FIG. 85 is YES), the item effect determined by the item effect content determining means is The gaming machine according to above, wherein the defined does not determine whether to notify the type of the item.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even in the case of executing an item effect (for example, an item prefetch effect), the balance of the effect is broken due to the relationship with the fluctuation time (particularly, the shortening fluctuation). It can be prevented.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, the gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, A variable winning device (e.g., a first start port 32 and a second start port 33), which is provided in the game area and can be varied between a first mode in which game media can be easily received and a second mode in which game media is hard to receive. A specific gaming state (for example, a big hit game) which is advantageous for the player by fluctuating the variable winning device on condition that game media has passed through the large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37) and the start area Specific gaming state transition judging means (for example, the main CPU 61) for judging whether or not to shift to state), and that the judgment result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state and the predetermined start condition are satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state) And, after the specific gaming state is over, until the predetermined ending condition is satisfied (for example, 180 special symbol games are digested), the special gaming state (for the player different from the specific gaming state) ( For example, special gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that can be controlled to ST gaming state, and game number counting means for counting the number of games in a predetermined section (for example, story section in ST mode) in the special gaming state For example, in ST special management state), in the special game state, the specific game state control means Based on the specific gaming state number counting means (for example, the ST consecutive counting counter) for counting the number of times controlled to the state, the counting result by the gaming number counting means, and the counting result by the specific gaming state number counting means Story effect execution means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4) for executing a series of story effects in the predetermined section and executing related story effects related to the series of story effects in the specific gaming state (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) It is a game machine provided with the story production control means (for example, sub CPU71) which controls progress of the above-mentioned series of story production performed by the means, and the related story production, and the number-of-games counting means 1 predetermined number of games (for example, 5 times) in the section The set includes a set number counting unit (for example, the processing shown in S459 in FIG. 83) for counting the number of sets, and the story effect control unit controls the specific gaming state counted by the specific gaming state number counting unit The story is advanced in the series of story effects based on the number of times performed (for example, the process shown in S460 of FIG. 83), and the series of story effects is performed based on the number of sets counted by the set number counting unit A game machine characterized by advancing a story (for example, the process shown in S460 of FIG. 83).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a story effect (for example, a series of story effects) is generated in accordance with the number of consecutive big hit (for example, the value of the ST continuous play counter) and the number of sets in the special game state It will progress. In addition, in the specific gaming state, a story effect (for example, related story effect) related to a story effect (for example, a series of story effects) performed in the special game state is executed. Therefore, the story presentation can be appropriately advanced without increasing the control load and the amount of information stored in the storage area.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the series of story effects, the story effect control means obtains the determination result to shift to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determining means. The above-mentioned gaming machine, characterized in that the relevant story presentation execution means is made to execute the related story presentation according to the progress degree of the story (for example, the value of the management counter in ST).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the specific gaming state, a story effect (for example, a related story effect) corresponding to the progress degree of the story effect performed in the special game state is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a story effect having appropriate relevance between the special gaming state and the specific gaming state without increasing the amount of information stored in the control load and the storage area.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the related story effect is an effect that displays a summary (for example, outline) of the stories in the series of story effects according to the progress degree in the series of story effects. The above-mentioned gaming machine characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a series of story effects proceed in accordance with the number of consecutive big hit (for example, the value of ST continuous running counter) in the special gaming state, the next series of stories Related story effects in the specific gaming state can be performed with the effect contents of the effect and the effect contents that do not cause a wrinkle.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect executing means may be a first image (for example, a story) corresponding to the current number of sets counted by the set number counting means in the series of story effects. A first image display means (for example, the set story display area 703) for displaying the images 703a and 703b), and a story corresponding to the number of sets after the next time counted by the set number counting means in the series of story effects A second image display means (for example, a scheduled set window display area 704) for displaying a second image (for example, window images 704a and 704b) suggesting The second image and the second image, depending on the degree of The gaming machine according to above, wherein the story corresponding (e.g., scenes and description of the scenes) is a demonstration for displaying on.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a series of story effects proceed in accordance with the number of consecutive big hit (for example, the value of ST continuous running counter) in the special gaming state, the next series of stories Related story effects in a specific gaming state can be performed with the effect contents of the effect and the effect contents that do not produce wrinkles, and using the second image (for example, window image) used in a series of story effects also in the related story effects Thus, the effect image data can be reduced to secure more storage area.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, the gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, A variable winning device (e.g., a first start port 32 and a second start port 33), which is provided in the game area and can be varied between a first mode in which game media can be easily received and a second mode in which game media is hard to receive. A specific gaming state (for example, a big hit) which is advantageous to the player by fluctuating the variable winning device on condition that game media has passed through the large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37) and the starting area Specific game state transition judging means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to the gaming state), identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 53 for displaying the identification information in a variable manner, second special) Symbol display 5 And the variation pattern determination unit (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be variably displayed by the identification information display unit according to the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination unit; Specific gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling the gaming state to the specific gaming state on condition that the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the gaming state transition determining means, and a predetermined If the condition is satisfied (for example, game media passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state), after the specific gaming state ends, the special gaming state (for example, ST gaming state) different from the specific gaming state is entered. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) to control, and a predetermined section (for example, S Story effect for executing a series of story effects in the predetermined section based on the number-of-games counting means (for example, a management counter during ST) counting the number of games played in the story section of the mode) It is a game machine provided with execution means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4), and a story effect control means (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the progress of the series of story effects executed by the story effect execution means. The first variation time period (e.g., the first variation time period) is determined when the variation pattern determination means does not obtain the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state transition determination means in the predetermined section. 2s) and the corresponding first fluctuation pattern (eg, a fluctuation pattern showing a shortened fluctuation) If it is possible to determine by probability, and in the predetermined section, a determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determining means, the first longer variation time than the first variation time A second variation pattern (for example, variation pattern indicating super reach) corresponding to two variation times (for example, 30 s) can be determined, and the number-of-games counting means determines a predetermined number of games (for example, the predetermined number) Set number counting means (for example, the process shown in S459 in FIG. 83) for counting the number of sets with 5 sets as one set, and in-set game number counting means (for example, for example, for counting the number of games in the one set) The in-set counter), and the story effect control means is configured to set the number of sets counted by the set number counting means Progress the story in the series of story effects (for example, the process shown in S460 of FIG. 83), and in the predetermined section, a time obtained by multiplying the first variation time by the predetermined number of games (for example, 10s) Is a basic effect time, and a story (in-set effect) corresponding to the number of sets in the series of story effects is advanced based on the basic effect time, and in the predetermined section, the second variation pattern determination means If the variation pattern is determined, the remaining presentation time is determined based on the count result by the in-set number-of-games counting means and the basic presentation time, and the second variation time is longer than the remaining presentation time It is determined whether or not it is time (for example, the process of S 473 of FIG. 84 is performed), and the remaining presentation time If it is determined that the second fluctuation time is long (for example, the judgment result of S 473 in FIG. 84 is NO), the set corresponding to the end of the second fluctuation time By suggesting the number by a special effect mode (for example, an effect mode in which a window image indicating an effect within a set of effect end target sets is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode), the specific game state transition determining means A gaming machine characterized by informing that a judgment result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the production time of a series of story effects executed over a plurality of games and the fluctuation time of the identification symbol are generally synchronized by a simple configuration with one set as one unit. Even if it is decided to shift to a specific gaming state (for example, to be a big hit) in a halfway game of a series of story effects, it is possible to make a series of story effects as far as possible. Thus, it is possible to give a jackpot notice (notice of transition to a specific gaming state) in which interest to the player is improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect control means may correspond to the number of sets indicated as the target suggested by the special effect mode in the series of story effects (for example, the effect end target set The above-mentioned gaming machine according to the above-mentioned, wherein control for advancing the story is performed in synchronization with the end of the second fluctuation time, with regard to the in-set effect.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if it is decided to shift to the specific gaming state in the middle game of the story effect executed over a plurality of games, it is possible to make the story effect as long as possible. It is possible to make a big hit advance which will be progressed without getting worse and which will improve the interest for the player.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect executing means may be a first image (for example, a story) corresponding to the current number of sets counted by the set number counting means in the series of story effects. A first image display means (for example, the set story display area 703) for displaying the images 703a and 703b), and a story corresponding to the number of sets after the next time counted by the set number counting means in the series of story effects And second image display means (for example, scheduled set window display area 704) for displaying a second image (for example, window images 704a and 704b) suggesting The second corresponding to the number of sets targeted by the aspect Pictures, gaming machine described above, wherein the displaying by the display mode different from the normal.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a window image (second image) suggesting a story corresponding to the number of sets after the next time may be used to give a big hit advance notice that the interest will be further improved It becomes possible.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, the gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, A first variable winning device (e.g., one starting opening 32 and a second starting opening 33), which is provided in the gaming area and is variable between a first mode in which game media can be easily received and a second mode in which game media is difficult to be received. A specific area (for example, a first medium winning opening 36), a first mode which is provided in the game area and is easy to receive game media, and a second mode which is hard to receive game media and which game media can pass A second variable winning device (for example, the second large winning opening 37) having the specific area 38A) inside, and a specific gaming state (for example, the player) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start area , Big hit gaming state) Specific gaming state transition judging means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not the game status is determined on the condition that a determination result indicating that the specific gaming state is to be shifted is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means Specific gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling the specific gaming state and the specific gaming state after the specific gaming state is ended on condition that the game medium has passed the specific area in the specific gaming state Special gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling to a special gaming state (for example, probability variation / time saving gaming state) in which a determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is relatively easy to be obtained by the specific gaming state transition determining means And, in the specific gaming state, a predetermined number of times of the first round game to change the first variable winning device to the first aspect and the second aspect It is possible to execute a predetermined number of second round games in which the second variable winning device is varied between the first mode and the second mode in the specific game state and the first round game execution means (for example, the main CPU 61) capable of line A music pattern selection means (for example, a second round game execution means (for example, the main CPU 61) and a music pattern selection means for selecting a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when controlled to the specific game state by the specific game state control means) , Sub CPU 71), music output means (for example, the speaker 10) for outputting music in accordance with the music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means in the special gaming state, and game media in a predetermined period of the specific gaming state A gaming rate determining means (for example, sub CPU 71) for determining a winning rate of The second round game execution means is capable of performing a specific second round game in which passage of game media to the specific area is relatively easy during execution of the second round game, and the specific The game state is at least once by the second round game execution means after the first specified number of times (for example, four times of 1 to 4 R) of the first round game is executed by the first round game execution means. The first specific game state (for example, the big hit gaming state according to the hit pattern 3) in which the specific second round game is executed, and the first round game of the first specific number of times by the first round game execution means A second specified gaming state in which the specified second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means after being executed (for example, a big hit gaming state according to the hit pattern 8) , And the music pattern selection means can select the first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reversed)) when the specific game state control means is controlled to the first specific game state Yes, when the specific gaming state control means is controlled to the second specific gaming state, it is possible to select a second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)), the first music pattern When selecting, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold, then a predetermined first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse) long) is selected, and When the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold, the time during which the music output means outputs the predetermined music than the predetermined first music pattern When a specific first music pattern (music pattern A (reverse) short) which is a relatively short time is selected and the second music pattern is selected, the winning percentage determined by the winning percentage determining means Is less than a predetermined threshold, a predetermined second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failed) long) is selected, and the winning percentage determined by the winning percentage determining means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold In the case where the music output means outputs the predetermined music relatively shorter than the predetermined second music pattern, the specific second music pattern (music pattern A (Failure) short) is selected, and the first music pattern is outputted from the music output means for outputting the first common portion (for example, A melody of the first section) of the predetermined music, and for example for a predetermined branching period (for example, And the second music pattern is a music pattern in which it is determined in advance that a specific portion of the predetermined music (for example, the reverse of the fifth section) is output after the first branch section) has elapsed. The music pattern defined in advance is that the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and the specific portion of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branching period has elapsed. The music output means may output a predetermined time (e.g., an initial period is started, for example, when the music pattern selection means selects any of the first music pattern and the second music pattern). The output of the predetermined music is started from the waiting time before the start, and when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection unit, the predetermined time starts. Gaming machine, characterized in that a round-game execution means before the execution of the specific second round game is started, the output of the particular portion of the predetermined musical composition is capable time starts.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, a gaming area provided in the gaming area) , The first start port 32, the second start port 33), the first mode which is provided in the game area and is easy to receive game media, and the second mode which is hard to receive game media, and the game media passes A variable winning device (for example, the special winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 117) having a possible specific area (for example, the specific area 38A) inside, and advantageous for the player on condition that gaming media has passed through the starting area Specific gaming state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (for example, big hit gaming state), and is made to transition to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state transition determination means Specific gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling the gaming state to the specific gaming state on the condition that the determination result of the purport is obtained, and that the game medium has passed the specific area in the specific gaming state On the condition, after the specific gaming state ends, the special gaming state (for example, the probability change / time saving gaming state) in which the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is relatively easy to be obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means Special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) to be controlled, and, in the specific game state, to change the first variable winning device to the first aspect and the second aspect, and the gaming medium to the specific area First round game execution means (for example, main CPU 61) capable of executing a first round game which makes it relatively difficult to pass a predetermined number of times, and the specific play In the state, while changing the second variable winning device to the first aspect and the second aspect, it is possible to execute the specific second round game a predetermined number of times, which relatively facilitates the passage of gaming media to the specific area A music pattern selection means (for example, a second round game execution means (for example, the main CPU 61) and a music pattern selection means for selecting a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when controlled to the specific game state by the specific game state control means Sub CPU 71), music output means (for example, the speaker 10) for outputting music in accordance with the music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means in the special gaming state, game media in a predetermined period of the specific gaming state It is a gaming machine provided with a winning percentage determination means (for example, sub CPU 71) which determines the percentage of winning, and the specific game After the first round game is performed a first specific number of times (for example, four times of 1 to 4 R) by the first round game execution means, the state is at least one time by the second round game execution means. The first specific game state (for example, the big hit gaming state according to the hit pattern 3) where the specific second round game is executed, and the first round game of the first specific number of times is executed by the first round game execution means And the second specified game state is not executed by the second round game execution means (for example, the big hit game state according to the hit pattern 8), and the music pattern selection means includes The first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reversed)) can be selected when the first gaming state is controlled by the specific gaming state control means A second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failed)) can be selected when being controlled to the second specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means, the first music pattern If the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold value, then a predetermined first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse) long) is selected. When the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold, the time for which the music output means outputs a predetermined music relative to the predetermined first music pattern is relatively When a specific first music pattern (music pattern A (reverse) short) which is a short time is selected and the second music pattern is selected, the winning percentage determined by the winning percentage determining means If it is less than the predetermined threshold, a predetermined second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failed) long) is selected, and the winning percentage determined by the winning percentage determining means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold. In some cases, a specific second music pattern (music pattern A (failed) in which the time during which the music output means outputs the predetermined music is relatively shorter than the predetermined second music pattern And the first music pattern is outputted by the music output means for outputting the first common portion of the predetermined music (for example, the A melody of the first section), and the predetermined branching period (for example, It is a music pattern that is predetermined to output a specific portion of the predetermined music (for example, reverse rotation of the fifth section) after the first branch section has elapsed, and the second music pattern is the music pattern Music out It is a music pattern which is predetermined that the specific portion of the predetermined music is not output after the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the force unit and the predetermined branch period has elapsed. The music output means, even when either of the first music pattern and the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, a predetermined time (for example, an initial section is started before the start of the first R) Starting the output of the predetermined music from the waiting time), and when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection unit, the second round game execution unit A game machine characterized in that it is a time when an output of the specific part of the predetermined music can be started before execution of a specific second round game is started.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even in the first specific gaming state in which the specific second round game is executed, and in the second specific gaming state in which the specific second round game is not executed, predetermined music (for example, The first common portion (for example, A melody of the first section) of the music according to the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is allowed to elapse. And, in the first specific gaming state, after the lapse of this predetermined branching period, it outputs a specific portion of the predetermined music (for example, reverse of the fifth section) which suggests that a specific second round game is to be executed. . By configuring in this manner, the player's sense of expectation in the specific gaming state can be enhanced.

  Moreover, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, an initial section) in which the output of the specific part of the predetermined music is started before the execution of the specific second round game is started By configuring the output of a predetermined music (for example, the output of the intro of the initial section) to be started from the waiting time before the start of the 1R first when the is started, it becomes unnecessary to monitor the round game The control load can be prevented from increasing.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to produce a big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) conforming to the gaming tendency of the player (playing speed of the game), and to output predetermined music It is possible to more easily synchronize the end of the and the end of the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state).

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific gaming state is a second specific number (for example, eight times of 1 to 8 R) which is greater than the first specific number by the first round game execution means. A third specified gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state according to a hit pattern 1) in which at least one specified second round game is executed by the second round game execution means after the one round game is executed A fourth specified gaming state in which the specified second round game is not performed by the second round game execution unit after the second specified number of times of the first round game has been performed by the first round game execution unit (e.g. , The big hit game state according to the hit pattern 7), and the music pattern selection means is controlled to the third specified game state by the specified game state control means In the case where it is possible to select a third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (success)) and control to the fourth specified gaming state by the specified gaming state control means, the fourth music pattern ( For example, when the music pattern A (failed) can be selected, and the third music pattern is selected, the winning ratio determined by the winning ratio determining means is less than a predetermined threshold. A third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (success) long) is selected, and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the third predetermined pattern Select a specific third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (successful) short) in which the time during which the predetermined music is output is relatively shorter by the music output means than the music pattern When the fourth music pattern is selected, the predetermined fourth music pattern (e.g., music pattern A (failed)) if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold. Long) is selected, and the predetermined music is output by the music output unit rather than the predetermined fourth music pattern when the winning ratio determined by the winning ratio determination unit is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value. Select a specific fourth music pattern (music pattern A (failed) short) whose duration is relatively short, and the third music pattern is selected by the music output unit as the predetermined music After the first common portion is output and the predetermined branch period elapses, the second common portion (for example, B melody of the second section) of the predetermined music is further output, and a specific branch period (for example, Second It is a music pattern in which it is determined in advance that the specific part (for example, chorus of the third section) of the predetermined music is output after the 2-branching section) has elapsed, and the fourth music pattern is the music pattern The first common part of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and after the predetermined branching period has elapsed, the second common part of the predetermined music is further output, and the specific branching period is It is a music pattern which is predetermined that the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the passage of time, and the music output means is configured to select the third music pattern and the fourth music by the music pattern selection means. Even when any of the patterns is selected, the output of the predetermined music is started from the predetermined time, and the third music pattern is selected by the music pattern selecting means at the predetermined time. It is a time when output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started before execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means when the game is selected. The above-mentioned gaming machine characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in any of the first to fourth specific gaming states, the first common portion (for example, the first section) of the predetermined music (for example, the music corresponding to the music pattern A) A) M) is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is allowed to elapse. Here, in the first specific gaming state, after the lapse of the predetermined branching period, it outputs a specific portion (for example, reverse of the fifth section) of the predetermined music that suggests that the specific second round game is to be executed. In the third specific gaming state or the fourth gaming state, it further outputs the second common portion of the predetermined music (for example, B melody of the second section), and a specific branch period (for example, the second branch section) Let) pass. And, in the third specific gaming state, after the lapse of this specific branching period, it outputs a specific portion (for example, the rust of the third section) of the predetermined music that suggests that the specific second round game is to be executed. . By configuring in this manner, the player's sense of expectation in the specific gaming state can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern which is occupied when one of the first music pattern and the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means is selected. The degree of expectation in which the third music pattern is selected when the music pattern selection means selects any of the third music pattern and the fourth music pattern is higher than the degree of expectation. The gaming machine as described above, characterized in that it is configured as follows.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern is selected when one of the first music pattern and the second music pattern is selected (for example, 18 + 17 = 35/200). The third music pattern is selected if any of the third music pattern and the fourth music pattern is selected (for example, 46 + 16 = 62/200) than the expectation (for example, 18/35) By setting a high degree of expectation (for example, 46/62), the second common portion (for example, B section of the second section) of the predetermined music after the predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) has elapsed. When the) is output, the degree of expectation for the specific second round game to be executed is relatively high, so it is possible to diversify the role of a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section), In the gaming state Kick it is possible to further increase the player's expectation.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the predetermined music includes a first music and a second music, and a music pattern corresponding to the first music is selected by the music pattern selection unit. In the case where the music pattern corresponding to the second music is selected by the music pattern selection means, rather than the expectation for the second round game execution means to execute the specific second round game The gaming machine as described above, characterized in that the second round game execution means is configured to have a higher expectation for executing the specific second round game.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific second round game when the music pattern (for example, the music pattern A) corresponding to the first music (for example, the music corresponding to the music pattern A) is selected To the second music (for example, the music according to the music pattern B) than the degree of expectation that is performed (for example, the ratio in which the hit pattern 1 or 3 is determined when the music pattern A is selected) The degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed when the corresponding music pattern (for example, music pattern B) is selected (for example, when the music pattern B is selected, the hit pattern 1 or 3 is determined By configuring the ratio “high”, it is possible to change the degree of expectation among the pieces of music, and it is possible to further enhance the player's sense of expectation in the specific gaming state.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, the gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, A variable winning device (e.g., a first start port 32 and a second start port 33), which is provided in the game area and can be varied between a first mode in which game media can be easily received and a second mode in which game media is hard to receive. A specific gaming state (for example, a big hit) which is advantageous to the player by fluctuating the variable winning device on condition that game media has passed through the large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37) and the starting area It is determined that the specific gaming state transition determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to the gaming state), and the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determining means. Article Specific gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the gaming state to the specific gaming state and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the game medium passes the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state) Special game state control means (for example, ST game state) which is controlled to a special game state (for example, ST game state) different from the specific game state for a predetermined number of games (for example, 180 times) after the specific game state is over For example, after the predetermined number of games played in the special game state is performed in the main CPU 61), the normal game state (for example, normal) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state and the special game state Normal gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) to control the gaming state (non-probability change / non-short time), the above-mentioned specific gaming state, the above special gaming card And, in the normal gaming state, a story effect executing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) for executing an effect associated with a specific story, and an effect associated with the specific story executed by the story effect executing means Story presentation control means (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the progression, and the specific story includes at least a first story (for example, a first story) and a second story (for example, a second story) And the story effect control means includes at least a first effect control state in which an effect related to the first story is executed by the story effect execution means, and the second effect effect by the story effect execution means. And a second effect control state in which an effect related to the story of (1) The effect control state transition control means is provided to cause transition from the effect control state to the second effect control state based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition, wherein the predetermined transition condition is the specific game in the special game state A gaming machine comprising: being controlled to the normal gaming state by the normal gaming state control means without being controlled to the specific gaming state by the state control means.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform story rendition with appropriate relevance in a plurality of gaming states, and it is possible to use a specific state even when the state advantageous to the player has ended. By advancing the story, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's willingness to play.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, a gaming area provided in the gaming area) , A first start port 32, a second start port 33), and a variable winning device (for example, provided in the gaming area and capable of receiving a game medium easily and a second mode in which game media can not easily be received) A specific gaming state (for example, the player is advantageous by fluctuating the variable winning device on condition that the game medium has passed the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37) and the start area The specific gaming state transition judging means (for example, the main CPU 61) which determines whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state), and the specific gaming state transition judging means obtain the judgment result to shift to the specific gaming state This The specific gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the gaming state to the specific gaming state on condition of the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, gaming media pass through the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state) In the special game state control (for example, ST gaming state) which is different from the specific gaming state for a predetermined number of games (for example, 180 times) after the specific gaming state is ended. A normal gaming state (for example, the main CPU 61) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific gaming state and the special gaming state after the game having the predetermined number of games has been performed in the special gaming state , Normal game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) to control to the normal game state (non-probability change · non-time short), the above-mentioned specific game state, the special A story effect executing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) for executing an effect related to a specific story in the skill state and the normal gaming state, and the specific story executed by the story effect executing means A story effect control unit (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the progress of the effect, and the specific story includes at least a first story (for example, a first story) and a second story (for example, a second story) The story effect control means includes a first effect control state in which at least the effect related to the first story is executed by the story effect execution means, and the story effect execution means And a second effect control state in which an effect related to the second story is executed, The effect control state transition control means for causing transition from the first effect control state to the second effect control state based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition is included, and the predetermined transition condition is the specific gaming state transition control A gaming machine characterized by being controlled to the specific gaming state by means, or being controlled to the special gaming state by the special gaming state transition control means.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform story rendition with appropriate relevance in a plurality of gaming states, and when a transition to a state advantageous to the player, a specific story progresses As a result, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, the gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, A variable winning device (e.g., a first start port 32 and a second start port 33), which is provided in the game area and can be varied between a first mode in which game media can be easily received and a second mode in which game media is hard to receive. A specific gaming state (for example, a big hit) which is advantageous to the player by fluctuating the variable winning device on condition that game media has passed through the large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37) and the starting area Specific game state transition judging means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to the gaming state), identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 53 for displaying the identification information in a variable manner, second special) Symbol display 5 And the variation pattern determination unit (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be variably displayed by the identification information display unit according to the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination unit; Specific gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling the gaming state to the specific gaming state on condition that the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the gaming state transition determining means, and a predetermined Predetermined gaming state control means for controlling a predetermined gaming state (for example, ST gaming state) different from the specific gaming state when the condition is satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state); In the predetermined gaming state, the predetermined number of games is set as one set, and the number of games in the one set is counted. An effect executing means (for example, an in-set effect) which can execute a series of effects over the predetermined number of games in the predetermined gaming state (for example, an in-set counter) , Liquid crystal display device 4), and effect control means (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the progress of the predetermined effect, the variation pattern determination means determines the transition to the specific game state in the predetermined game state When the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is not obtained by the means, the first variation pattern (for example, shortening variation A) corresponding to the specific variation time (for example, 2s) is highly likely. It can be determined, and in the predetermined gaming state, the determination result of the transition to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determining means. In this case, it is possible to determine a second variation pattern (for example, special variations A to E) different from the first variation pattern, and the effect control means determines the predetermined number of games during the specific variation time. Let the time (for example, 10s) multiplied by a be a basic effect time, and make the effect executing means execute the predetermined effect based on the basic effect time, and the fluctuation pattern determining In the case where the determination result of transitioning to the specific gaming state is obtained by the gaming state transition determination means, in synchronization with the end of the predetermined effect based on the counting result by the in-set game number counting means A game machine characterized in that the second fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time to be can be determined with high probability.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the effect time of the predetermined effect (for example, the effect in the set) in which a series of effects are executed over a plurality of games and the fluctuation time of the identification symbol can be appropriately configured with a simple configuration. To shift to a specific gaming state in the middle game of a predetermined effect without increasing the control load and the amount of information stored in the storage area (it became a big hit) Even in the case where it is determined, it is possible to advance the predetermined rendition as much as possible without causing wrinkles.

[Example of another embodiment]
Next, another example of the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 117 is a perspective view showing a special winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. In addition, about the component the same as that of the embodiment mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 117 is provided with only one big winning opening.

  As shown in FIG. 117, a large winning opening 37 is provided in part of the game board. Inside the big winning opening 37, a ball passage 37B for guiding the gaming ball downward is formed. At the lower end of the ball passage 37B, a specific area 38A and a nonspecific area 38B are provided to be adjacent to each other on the left and right. At the position where it enters the ball passage from the special winning opening 37, a special winning opening count switch 370 is disposed. The specific area switch 380A is disposed in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the gaming ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is disposed in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of gaming balls to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. In the vicinity of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B inside the ball passage 37B, a displacement member 39 'which can be displaced to the left and right is provided. In FIG. 117, the position in which the displacement member 39 'is indicated by a solid line is the position after displacement, and in FIG. 117, the position in which the displacement member 39' is indicated by an imaginary line is an initial position.

  The displacement member 39 'switches the specific area 38A to the open state or the closed state. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 117, when the displacing member 39 'is at the left fixed position farthest from the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is opened, and the game ball V wins to the specific area 38A. Make it easy. At this time, the displacement member 39 'forms a gap between the right side wall of the ball passage 37B and the gaming ball to allow sufficient passage. Thus, the gaming ball guided from above the ball passage 37B can be guided downward between the right side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39 'and pass through the specific area 38A. is there. In addition, when the displacement member 39 'is in the fixed position on the left side, a gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'. Thus, the gaming ball guided from above the ball passage 37B may pass through the non-specific area 38B by passing between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39 '.

  When the specific area is in the open state, the displacement member may be moved to a position where the gaming ball can not pass through the non-specific area. In addition, when the specific area is opened, the first position of the displacement member where the gaming ball can pass through the non-specific area, and the first position of the displacement member where the gaming ball can not pass through the non-specific area The displacement member may be fixed at any one of two positions, and the displacement member may be controlled to move to the first position or the second position according to the game mode or the like. For example, when the displacement member is fixed at the second position, the game ball always passes the specific area if winning in the special winning opening, so a more advantageous game for the player than in the above-described embodiment. A mode can be provided.

  On the other hand, as shown by phantom lines in FIG. 117, when the displacement member 39 'is in the fixed position on the right side closest to the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is closed and the gaming ball to the specific area 38A is Make the V winning a prize impossible. At this time, the displacement member 39 'forms a gap through which the gaming ball can pass with the left side wall of the ball passage 37B. Thus, the gaming ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39 'and always passes through the non-specific area 38B. Become.

  Even in a pachinko gaming machine using such a displacement member 39 ', it is possible to shift to a probability variation gaming state or the like after the end of the big hit gaming state which succeeded in V winning in the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state. That is, according to the large winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 117, it is relatively difficult to pass the gaming ball to the specific area 38A even when only one large winning opening (variable winning device) is provided. Since it becomes possible to execute one round game and a specific second round game which makes it relatively easy to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A, two big winning openings (variable winning devices on the game board) Even if it is difficult to secure the space to install), it is easy to shift to the special game state according to the open pattern of the big winning opening (variable winning device) in the specific game state, or It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine having a game characteristic that makes it difficult.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a special winning opening / closing pattern (modification) of a game machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. These are figures which show the displacement member action | operation pattern corresponding to the big winning opening opening / closing pattern of FIG. The big winning opening / closing pattern and the displacement member actuation pattern shown in FIGS. 118 and 119 are applied to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the modification of the special winning opening / closing pattern is basically the same as the special winning opening / closing pattern shown in FIG. 53, and is applied to one special winning opening provided with a specific region. It is a possible big winning opening opening and closing pattern. In such a big winning opening opening and closing pattern, as shown in FIG. 119, the displacement member 39 ′ for opening and closing the specific area 38A is, for example, in the activated state only at the 10th eye, and in the position shown by the solid line in FIG. Become. On the other hand, in the 1st to 9th eyes and the 11th to 16th eyes, the displacement member 39 'is brought into the non-operation state, and is in the state shown by the phantom line in FIG. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which such a special winning opening / closing pattern is applied to one large winning opening, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be realized.

  FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing special symbol control processing of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. In this special symbol control process, only one large winning opening is provided, but a specific area is not provided, and the main CPU determines whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state according to the type of the big hit symbol. Applies to

  As shown in FIG. 120, first, in S1000, the main CPU performs a process of determining the presence or absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU determines that there is no start memory for the special symbol game, that is, when data is not stored in the special symbol start storage area (0) to the special symbol start storage area (4), the data is stored. Repeat this process until stored. On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that there is start storage, the process proceeds to S1001.

  At S1001, the main CPU executes a big hit determination process. In this processing, the main CPU is for the high probability big hit determination table having a large number of big hit determination values or a low probability for a small number of big hit determination values depending on whether or not the gaming state flag indicates the probability variation gaming state. Refer to the big hit judgment table of. Further, the main CPU is extracted at the time of winning of the game ball, and refers to the random value for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area and the selected big hit determination table. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the big hit determination value match, the main CPU determines that it is a big hit. That is, the main CPU determines whether or not to make the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process ends, the process moves to S1002.

  In S1002, the main CPU determines whether the determination result of S1001 is a big hit. In this process, when the main CPU determines that the game is a big hit, it shifts the process to S1003. On the other hand, if the main CPU determines that it is not a big hit, that is, if it determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S1000.

  At S1003, the main CPU controls the jackpot gaming state. That is, the main CPU performs a large winning opening open display command, a large winning opening open data setting, and the like. When this process ends, the process moves to S1004.

  In S1004, the main CPU performs processing to determine whether or not the control of the jackpot gaming state executed in S1003 is based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit. If it is determined that it is based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit, the processing is shifted to S1006. If it is determined that it is not based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit, the processing is shifted to S1005.

  In S1005, the main CPU performs control of the non-probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state which started control in S1003. That is, in the big hit gaming state based on a special symbol other than the definite variation big hit, it will shift to the non-probable variation playing state after the end. When shifting to such a non-probability changing gaming state, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000 again.

  In S1006, the main CPU performs control of the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state which started the control in S1003. That is, in the big hit gaming state based on the special symbol of the definite variation big hit, it will shift to the probability changing gaming state after the end thereof. When shifting to such a probability change gaming state, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000 again.

  In the pachinko gaming machine to which such special symbol control processing is applied, by providing the same effect mode and the like as those of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for the easy-to-win round to the big winning opening.

<Summary of the invention>
In the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-214010), since the movable part can move between the liquid crystal display area and the outside of the liquid crystal display area, it is on the front of the liquid crystal display device. The movable part can be easily moved. By the way, since the installation space of the movable part is limited in the first place in the gaming machine, if the movable part also moves in the standby position inside the gaming machine, the installation of the movable part in the standby position It is difficult to secure space.

  In particular, since the size and the number of movable features are determined according to the space of the gaming machine, if the space of the gaming machine can be effectively used, the movable effects are increased to further enhance the rendering effect by the movable features. It can be further enhanced.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a gaming board (1) having a gaming area (1p) on which gaming media roll, and a movable combination provided on the gaming board and movable to execute a predetermined movable effect (Lower movable effect member 101B), provided on the game board so as to be located in front of the movable role, a winning opening (first start opening 32) through which a game medium can win, and passing the winning opening And a game medium passage (ball passage 203, 204, 206) for discharging the played game media from the front of the movable character through the lower side of the movable character to the back of the gaming board, and the movable character is on standby In the position, it is possible to execute a movable effect movable in the game medium passage direction at least below the movable part, and in a state where the movable part is movable in the standby position, the game medium passage is the movable part The movable part from the front of It has a configuration which is provided for so as to pass under.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the state where the movable part is moved at the standby position, the game medium passage is provided to pass from the front of the movable part from below the movable part. It is possible to secure a space in which the character moves. As a result, it is possible to increase the effect of the movable part while securing a sufficient installation space for the movable part.

  In addition, since a large installation space for the movable part can be secured, enlargement of the movable part and expansion of the movable range of the movable part at the standby position can be achieved, and the rendering by the movable part can be more effectively enhanced. be able to.

  Furthermore, by installing the winning opening in front of the movable combination, it becomes possible to make the player who has visually recognized the winning opening in the game visually recognize the movable combination present behind the winning opening. For this reason, it is possible to more effectively improve the effect of the movable role on the player.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the movable part perform a movable effect that is movable so as to expand in the radial direction at the standby position.
In this way, the movable range of the movable part can be expanded, and the rendering effect by the movable part can be more effectively improved.

  In particular, when the movable part is moved in the standby position, the gaming medium passage is provided to pass from the front of the movable part through the lower part of the movable part, whereby a wide space where the movable part moves in the standby position. Thus, the movable part can be moved to expand in a wider range in the radial direction. As a result, the movable part can be dynamically moved, and the effect by the movable part can be more effectively enhanced.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided by a gaming board (1) having a gaming area (1p) on which gaming media roll, and provided at the back of the gaming board by moving to a standby position and a movable position. A movable character (lower movable effect member 101B) movable to perform a predetermined movable effect, and a prize provided on the game board so as to be located in front of the movable character, and a game medium being capable of winning A gaming machine comprising: a slot (first start port 32); and a gaming medium passage (ball passage 203, 204, 206) for discharging gaming media having won a prize in the winning opening through the front of the movable combination. The movable part has a plurality of movable parts (outer ring members 117) separated in the circumferential direction via a gap (121), and in the standby position, the movable part extends in the circumferential direction through the gap. First position and at least radially outward Provided so as to move in the second position, the game medium passage is provided so as to pass through the gap.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, since the game medium discharge passage is provided to pass through the gap of the movable portion of the movable combination, it is possible to secure a space in which the movable combination moves in the standby position. As a result, it is possible to increase the effect of the movable part while securing a sufficient installation space for the movable part.

  Further, since a large installation space for the movable part can be secured, enlargement of the movable part and enlargement of the movable part at the standby position can be achieved, and the rendering by the movable part can be more effectively enhanced. .

  Furthermore, by installing the winning opening in front of the movable combination, it becomes possible to make the player who has visually recognized the winning opening in the game visually recognize the movable combination present behind the winning opening. For this reason, it is possible to more effectively improve the effect of the movable role on the player.

  In addition to this, the game medium passage can be installed in front of the movable part avoiding the movable part, so that the game board can be prevented from becoming large in the vertical direction, and the installation space of the game board can be reduced.

  In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a gaming board (1) having a gaming area (1p) on which gaming media roll, and a standby position and a movable position provided behind the gaming board And a movable prize (lower movable effect member 101B) movable to execute a predetermined movable effect, and the first winning opening (provided on the gaming board and in which gaming media can be won) A gaming machine provided with a first start opening 32) and a second winning opening (general winning openings 40A to 40C) provided on the gaming board and capable of winning game media, wherein the first winning opening is The first passage (ball passage 204, 206) that discharges the game media that has won the prize in the lower part of the movable combination, and the gaming medium that has won the second winning opening is discharged through the lower part of the movable combination Second passage (ball passage 212) and the first passage A first sensor (first start opening switch 320) for detecting gaming media rolling in a first direction, the gaming media passing through the first passage, and provided in the second passage A second sensor (general winning opening sensor 400A) for detecting game media rolling in a second direction different from the first direction, and the first sensor is further forward than the second sensor And a magnetic detection sensor (magnetic sensor 214) is provided under the movable part so as to be located between the first passage and the second passage. The passage and the second passage have a configuration in which downstream areas where game media are discharged merge.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first passage is provided with the first sensor for detecting gaming media rolling in the first direction, and the second passage is provided with the second sensor different from the first direction. A second sensor is provided to detect gaming media rolling in the direction, and the first passage and the second passage are joined, for example, in the horizontal and upper The first passage and the second passage can be installed in different directions such as the direction, and the first passage and the second passage can be merged.

  In addition to this, the first sensor is disposed forward of the second sensor, and a magnetic detection sensor is provided below the movable part between the first passage and the second passage. Three sensors consisting of one sensor, a second sensor and a magnetic detection sensor can be installed in a small space below the movable part.

  For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of the movable part while securing a sufficient installation space for the movable part.

  Further, since a large installation space for the movable part can be secured, the movable part can be increased in size, and the rendering by the movable part can be more effectively enhanced.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided on the gaming board (1) having a gaming area (1p) on which gaming media roll, and behind the gaming board, and is movable to execute a predetermined movable effect. The movable port (lower movable effect member 101B), the winning opening (the first start port 32) provided on the gaming board, where the gaming medium can be won, and the gaming medium which has won the winning opening are discharged downstream A winning opening unit (first start opening member 202) having an upstream game medium passage (203, 204) and a lightable electric decoration board (215), and a game medium to be discharged to the upstream game medium passage; A game medium passage (ball passage unit 205) in which a downstream game medium passage (ball passage 206) for discharging through the lower part of the movable part is formed, and the downstream game medium provided in the downstream game medium passage Game media passing through the passage A gaming medium detection member (first start opening switch 320) for detecting a game signal, and a wire (cable 216) connected to the electric decoration board, the game machine being positioned above the gaming medium detection member Thus, the support portion (protrusion 217) provided on the upper surface of the game medium passage portion and supporting the wiring extending from the electric decoration substrate, the movable part and the game medium to cover the upper side of the support portion And a covering member (semi-cylindrical member 219) provided between the passage and the passage.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the upstream game medium passage and the downstream game medium passage can be passed from the front of the movable part from the front of the movable part to the lower part of the movable part, and a space in which the movable part is movable is secured. can do. As a result, it is possible to increase the effect of the movable part while securing a sufficient installation space for the movable part.

  Further, since a large installation space for the movable part can be secured, the movable part can be increased in size, and the rendering by the movable part can be more effectively enhanced.

  Further, the game medium detection member is provided on the upper surface of the game medium passage portion so as to be positioned above the game medium detection member, and has a support portion for supporting the wire extending from the electric decoration board. It can prevent fluttering at the bottom. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the wiring from interfering with the movable combination when the movable combination is moved, and it is possible to smoothly move the movable combination and to protect the wiring from the movable combination.

  Furthermore, since the covering member is provided between the movable part and the game medium passage part so as to cover the upper side of the support part, the wiring and the movable part can be shielded by the covering member, and the wiring is movable when the movable part is moved. Interference with the movable part can be prevented more effectively. In addition, when the game medium flows down from the movable role side, the game medium can be prevented from colliding with the wiring by colliding the game medium with the covering member, and the wiring can be protected from the game medium.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the support portion includes a U-shaped protrusion (217) protruding from the upper surface of the game medium passage portion, and the wiring is supported by the protrusion by the binding member. Is preferred.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can firmly fasten the wire to the projection by the binding member such as the binding band, and the wire can be more effectively prevented from flapping below the movable part.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-214010), the movable part only moves between the liquid crystal display area and the outside of the liquid crystal display area, and the movable part is , Does not move in the standby position. This makes it impossible to further enhance the rendering effect of the movable combination.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a movable part (lower movable effect member 101B) movable to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving between the standby position and the movable position. The movable part has a first movable body (movable body 106) movable in one direction and the other direction by rotation of a driving member (motor 110A), and a pressing portion (107C), and the first movable object A second movable body (movable body 107) movable on the movable body and movable with the first movable body in the one direction and the other direction, and the other direction together with the second movable body An interlocking portion (arm member) having a third movable body (movable body 108) movable in the second direction and a guide hole (112A) and provided swingably in the first movable body and capable of being pressed by the pressing portion 112) and the interlocking portion A rotary member (rotary body 114) having a first fitting portion (fitting projection 114A) and a plurality of slits (114B) and rotatably provided on the third movable body, and the plurality of slits Movable member having a second fitting portion (fitting projection 115A) to be engaged, and a movable portion (slider member 115 and outer ring member 117) movable at least in the radial direction of the rotating member by rotation of the rotating member And the first movable body and the second movable body by rotating the drive member forward from an initial position in a state where the movable part is positioned at the standby position. To move the movable part at least in the radial direction while allowing only the rotation of the rotating member, the driving member By reversely rotating from the initial position, the third movable body is moved while the first movable body is moved in the other direction to convert the swing of the interlocking part into rotation of the rotating member in one direction. The movable part is moved to the movable position to move the movable part at least in the radial direction.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, two different effects such as an effect of moving the movable role at the standby position and an effect of moving the standby position from the standby position to the movable position are divided into one rotation direction of the single drive member. It can be easily performed only by switching, and can further enhance the effect of the movable combination.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-214010), although the movable character is capable of emitting light, a decorative member capable of emitting light separately from the movable character is provided. In this case, it is necessary to separately provide a light emitting portion in the decorative member, which increases the manufacturing cost of the light emitting element.

  In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a movable part (upper movable presentation member 101A) movable between a standby position and a movable position, and a full color provided on the movable part. A first light emitting unit (LED 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a) which is a light emitting body, and a colored lens member (front face ornament 160) provided on the movable part and positioned in front of the first light emitting unit; A decorative member (99) provided in front of the movable part located in the standby position and capable of transmitting at least a rear light forward is provided behind the decorative member and emits light to the decorative member And a second light emitting unit (LED 291) which is a single-color light emitting body, wherein the first light emitting unit emits light in a state in which the movable part is located at the standby position; Movable character It is possible to change the color to a color similar to the light emission color of the second light emitting unit, and when the movable part is positioned from the standby position to the movable position, it is viewed from the front of the decorative member The color of the decorative member can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first light emitting unit emits light in a state where the movable role is located at the standby position, whereby the color of the movable role viewed from the front is the color of the second light emitting portion. Since the light emitting color can be changed to the same color as the light emitting color, it is possible to make the decorative member emit light by the movable part, without providing the light emitting portion on the decorative member. In addition to this, the mounting amount of the full color first light emitting unit can be reduced, and the decorative member can emit light in the same color. As a result, the configuration of the decorative member can be simplified to reduce the manufacturing cost of the decorative member.

Moreover, since it is not necessary to secure the space which provides a light emission part in a decoration member, sufficient space of the depth of a decoration member is securable.
In addition, since the color of the decorative member viewed from the front of the decorative member can be changed when the movable character comes from the standby position to the movable position, various colors can be produced by the movable character, It is possible to improve the presentation of the movable role.

  In addition, for example, if the effect of moving the movable part from the standby position to the movable position while emitting light is performed, the movable part moving while emitting the line of sight of the player can be noticed. This makes it possible to highlight the effect of the movable part.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-214010), the movable part only moves between the liquid crystal display area and the outside of the liquid crystal display area. The presentation is monotonous. For this reason, the rendering effect by the movable role can not be enhanced.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable part (upper movable presentation member 101A) movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, The movable part is provided so as to be relatively movable with respect to the first movable base movably provided (rear side movable base 163) and the first movable base, and a plurality of movable members (upper left blade member 172, a second movable base (front movable base 164) pivotally supporting the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175), and the first movable base A first engaging portion (engaging projection 163D) and the second movable base are movably provided, and the movable member is moved relative to the first movable base by moving relative to the second movable base. 3rd to swing to position 2 A movable base (blade movable rack 165), a second engaging portion (engaging projection 165G) provided on the third movable base and engageable with the first engaging portion, and one end portion thereof And a biasing member (coil spring 171) attached to the second movable base and having the other end attached to the third movable base, and the movable part moves from the standby position to the movable position In this case, the first movable base and the second movable base are moved relative to each other so that the second engaging portion engages with the first engaging portion. When the third movable base is moved to rock the movable member from the first position to the second position and moved from the movable position to the standby position, the biasing member The movable member swings from the second position to the first position It has a configuration that biases the third movable base so.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the movable role moves from the standby position to the movable position, the first movable base and the second movable base move so as to extend relative to each other. The engagement portion engages with the first engagement portion to move the third movable base to swing the movable member from the first position to the second position. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the movable combination with a simple configuration.

  When the movable part moves from the movable position to the standby position, the biasing member biases the third movable base such that the movable member swings from the second position to the first position. Thus, the movable member can be quickly returned from the second position to the first position. As a result, it is possible to more effectively improve the rendering of the movable part.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a movable combination (upper movable presentation member 101A) movable to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving between a standby position and a movable position, and the movable combination The movable part has a plurality of movable members (upper left blade member 172, upper right blade member 173, lower left blade member 174 and right) which are long in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine comprising a lower wing member 175) and light emitting units (LEDs 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a) provided on the plurality of movable members, wherein the plurality of movable members are at the standby position The light emitting unit is configured to emit light toward the decoration member, the light emitting unit being configured to emit light toward the decoration member, with the longitudinal direction extending in the first direction from the standby position. Movable position When it moved to have a configuration in which the longitudinal direction are close to move in a second direction perpendicular to the first direction.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the light emitting unit is configured to be positioned behind the decorative member at the standby position and extend in the first direction in the longitudinal direction, and the light emitting portion emits light toward the decorative member. Since the plurality of movable members move in the second direction orthogonal to the first direction when the movable role moves from the standby position to the movable position, the movable members move closer to one another, thereby enhancing the rendering effect by the movable portion be able to.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the movable member has an adsorption member that generates an adsorption force, and the movable member faces in the left-right direction when moving in the second direction, and It is preferable to be adsorbed and united by the adsorption member.

  With this configuration, when the movable member moves in the second direction, the gaming machine according to the present invention combines the movable member in the adsorbed state, so that the movable member can be stably maintained. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the sway or the like of the movable member, and to more effectively improve the rendering effect by the movable combination.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable part (upper movable presentation member 101A) operable to perform a predetermined movable presentation by moving to a standby position and a movable position, The movable part has a plurality of main body members (the fixed base 162, the rear side movable base 163, the front side movable base 164), and at least one of the plurality of main body members approaches the other main body member Of the plurality of main body members increases, and when at least one of the plurality of main body members moves away from the other main body member, the overlap of the plurality of main body members decreases. A moving mechanism (rack 162A, gears 169A to 169E, protrusion 16) for moving the one body member closer to or away from the other body member. A) and a movable member (upper left blade member) which can be swung to a first position and a second position as the one main body member moves toward or away from the other main body member 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174 and a lower right blade member 175), and the plurality of main body members have guide portions extending along the extending direction of the respective main body members, The first guide portions (guide surfaces 163v and 163w) of one main body member and the second guide portions (guide surfaces 164v and 164w) of the main body member different from the one main body member face each other. A protrusion (lower stoppers 163x and 163y) is provided at an end in the extending direction of at least one of the first guide and the second guide; In the guide portion which is the other of the id portion and the second guide portion and which faces the projecting portion, the projecting portion moves as the movable part moves from the standby position toward the movable position. When the movable part moves to the movable position, it has inclined surfaces (190b, 191b) such that the separation distance, which is the distance between the lower part and the guide part facing the protrusion, is gradually narrowed. The distance between the protrusion and the guide portion facing the protrusion is the narrowest, and the movable member swings from the first position to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the movable combination is moved to the movable position, the separation distance between the projection and the guide portion facing the projection becomes the narrowest, so the movable combination is movable from the standby position. By moving to the position, the overlap of the plurality of main body members is small (the state in which the plurality of main body members extend relatively), and the ends in the extension direction of the plurality of main body members overlap in a short length. The main body members of can be firmly connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of rattling when the movable part moves to the movable position.

  Furthermore, when the movable part moves from the standby position to the movable position, the guide part of the opposing main body member can be moved along the inclined surface. As a result, the main body members can be smoothly moved to a small overlap state and a large overlap state (a plurality of main body members relatively contracting), and as a result, the smooth operation of the movable part is achieved. It can be carried out.

  Further, in addition to the narrowing of the distance between the projection and the guide facing the projection when the movable part is moved to the movable position, the movable member is moved from the first position to the second position. Because it swings to, it is possible to improve the effect of the movable combination more effectively.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-214010), it is considered that the wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light emitting substrate, but the wiring is for the movable part. It is unclear how it is wired.

  As a result, it is not possible to know how the wiring and the member such as the gear for driving the movable part are laid out when the movable part moves in a complicated manner, and the wiring is performed with the movement of the movable part. Can not know if it can move smoothly.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable combination operable to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, wherein the movable combination is a plurality of movable combination It has a main body member (fixed base 162, rear movable base 163, front movable base 164), and when at least one of the plurality of main body members moves so as to approach the other main body member, the main body members overlap Becomes larger, and when at least one of the plurality of main body members moves away from the other main body member, the overlapping of the main body members is reduced, and the plurality of one main body members is the other main body A moving mechanism (rack 162A, gear 169A, gears 169B to 169E, protrusion 164A) for moving the member toward or away from the member, and the one main body member A movable member ((upper left blade member 172, upper right blade member 173, lower left, and so on) that can swing to a first position and a second position as it moves closer to or away from another main body member Part wing member 174 and lower right part wing member 175), light emitting parts capable of emitting light (LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a), and wiring (flexible cable 186) connected to the light emitting part, A wire is locked to the one main body member and the other main body member, and is bent and wired between the one main body member and the other main body member, and the movement mechanism is the one The wire is installed on one side across the central axis in the width direction of either one of the main body member and the other main body member, and the wiring is installed on the other.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the wiring is locked to the one main body member and the other main body member, and is bent and wired between the one main body member and the other main body member. When one body member moves closer to or away from another body member, the wiring can be smoothly moved while preventing the body members from floating relative to the plurality of body members.

  Furthermore, the moving mechanism is installed on one side across the central axis in the width direction of either one main body member or the other main body member, and the wiring is installed on the other, thereby preventing the wiring from interfering with the moving mechanism. Therefore, one body member and another body member can be moved relative to each other. Thus, the wiring can be moved more effectively and smoothly.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-214010), it is considered that the wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light emitting substrate, but the wiring is for the movable part. It is unclear how it is wired.

  As a result, when the movable part moves in a complicated manner, it is not possible to know how the wiring is accommodated with respect to the movable part, and the wiring accommodated in the movable part is stored. There is a possibility of fluttering inside.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable part (upper movable presentation member 101A) movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, The movable part has a plurality of main body members (the fixed base 162, the rear side movable base 163, the front side movable base 164) which move relative to each other, wires (flexible cables 186) attached to the plurality of main body members, And at least one projecting portion (198) provided on at least one of the main body members, wherein the movable part generally overlaps so that the plurality of main body members relatively shrink in the standby position, In the movable position, the plurality of main body members overlap so as to extend relatively, and the wiring is configured to move the main body member when the movable part moves from the movable position to the standby position. It is bent in housed between, and has a configuration to flex by being pressed against the protrusion.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the movable part moves from the movable position to the standby position, it is bent and stored between the main body members and is bent by being pressed against the projecting portion, The wiring folded and stored between the plurality of main body members can be further bent by the projecting portion.

  Thereby, the length of the wiring accommodated between the plurality of main body members can be increased to reduce the gap between the main body member and the wiring, and the piping can be prevented from fluttering between the main body members, and the wiring can be a main body member It can be stably housed between

  Further, by further bending the wiring by the projecting portion, it is possible to generate a restoring force which tends to extend straight from the bent state of the wiring. For this reason, it is possible to more effectively prevent the wiring from fluttering between the main body members by increasing the frictional force between the wiring and the main body members, and the wiring can be accommodated more stably by the main body members.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-214010), in the state where the movable part moves from the liquid crystal display area to the outside of the liquid crystal display area, the rattle of the movable part is Not configured to prevent.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable part (upper movable presentation member 100) operable to perform a predetermined movable presentation by moving to a standby position and a movable position, The movable part has a plurality of main body members (the fixed base 162, the rear side movable base 163, the front side movable base 164), and at least one of the plurality of main body members approaches the other main body member When the main body member is moved to the side, the overlapping of the main body members is reduced when at least one main body member of the plurality of main body members is moved away from the other main body member. The member has a guide portion extending along the extension direction of each of the main body members, and the first guide portion (guide surfaces 163v and 163w) of at least one of the main body members The second guide portions (guide surfaces 164v and 164w) of the main body members different from the one main body member are provided to face each other, and the first guide portion and the second guide portion are provided. A protrusion (lower stoppers 163x and 163y) is provided at an end in at least one of the extension directions, which is either the first guide or the second guide, which is the other, In the guide facing the projection, as the movable accessory moves from the standby position toward the movable position, a separation distance which is a distance between the projection and the guide facing the projection. Is provided with an inclined surface (190b, 191b) which gradually narrows.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the distance between the projecting portion and the guiding portion facing the projecting portion as the movable role moves from the standby position to the movable position in the guiding portion facing the projecting portion The inclined surface is provided such that the separation distance is gradually narrowed. Thus, when the movable part moves from the standby position to the movable position, the gap between the protrusion and the guide of the opposing main body member facing the protrusion can be reduced.

  Thereby, when the movable part moves from the standby position to the movable position, the overlap of the plurality of main body members is small (the plurality of main body members extend relatively), and the end of the plurality of main body members in the extending direction When overlapping in a short length, multiple body members can be rigidly connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of rattling when the movable part moves to the movable position.

  Furthermore, when the movable part moves from the standby position to the movable position, the guide part of the opposing main body member can be moved along the inclined surface. Thus, the main body members can be smoothly moved to a state in which the overlap between the main body members is small and a state in which the overlap is large (a state in which the plurality of main body members are relatively contracted).

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-214010), it is considered that the wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light emitting substrate, but the wiring is for the movable part. It is unclear how it is wired. Therefore, no consideration is given to reducing the load applied to the wiring.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a movable part (upper movable presentation member 100) movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, The movable part comprises a main body member (case 161), a flexible cable 186 provided on the main body member, and a wiring board (relay board 185) connected to the wiring, and the main body member is the wiring And a second groove (guide groove 188) extending orthogonally to the extending direction of the first groove and in which the wiring is fitted And the first groove is the other end in the extending direction communicating with the second groove from one end (187a) in the extending direction located at the connection position of the wiring substrate and the wiring. With a bottom (187c) inclined towards the section (187b), The wiring is connected to the main body member by a fastening member (189) at a position where the other end in the extending direction of the first groove and the one end (188a) in the extending direction of the second groove communicate with each other. It has a configuration that has been concluded.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first groove extends from one end in the extending direction located at the connection position of the wiring substrate and the wiring to the other end in the extending direction in which the first groove communicates with the second groove. Because of the sloping bottom surface, the wire fitted in the first groove can extend along the sloped bottom surface of the first groove to the second groove.

  For this reason, the wire is bent compared to the case where the inclination of one end of the first groove in the extending direction located at the connection position between the wiring and the wiring substrate is steep (for example, a step having an inclination of 90 °). Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to protect the wiring by preventing a load from being applied to the connection position between the wiring and the wiring substrate.

  Further, the wiring is fastened to the main body member by the fastening member at a position where the other end of the first groove in the extending direction and the one end of the second groove in the communicating direction communicate with each other. The wire can be prevented from fluttering at a bent position where the second groove and the second groove communicate with each other.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-214010), it is considered that the wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light emitting substrate, but the wiring is for the movable part. It is unclear how it is wired.

  As a result, it is not possible to know how the wiring and the member such as the gear for driving the movable part are laid out when the movable part moves in a complicated manner, and the wiring is performed with the movement of the movable part. Can not know if it can move smoothly.

  Furthermore, in the case where the movable part moves in a complicated manner, it is not possible to know how the wiring is accommodated with respect to the movable part, and the wiring accommodated in the movable part is the movable part. There is a possibility of fluttering internally.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable part (upper movable presentation member 101A) movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, The movable part is movable relative to the fixed base (162) having a first rack (rack 162A) on which a first concavo-convex part (rack teeth 162a) continuous in the longitudinal direction is formed, and the fixed base A first movable base (rear) provided with a first gear (gear 169A) meshing with the first uneven portion and a second gear (gears 169B to 169E) to which power is transmitted from the first gear Side movable base 163) and a second rack (protruding portion 164A) on which a second concavo-convex portion (rack teeth 164a) meshing with the second gear continuously in the longitudinal direction is formed and a first engaging portion (Engaging projection 163D A second movable base (front movable base 164) movable relative to a position extending relative to the first movable base and a position contracting relative to the first movable base; And a third movable base (vane movable rack 165) provided with a second engaging portion (engaging projection 165G) slidably provided on the movable base and engageable with the first engaging portion. A movable member (upper left blade member 172, upper right blade) provided on the second movable base and capable of swinging to a first position and a second position according to the sliding of the third movable base Member 173, lower left blade member 174 and lower right blade member 175), light emitting portions (LEDs 181a to 184a) provided on the movable member, wiring (flexible cable 186) connected to the light emitting portion, and the fixing Base, said first movable base and A protrusion (198) provided on at least one of the second movable base, and when the movable part is in the movable position, the end of the first movable base and the second movable The fixed base, the first movable base, and the second movable base are configured to extend relative to each other so as to overlap with the end of the base, and the wiring includes the fixed base and the second base. By being locked to the movable base, it is bent from the fixed base by the first movable base and extended and wired to the second movable base, and the first gear and the second gear Is disposed on one side across the central axis in the extension direction of the first movable base, and the wiring is disposed on the other side across the central axis in the extension direction of the first movable base, The movable role is in the standby position Sometimes, the wiring is bent and accommodated between the fixed base and the first movable base and between the first movable base and the second movable base, and pressed against the projection. It has a configuration that bends.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the wiring is locked to the fixed base and the second movable base, so that the wiring is bent from the fixed base to the first movable base and extends to the second movable base. Since the wiring is performed, the wiring is moved to the first movable base and the second movable base when the first movable base and the second movable base move to the relatively extended position and the relatively contracted position. The wiring can be moved smoothly while preventing floating against the surface.

  Further, the first gear and the second gear are installed on one side across the central axis in the extension direction of the first movable base, and the wiring is on the other side across the central axis in the extension direction of the first movable base Relative to the position where the first movable base and the second movable base extend relatively while preventing the wiring from interfering with the first gear and the second gear. It can be moved to the position. Thus, the wiring can be moved more effectively and smoothly.

  Furthermore, when the movable part is in the standby position, the wiring is bent and accommodated between the fixed base and the first movable base and between the first movable base and the second movable base, and the projection Since it bends by being pressed to the shape part, the wiring bent and stored in the plurality of main body members can be further bent by the protruding part.

  Thereby, the length of the wiring accommodated between the plurality of main body members can be increased to reduce the gap between the main body member and the wiring, and the wiring can be prevented from fluttering inside the main body member, and the wiring can be a main body member It can be stored stably.

  Further, by further bending the wiring by the projecting portion, it is possible to generate a restoring force which tends to extend straight from the bent state of the wiring. For this reason, the friction force between the wiring and the main body member can be increased, the wiring can be more effectively prevented from fluttering inside the main body member, and the wiring can be accommodated more stably by the main body member.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-79356), since the game balls winning from the plurality of game medium winning openings are merged in one ball passage and discharged to the discharge opening, When the number of gaming balls passing through the ball passage per unit time increases in order to shorten the gaming speed, there is a high possibility that the gaming balls won from the game media winning opening will come in contact at the merging point of the ball passages. For this reason, it is also assumed that the game ball may be clogged in the ball passage, and there is a high possibility that the game is interrupted.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first gaming medium winning opening (general winning opening 40A) in which gaming media can be won, and at least one second gaming media winning opening (general winnings) in which gaming media can be winning , A first game medium passage (ball passage 208) for discharging the game medium that has won the first game medium winning opening downstream, and a game having a second game medium winning opening A game machine comprising at least one or more second game medium passages (ball passages 209 and 210) for discharging a medium downstream, wherein the second game medium passage is a combination of the second game medium prizes. The passage area, which is the area of a cross section orthogonal to the direction in which the game medium passes, merges with the first game medium passage downstream of the mouth, and is larger than the passage area of the first game medium passage. Have.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the second gaming medium passage merges with the first gaming medium passage downstream of the second gaming medium winning opening, and the passage area is the first gaming medium passage. Of the first game medium winning opening and the first game medium even if the number of game media passing through the game medium passage per unit time increases in order to reduce the game speed, for example. It is possible to prevent the game medium that has won from the second game medium winning opening from being clogged downstream of the second game medium winning opening. As a result, game media can be smoothly discharged toward the downstream, and game play can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the width in the front-rear direction of the second game medium passage is larger than the width in the front-rear direction of the first game medium passage.

  In this way, for example, while the area occupied by the second game medium passage is prevented from increasing in the vertical direction of the game board, the first game medium winning opening and the second game medium winning opening are achieved. It is possible to prevent the stacked game media from being clogged downstream of the second game media winning opening.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the width in the vertical direction of the second game medium passage is larger than the width in the vertical direction of the first game medium passage.

  In this way, for example, the area occupied by the second game medium passage is prevented from becoming large in the front-rear direction of the game board, while the first game medium winning opening and the second game medium winning opening are achieved. It is possible to prevent the stacked game media from being clogged downstream of the second game media winning opening.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the width in the front-rear direction of the second game medium passage is larger than the width in the front-rear direction of the first game medium passage.

  In this way, it is possible to prevent the area occupied by the second game medium passage from increasing in the vertical direction of the game board, and to obtain a game that has been won from the first game medium winning opening and the second game medium winning opening It is possible to prevent the medium from being clogged downstream of the second game medium winning opening.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the width in the vertical direction of the second game medium passage is larger than the width in the vertical direction of the first game medium passage.

  In this way, it is possible to prevent the area occupied by the second game medium passage from becoming large in the back and forth direction of the game board, while winning the game from the first game medium winning opening and the second game medium winning opening It is possible to prevent the medium from being clogged downstream of the second game medium winning opening.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, there are a first winning opening (first large winning opening 254) in which gaming media can be won, and at least one second winning opening (second in which the gaming media can be winning) A large winning opening 255), a first gaming medium passage (ball passage 263) for discharging gaming media that has won the first winning opening, and at least a discharging game media for winning the second winning opening. It is a gaming machine provided with one or more second game medium passages (ball passages 259), wherein the second game medium passages are downstream of the second winning opening and the first game medium passages. And the passage area, which is the area of a cross section orthogonal to the direction in which the game medium passes, is formed larger than the passage area of the first game medium passage, and the first game medium passage and A communication portion (not shown) that communicates with the first game medium passage separately from the merging portion of the Has a passage 264), the first game media prize to the winning port also has a discharge configurable in the second game medium passage through the communicating portion.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the second gaming medium passage merges with the first gaming medium passage downstream of the second winning opening, and is of a cross section orthogonal to the passing direction of the gaming medium The passage area, which is the area, is formed larger than the passage area of the first game medium passage, and communicates with the first game medium passage separately from the joining portion with the first game medium passage. It has a communicating part. In addition, since the game medium that has won the first winning opening can be discharged to the first game medium passage via the communication unit, it is possible that the game medium winning from the first winning opening is clogged downstream thereof. It can prevent. As a result, game media can be smoothly discharged toward the downstream, and game play can be improved.

1 game board 1p game area 4 liquid crystal display device 32 first starting opening (prize opening, first winning opening))
33 second starting opening 36 first large winning opening 36A first large winning opening shutter 37 second large winning opening 37 second large winning opening shutter 38A specific area 38B non specific area 39, 39 'displacement member 40A general winning opening Two winning openings, first gaming medium winning opening)
40 B General winning opening (second winning opening, second gaming media winning opening)
40C general winning opening (second winning opening, second gaming media winning opening)
61 Main CPU
71 Sub CPU
73 work RAM
83 Dispensing device 99 Decorative member 101A Upper movable effect member (movable role)
101B Lower side movable effect member (movable role)
106 Movable body (first movable body)
107 Movable body (second movable body)
108 Movable body (third movable body)
109 Movable member 110A Motor (drive member)
112 arm member (interlocking part)
114 Rotor (Rotating member)
114A mating projection (first mating part)
114B Slit 115A Fitting projection (second fitting part)
115 Slider member (movable part)
117, 117A Outer ring member (movable part)
121 Gap 160 Front decoration (lens member)
160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a LED (light emitting unit, first light emitting unit)
161 Case (body member)
162 Fixed base (fixed base)
162A rack (first rack, moving mechanism) 162a rack teeth (first uneven portion)
163 Rear movable base (body member, first movable base)
163D Engaging projection (first engaging part)
163v, 163w Guide surface (first guide part)
164v, 164w Guide surface (second guide part)
163x, 163y lower stopper (protrusion)
164 Front movable base (body member, second movable base)
164A protrusion (second rack, moving mechanism)
164a rack teeth (second uneven part)
165 Blade Movable Rack (Third Movable Base)
165G engagement projection (second engagement part)
169A gear (first gear, moving mechanism)
169B to 169E Gears (second gear, moving mechanism)
171 coil spring (biasing member)
172 Left upper blade member 172 (movable member)
173 Right upper blade member (movable member)
174 Lower left wing member (movable member)
175 Right lower wing member (movable member)
185 Relay board (wiring board)
186 Flexible cable (wiring)
187 Guide groove (first groove)
188 Guide groove (second groove)
190, 191 Guide projection (protrusion)
190a, 191a Inclined Surface 197A, 197B Magnet (Suction member)
198 projecting part 203 ball passage (upstream game medium passage, game medium passage)
204 Ball Passage (Upstream Side Play Media Passage, First Passage, Play Media Passage)
202 1st starting opening member (prize opening unit)
205 ball passage unit (game media passage)
206 Ball Passage (Downstream Side Play Media Passage, First Passage, Play Media Passage)
208 Ball Passage (First Game Media Passage)
209 ball passage (second game medium passage)
210 Ball Passage (Second Game Media Passage)
212 ball passage (second passage)
214 Magnetic Sensor (Magnetic Detection Sensor)
215 electric decoration board 216 cable (wiring)
217 projection (support part)
219 Semi-cylindrical member (cover member)
254 The first big prize mouth (the first prize mouth)
255 Second winning opening (second winning opening)
259 Ball Passage (Second Game Media Passage)
263 Ball Passage (First Game Media Passage)
264 ball passage (communication part)
291 LED (second light emitting unit)
320 First start port switch (first sensor, game medium detection member)
400A General winning opening left switch (second sensor)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a movable combination movable to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving between a standby position and a movable position,
The movable role is
A first movable body movable in one direction and the other direction by rotation of the drive member;
A second movable body having a pressing portion and movably provided to the first movable body, and movable with the first movable body in the one direction and the other direction;
A third movable body movable in the other direction together with the second movable body;
An interlocking portion which has a guide hole and is swingably provided on the first movable body and can be pressed by the pressing portion;
A rotating member provided with a first fitting portion and a plurality of slits, which are fitted to the interlocking portion, and rotatably provided on the third movable body;
A movable member having a second fitting portion fitted to the plurality of slits, and having a movable portion movable in at least a radial direction of the rotating member by rotation of the rotating member;
The first movable body and the second movable body are moved in the one direction by positively rotating the drive member from the initial position in a state where the movable role is positioned at the standby position, and the interlocking is performed. The movable portion is moved at least in the radial direction while allowing the rotation of the rotating member to be converted into rotation in a predetermined direction of the rotating member, and allowing only the rotation of the rotating member;
By reversely rotating the driving member from the initial position, the first movable body is moved in the other direction to convert the swing of the interlocking portion into rotation of the rotating member in the predetermined direction, A game machine characterized by moving the movable part in the other direction to move the movable part to the movable position and moving the movable part at least in the radial direction.

Images